Home

AT&T MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3.0 User's Manual

1. Figure 7 2 Installing the Control Unit Top Cover Initializing and Testing the System 7 21 Installing the Control Unit s Housing Installing the Front Cover To install the front cover see Figure 7 3 and follow these steps 1 Hook the top of the front cover onto the top cover 2 Push down on the bottom of the front cover until it locks securely on the base of the wire manager on the modules Figure 7 3 Installing the Control Unit Front Cover 7 22 Initializing and Testing the System Installing Applications This chapter provides installation guidelines and documentation references for the applications that the system supports You can install the following software and hardware products on the system See the documentation packaged with each application for detailed installation instructions m Stand alone products Call Accounting Terminal CAT a CAT Business CAT B a CAT Hospitality CAT H MERLIN PFC Telephone AT amp T Attendant MERLIN MAIL CONVERSANT m DOS based products Call Accounting System CAS for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System a CAS Plus V3 Business a HackerTracker System for CAS Plus V3 a CAS for Windows Installing Applications 8 1 Voice Messaging Systems and Touch Tone Receivers Call Management System CMS PassageWay Direct Connect Solution for Microsoft Windows System Pro
2. o z 2 2 a fo amp wn 2 Z 2s g Q 225 Sess gt oEs 2 oSSE n Oo n O g ao 3 Src H G36 o s TOFFEE o feg222 OQ eeaeSs Oxxe at gy W e ooo Figure D 1 PCMCIA Transition Memory Card Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 3 Backing Up with a Memory Card Inserting the Card To insert the card hold the card with the AT amp T logo facing up and the arrow pointing toward the slot See Figure D 2 for the proper way to insert the memory card into the slot on the processor module PROCESSOR MODULE a Error Status Code Display PCMCIA Interface Slot rom j f 7 ALIN Legena Tr 5 oO 3 h f H 2 T Mi LIN erecta m com Code 758 o our 4 meas Push in to remove Memory eae Card O Alarm Status LED Figure D 2 Inserting the Memory Card D 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card Memory Card Formatting The memory card may have to be formatted before you begin any manual or automatic backup procedures This section details the screens and messages that appear during the format procedure A CAUTION Formatting overwrites previous data on the memory card Make certain that there is no important information on the card before you begin formatting Unformatted Card Memory Card Backup Inserted Memory Card is not the correct type Do you want it formatted Y
3. See Figure 2 12 for the locations of line trunk jacks and telephone jacks on each module and label them as described next 2 Label each line trunk jack on the modules sequentially 1 through 80 Begin with the module in slot 1 numbering from bottom to top on each module and working from left to right across the carrier s The 100D module has 24 numbers assigned to the line trunk jack 3 Label each telephone jack sequentially 1 through 144 Begin with the module in slot 1 numbering from bottom to top on each module and working from left to right across the carrier s A CAUTION The 008 OPT module is assigned 12 logical IDs and the last four numbers are not assigned to jacks For example if the previous module on the left is labeled with logical IDs 1 through 8 label the 008 OPT jacks with logical IDs 9 through 16 Skip numbers 17 through 20 When you label the next module on the right label the first jack as logical ID 21 2 38 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Modules PFT Jack i 5 l Line Trunk or Off Premise 4 i Telephone Jacks on t 008 OPT Module 1 8 Extension i Telephone Jacks Analog or Digital 1 These four jacks are used for extension telephones on the 012 Module Figure 2 12 Line Trunk and Telephone Jack Locations on Each Module Installing the Control Unit 2 39 Replacing a Module Replacing a Module A CAUTION This section does not apply to the processor or
4. m Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Figure B 1 m Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts m Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks m Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers See System Planning for completed forms which contain more detailed information regarding the configuration of your customer s system Maintenance and Troubleshooting B 1 System Numbering Forms Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Renumber__System QO 2 Digit QO Selected Extension Numbers Q 3 Digit QO Set Up Space PEA 2 R Dig AUDIX Mod Log Jack Type Ext Set Up Renumber Old Wire Person Location VEX Voice Type ID ALALELE Eqpt N Space to Label Ext No or m EE a 10 100 7100 11 101 7101 P T te fio 7102 ep 103 7103 H sS HHI H C el T J tos vos ttt f 7 Jefi fas finnir e T sae on etors firii Po igw nso iii of T Jefiwsjzof in ie a T Jo fnojmo 111i Piet Pet it tt f a n e weep Lf aH ee ea ee 1 24 114 7114 1 115 7115 1 116 7116 sE e rar o iis 7s e o e 120 7120 121 7121 i eee a ee al Ts pape a Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions Facfory Setting t Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM or ISDN 7500B Data Module The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by onewhenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an
5. 3 3 Single Line Telephones Supported by Release 3 0 and Later 3 42 4 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 1 Network Interfaces 4 2 4 2 Central Office Network Interface Codes 4 3 Installation xiii Tables 5 1 AT amp T 572 Printer Options 5 22 5 2 AT amp T 475 476 Printer DIP Switch Settings 5 24 5 3 AT amp T CAT Printer DIP Switch Settings 5 25 Installing the PC CAT or Printer 6 Connecting Data Equipment 6 1 Data Station Configurations 6 2 6 2 7500B Data Module Settings 6 20 8 Installing Applications 8 1 TTRs Required by VMS 8 3 8 2 MERLIN MAIL Ports Required 8 17 xiv Installation Safety The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS When installing telephone equipment always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire electrical shock and injury to persons including Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install a telephone jack in a wet location unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected a
6. Exit Control Unit Problems 4 67 Module Problems This procedure can only be run on the 800 GS LS ID module or modules introduced after Release 3 0 Select Exit and repeat the upgrade procedure being careful to select the correct slot If upgrade canceled or upgrade incomplete appears on the error screen the circuit module may be unreliable or unusable until a successful upgrade is performed on it Module Error Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Upgrade Slot xx XX slot selected in Step 3 Module error Select Exit and reinitiate the upgrade procedure Upgrade Slot xx xx slot selected in Step 3 Module error Upgrade CANCELLED Upgrade INCOMPLETE Exit Select Exit and reinitiate the upgrade procedure 4 68 Control Unit Problems Module Problems EE Memory Card File Error Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Upgrade Slot xx xx slot selected in Step 3 Memory Card file error Select Exit then make sure that the memory card is properly inserted and reinitiate the upgrade procedure Upgrade Slot xx xx slot selected in Step 3 Memory Card file error Upgrade CANCELLED Upgrade INCOMPLETE Exit Select Exit then make sure that the memory card is properly inserted and reinitiate the upgrade procedure If the error occurs again select Exit and insert a new memory card then reinitiate the upgrade procedure Flash ROM F
7. Figure B 4 Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers B 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Unit Load Calculation Worksheet If you determine that you need to recalculate the unit load for any carrier use the instructions on the following worksheet NOTE m You should have a separate copy of the worksheet for each carrier m See Unit Loads in Chapter 1 for information on recalculating unit loads Maintenance and Troubleshooting C 1 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet Unit Load Worksheet 1 Number of modules in carrier excluding power supply and processor m f fewer than five auxiliary power is not required m If five or six continue to Step 2 2 Key or Behind Switch mode only Q Square LI Modified Indicate configuration of lines then go to Step 5 3 Hybrid PBX mode only Do all modules in the carrier have MLX and or analog multiline J Yes telephone jacks J No m f no auxiliary power is not required m f yes continue to Step 4 4 Hybrid PBX mode only Calculate the total number of MLX and analog multiline telephones Number of MLX 20L consoles connected to modules in the carrier Number of MLX 28D consoles connected to modules in the carrier Number of 34 button analog multiline telephones connected to modules in the carrier Total of MLX 20L MLX 28D and 34 button analog telephones m f total is less than or equal to 45 auxiliary power is not required m f the total is grea
8. Maintenance and Troubleshooting E 3 Modifying a Release 2 1 or Earlier Processor for Key Mode Right Hand Front Panel Side Panel Fs pa re e g ie z g a lt o e w 2 a a Line Up With the Semicircle on Inside of Front Panel lt TO ATTACH IGN ARROWS SLIDE MPLETE CIRCLE Slide Tongues in and Push Front Panel Up Figure E 2 Installing the Control Unit Housing E 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting rrr Glossary 7500B data module 7500B data station See ISDN 7500B Data Module A type of data station that includes an SDN 7500B Data Module as its DCE and connects to an MLX extension jack for digital transmission of data over a DS1 facility It may also include an MLX telephone for simultaneous voice and data A account code Accunet address ADDS adjunct ALS Code used to associate incoming and outgoing calls with corresponding accounts employees projects and clients AT amp T s switched digital service for 56 kops 64 kbps restricted and 64 kbps clear circuit switched data calls A coded representation of the destination of data or of the data s originating terminal such as the dialed extension number assigned to the data terminal Multiple terminals on one communication line must each have a unique address Automated Document Delivery System Computer based application that stores documents in a database and automatically faxes them on request
9. Optional equipment used with the communications system such as an alerting device or modem that connects to a multiline telephone or to an extension jack Automatic Line Selection Programmed order in which the system makes outside lines available to a user Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 1 Glossary L i AMI alternate mark inversion Line coding format in which a binary one is represented by a positive or negative pulse a binary zero is represented by no line signal and subsequent binary ones must alternate in polarity otherwise a bipolar violation occurs AMI is used in the DS1 interface analog transmission Mode of transmission in which information is represented in continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude frequency phase or resistance See also digital transmission analog data station See modem data station ANI automatic number identification Process of automatically identifying a caller s billing number and transmitting that number from the caller s local central office to another point on or off the public network application Software and or hardware that adds functional capabilities to the system For example MERLIN Identifier is an application that provides caller identification information if available in the local area or jurisdiction ARS Automatic Route Selection System feature that routes calls on outside trunks according to the number dialed and trunk availability
10. Setting Up To setup an analog voice and modem data station follow the steps below 1 If Using an external modem use an EIA 232 D cable to connect the SERIAL potion the data terminal to the modem If using an internal modem it should already be connected to the correct serial port If the data terminal has both COM1 and COM2 ports make sure you use the one designated for data transmission See the customer s system manager if you are not sure Connecting Data Equipment 6 5 Analog Voice and Modem Data Stations 2 Make sure that the modem has settings for speed and parity that are compatible with those of the data terminal If you are not sure see the customer s system manager or the documentation packaged with the modem data communications software and data terminal 3 Connect the modem to the GPA a Plug one end of a D4BU cord into the TEL EQUIP jack on the GPA b Plug the other end into the modem as indicated in the modem s documentation 4 Connect the GPA to the analog multiline telephone a Plug one end of a D8AC cord into the VT jack on the back of the GPA b Plug the other end into the OTHER jack on the bottom of the telephone c Slide the switch on the back of the GPA to Automatic or Basic See GPA Settings above for your options 5 Use a D8W cord to connect the STATION jack on the BR 241 B1 bridging adapter to the LINE jack on the analog multiline telephone 6 Use two D8W cords to connect the EVENI and ODD
11. Station Dial or type nnnn then select Enter Enter station number nnnn Backspace Exit 5 14 Central Office Problems Checking Ports mm Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 4 Select Busy out Station XXXxXx Xxxx extension number entered Make a Selection in Step 3 Status Busy out Restore Exit F2 The screen below is shown until Busy Out finishes or fails Station XXXxx XXxx extension number entered in Step 3 Busy Out in Progress Exit The screen below appears when Busy Out is completed successfully Station xxx XXXX extension number entered in Step 3 Busy Out Successfully Compl et ed The screen below appears when Busy Out fails If this occurs exit and try again Station XxXxX XXXX extension number entered in Step 3 Busy Out FAILED Central Office Problems 5 15 Checking Ports Restoring a Trunk Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance Port sline Trunk gt Dial the dial plan no Enter Restore PC Procedure E6 F3 E1 Type the dial plan no gt F10 F3 To restore a trunk follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Maintenance Make a selection System Sl ot Port Exit E3 2 Select the Line Trunk option Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Mo dem Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Exit F1 3 Specify the dia
12. FEEDBACK FORM MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3 0 Title Installation Programming amp Maintenance Order No 555 630 140 Date August 1994 1 Please rate the effectiveness of this book in the following areas Excellent Good Fair Poor Not Applicable Ease of Use Clarity Completeness Accuracy Organization Appearance Examples pf Illustrations 2 Please check ways you feel we could improve this book Q Improve the overview Q Add more examples Q Add troubleshooting information Q Improve the table of contents Q Add more detail Q Make it less technical Q Improve the organization Q Make it more concise Q Add more better quick reference aids Q Include more illustrations Q Add more step by step procedures Q Other 3 What did you like most about this book 4 Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet If we may contact you about your comments please complete the following Name Telephone Number Company Organization Date Address Send completed forms to Documentation Manager AT amp T 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 Fax 908 953 6912 THIS FORM MAY BE PHOTOCOPIED Introduction Installation of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System involves the following m Installing the control unit m Installing the telephones m Connecting system wiring m Installing optional equipment This chapter provides an
13. 10 Set the switch on the side of the handset to MONITOR 11 Listen to the handset for the tone device signal m f you hear the signal you have found the correct wires Correctly label both the cross connect field and the outlet m f you don t hear the signal remove the patch cord from the connecting block and push the patch cord down onto the connecting block to the right of the one just tested Keep moving the patch cord to the next connector block on the right until you find the pairs that carry the tone device signal Upgrading Circuit Module Firmware Beginning with Release 3 0 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System allows upgrades or reinstallation of circuit module firmware through the PCMCIA interface slot on the Release 3 0 processor module The interface slot is a standard interface through which information may be added to or retrieved from the system Circuit modules introduced with Release 3 0 or later may use flash ROM to retain circuit module firmware Unlike traditional ROMs flash ROM can be written and erased without being removed from the circuit module The first circuit module to include this feature is the 800 GS LS ID 4 60 Control Unit Problems Module Problems OO T Firmware on this circuit module can be upgraded or reinstalled with an Upgrade memory card An upgrade is performed when a new release of firmware enhances a module s capabilities or corrects problems Firmware can be reinstalled if the exis
14. 787 795 796 788 789 790 798 791 799 7920 7921 Park Z sae Factory Set Renumber 7922 Form 6a Number to 7923 Description 7924 881 7925 882 7926 883 7927 884 7928 885 7929 886 887 Listed Directory 388 Number T Renurmber mber QCC Queue p DSS Page Buttons C 800 PAGE 1 Beginning extension for range R re Fact i si r T emote Access Factory sel Renumber PAGE 2 Beginning extension for_range Code Form 3a Number to PAGE 3 Beginning extension for range 369 ARS Dial Out Default Renumber codet to a Hybrid PBX mode only t ARS Dial Out Code is idle Line Preference Code in Key mode 4 Reserved for AUDIX Voice Power Fax Attendant System Figure A 4 Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers A 6 Installation Unit Load Calculation Worksheet If you determine that you need to recalculate the unit load for any carrier use the instructions on the following worksheet NOTE m You should have a separate copy of the worksheet for each carrier m See Unit Loads in Chapter 1 for information on recalculating unit loads Installation B 1 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet Unit Load Worksheet 1 Number of modules in carrier excluding power supply and processor m f fewer than five auxiliary power is not required m lf five or six continue to Step 2 2 Key or Behind Switch mode only Q Square Q Modified Indicate configuration of lines then
15. 9 18 _ _ installation forms IN 2 Installation Control unit continued interference 2 location 2 4 mounting hardware 2 5 power requirements 2 5 2 8 removing housing 9 3 9 6 _ _ replacing housing clips 9 7 9 10 top cover 7 20 upgrading CONVERSANT Intro documentation hardware requirements8 12 overview 8 12 software requirements 8 1 2 8 13 Copper shield installation 2 2042 21 Copyright release and license Coverage feature testing 7 14 installation 3 22 3 24 3 26 Credit card verification terminal D Data communications equipment DCE 7500B data only 6 14 _ 7500B data with MLX voice Data stations 7500B data only analog voice and modem data MLX voice and 75006 data Index Data stations continued configuration diagram 6 13 procedure 6 12 MLX voice and modem data configuration diagram 6 10 procedure 6 11 modem only See Pere procedure overview 6 1 6 4 video conferencing configuration diagram 6 18 CSU settings 6 20 _ data module settings 6 20 hardware required 6 16 6 17 procedure 6 19 6 20 _ Date 7 3 Dial dictation device testing Dial repeating tie trunks testing DID trunk testing 7 8 7 9 sss DIP switch settings 400EM tie trunk module 2 33 42 35 AT amp T 475 476 printer 5 23 5 24 AT amp T CAT printer 5 24 75 25 __ Direct Station Selector D
16. ASCAP American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASN AT amp T Switched Network AT amp T telecommunications services provided through an Integrated Digital Services Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI trunk Accunet switched digital service Megacom Megacom 800 Software Defined Network SDN Multiquest and Shared Access for Switch Services SASS GL 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary rrr asynchronous data transmission AT amp T Attendant AT amp T Switched Network AUDIX Voice Power Automated Attendant Automatic Line Selection Automatic Number Identification automatic ringdown tie trunk Automatic Route Selection A method of transmitting a short bitstream of digital data such as printable characters represented by a 7 or 8 bit ASCII code Each string of data bits is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit permitting data to be transmitted at irregular intervals See also synchronous data transmission Application with equipment that connects to one or more tip ring extension jacks and automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement directs calls in response to touch tones See ASN A voice processing application part of S III that provides Automated Attendant Call Answer Information Service Message Drop Voice Mail and optionally Fax Attendant System for use with the system IS IVIII MERLIN MAIL and AT amp T Attendant applicatio
17. Adapter Figure 5 1 Connecting a PC Within 50 ft 15 2 m Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 3 Connecting a PC to the Control Unit Connecting a PC More Than 50 Feet 15 2 m Away Use this procedure to connect a PC to the control unit when the distance is 50 ft 15 2 m or more NOTE If you are installing the PC in a different room than the control unit make sure that both locations have working wall outlets and wall jacks Also make sure that the building wiring has been connected so that the wall jacks in each location connect to each other You need the following hardware for this procedure 355AF adapter EIA crossover cable Two Z3A2 Asynchronous Data Units ADUs ADU crossover cable 400B2 power adapter 2012D transformer BR1A 4P adapter and 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block 248B adapter 8 position wall jacks 4 pair plug ended cable D8W cords D6AP power cord EIA 232 D cables 5 4 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a PC to the Control Unit E ee EhEhrlrlrlrtrtrtc C mmmUU _ A N To connect a PC 50 ft 15 2m or more distant follow the steps below See Plug one end of a D8W cord into the ADMIN jack on the control unit Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a 355AF adapter Connect an EIA crossover cable to the 355AF adapter Connect one end of an EIA 232 D cable to the EIA crossover cable and plug the other end into the 25 p
18. CD CTS OVER RUN DATA BIT PROTOCOL STOP BIT PARITY BPS Menu 02 01 01 02 01 02 02 02 02 03 01 01 04 Status USA UK GE LINE DRAWING ALL RECEIVE OFF RTS OFF OFF 206 8 XON XOFF 2 NON 1200 This is the default status but the system cannot read the character sent by the printer Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 23 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit Table 5 2 AT amp T 475 476 Printer DIP Switch Settings Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 21 DIP 1 Open DIP 1 Open DIP 1 Open DIP 2 Closed DIP 2 open DIP 2 Open DIP 3 Open DIP 3 Open DIP 3 Open DIP 4 Open DIP 4 Open DIP 4 Closed DIP 5 Closed DIP 5 Open DIP 5 Open DIP 6 Closed DIP 6 Open DIP 6 Open DIP 7 Closed DIP 7 Closed DIP 7 Open DIP 8 Open DIP 8 Open DIP 8 Closed Switch 22 Switch 23 Switch 24 DIP 1 Open DIP 1 Closed DIP 1 Open DIP 2 Closed DIP 2 Open DIP 2 Closed DIP 3 Closed DIP 3 Open DIP 3 Closed DIP 4 Open DIP 4 Open DIP 4 Open DIP 5 Closed DIP 5 Open DIP 6 Open DIP 6 Closed DIP 7 Open DIP 8 Closed Open off Closed on 5 24 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit mm Table 5 3 AT amp T CAT Printer DIP Switch Settings Switch 1 Switch 2 Control Switch DIP 1 On DIP 1 On DIP 1 Off DIP 2 On DIP 2 On DIP 2 CM DIP 3 On DIP 3 Off DIP 3 Off DIP 4 On DIP 4 Off DIP 4 Off DIP 5 On DIP 5 On DIP 5 On DIP 6 On DIP 6 On DIP 6 Off DIP 7 On DIP 7 On DIP 7 On DIP 8 On DIP 8 Off D
19. Codett Re number Source Incoming Line Trunk Type Main No Personal Line WATS FX etc Maintenance Alarm Line Trunk No Loop Start Reliable Disconnect No Telephone Number or Equipment Outmode Signaling Yes Qcc QCC Operator Toll Type Queue si Prefix Req d Hold Disc Priority Receive for LD Interval Levelt Callst R Yes No Short Long 4 No Function 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 Ng Maximum 11 pools with up to 80 trunks per pool Administration will automatically set Loop Starr Reliable Disconnect to Yes t Hybrid PBX mode only Figure A 3 Form 2c System N umbering Line Trunk Jacks Factory settings 70 main 891 dial in tie 892 automatic in tie Installation A 5 System Numbering Forms pE S Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers Pools Seer cat Factory Set Renumb enumber Forml 2c Factory Set Renumber arm o FNumber to Description Number to Label 70 770 890 771 891 712 892 773 893 774 894 775 895 776 896 777 897 778 898 9 888 780 181 782 Group Paging Factory Set Renumber 783 Form 7b Numb t Group ID ager 9 184 793 tes 784 136
20. Flash button is used instead of the switchhook for features that require a switchhook flash such as Transfer and Hold VideoPhone 2500 Provides interactive small screen video when both parties use one Picasso Still Allows 2 parties with Picasso Still lmage Phones to transmit and Image Phone simultaneously discuss full color images which they view over customer supplied TV monitor or flat panel LCD liquid crystal display monitor 3129 V TVVA Touch tone outdoor telephone equipped with cast aluminum housing armored handset cord with bell ringers 3129 WRWA Rotary dial outdoor telephone equipped with cast aluminum housing armored handset cord with bell ringers 3129 WAWA Auto dial outdoor telephone equipped with cast aluminum housing armored handset cord with bell ringers 3129 WNWA Non dial automatic ringing on dedicated circuit outdoor telephone equipped with cast aluminum housing armored handset cord with bell ringers 3 42 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Direct Station Selectors EE ttt lt C sts S Installing Direct Station Selectors The Direct Station Selector DSS is an optional piece of telephone equipment You can connect up to two DSSs to an MLX 28D or MLX 20L telephone that is programmed as an operator console Considerations Review the following items before you begin the installation procedure E Connect the DSSs before you assemble the MLX telephones E Auxiliary power is required under the
21. If errors occur record them as described in Considerations above 5 Run the board controller test See Board Controller Test later in this chapter If errors occur record them as described in Considerations above 6 For MLX modules 008 MLX and 408 GS LS MLX continue with the B Channel Loopback test See B Channel Loopback Test later in this chapter If errors occur record them as described in Considerations above 7 For 100D modules continue with the CSU loopback test See 100D Module Problems later in this chapter If errors occur record them as described in Considerations above 8 Replace the module with a module of the same type whether you are troubleshooting or replacing the module permanently 9 Restore the module Menu Maintenance gt Slot Dialthe slot no oRestore Yes 4 36 Control Unit Problems Module Problems Restoring automatically undoes the Busy out and Reset For additional information on restoring a module see later in this chapter Persistent Module Problems If any of the module tests fail and replacing the module does not clear the trouble then Several modules may be faulty E The connector on the carrier may be faulty Busy Out and Reset Before running any module test be sure to busy out or reset the module Busy out discontinues service from the module being tested to each line and extension only as they become idle Bus
22. MERLIN LEGEND D O C Location Label Placement VAaAYNYVO WSL NSU J Ad 9 9S9 YSNSSYV dd 3d L622 WE6SSY dD S 4N 2B922 EGSSY JW SON Seu 904 p UOREIYSSEJA 493 sedoid soy ENUEN aquasajay WayshS ay sainy J4 BO Wed UNA saydwoD uoqeiedo palisapun asnes ew yey sauaayajul Guipnjou paaieaas aouezapequl Aue ydasoe jsnw ealaap siy z pue aoualapejul mywey esnes lou Aew aoinep siy 1 suoppuoo omy Buwaojjoj ayy a yalqns s uogeiado sany 994 AW JO S Wed YUM saydwo ao1ap SYI UONEYEISUL D JENUEW aj OA asinda 18a nepuozas Joyajoid un p Uoneesu sainevayxe suayeodde sap inod sin isa juawdinba IS LNJINSSSILUAAV epeueg np suonegunwwog s p asuu a sed papy nbypa opes aem a ins juawejGey aj suep sawosaid y asse g ap Sanbugwnu syaredde xne sajqeoydde say sey yuessedgp sanbijdajaoipes simq ep sed jawa enbuguau paredde juesgid a7 SUOREHUNWWOZ jo uawpedag UBipeUed Sip yO suogentas squalayayu OPLI Buy L INO 19S SUOS aSIOU opes 10 SHLUY Y SSEIQ ayy paaaxa jou saop snyevedde jeyBip styl enuey uoneesu aag 9 paunbay are siopajord Arepuoaas paaosdde suoneodde Buipjng jo jno 10 pasn sj juawdinba 4 jedas pue aoves Joj Juabe pazuoyne inok joR UOD episul syed ajgeaayuas asn ou aw aray ONpOId SIY UJ ENUEN UOqRIISU Buy U Payeds se SyuUN IMOG PUL salquasse JAPJI ONINYYM sainpow PMA GNI NNYIW PeNnjaenuew Lely Auo ash ooz9s yl 5 HUN O41U0D VLLS
23. NOTE If you are installing or replacing an MFM in a wall mounted MLX 10 MLX 10D or an MLX 10DP telephone start at Step 3 1 Place the telephone face down on a flat surface remove the user card tray and line cable from the bottom of the deskstand See Figure 3 2 3 4 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules Pull Up and Away Press Center Tab CS Figure 3 3 Releasing the Deskstand 2 Release and remove the deskstand from the telephone See Figure 3 3 and Fig a Press on the top rear center of the deskstand to release the tab b Pull the deskstand up toward you and swing away from the telephone Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 5 Installing Multi Function Modules KASS a i ii A a 7 i i gt ii A J t Figure 3 4 Removing the Deskstand c Lift the deskstand out of the locating slot in the telephone base and place to one side 3 6 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules Figure 3 5 Releasing the Module Cover Screw 3 Release and remove the module cover See Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 and a Use a screwdriver to remove the screw in the lower righthand corner of the module cover Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 7 Installing Multi Function Modules Loe Center Tab to Release wA Up and Away Ko Press Figure 3 6 Releasing the Module Cover b Press th
24. Remote Programming Maintenance later in this chapter for details Tools In addition to the maintenance terminal you need the following tools E EIA breakout box m Digital voltmeter KS 20599 or equivalent m 110 66 type punchdown tool m Dracon TS21 or equivalent touch tone telephone for testing a Assorted flathead and Phillips head screwdrivers E Long nosed and regular pliers m Wrist grounding strap a Replacement parts recommended by your technical support organization A CAUTION Should you ever need to open a module and handle the circuit board use the wrist strap to connect your wrist to a suitable ground first Electrostatic discharge can destroy or severely damage the integrated circuits in the power supply processor and modules 1 2 Introduction On Site programming Maintenance On Site Programming Maintenance You can perform on site maintenance with an MLX 20L console or a PC with SPM software This book provides maintenance instructions from the console If you are using a PC refer to System Programming and Maintenance SPM for details If you use the UNIX System see the documentation for Integrated Solution Ill IS Ill Setting Up the MLX 20L Console To connect an MLX 20L console to the control unit follow the steps below Refer to 1 Plug one end of a D8W 87 cord into one of the first five jacks on the leftmost 008 MLX module or 408 GS LS MLX module The first MLX jack is the default If
25. Reported during cold start module 780C RAM TEST FAILURE If problem persists replace the Memory failed the RAM test Turns processor on the processor LED 780D UPPER ROM FAILURE If problem persists replace t he Memory failed the ROM test Turns processor on the processor LED 780E LOWER ROM FAILURE If problem persists replace the Memory failed the ROM test Turns on the processor LED processor Continued on next page 2 14 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Error Logs G i Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description Action 8401 MISCELLANEOUS ERROR No action required currently not reported 8402 WINK TOO SHORT Troubleshoot the far end of the network Outbound dialing problems on tie interface to see if it is working and trunks For a tie trunk with delay dial or translated properly Troubleshoot for wink start the wink from the far end of faulty cable Replace the module the network interface is less than the minimum 100 ms The tie trunk remains waiting for a valid signal 8403 NO EXTERNAL RELEASE Troubleshoot the far end of the network Communication problems between interface to see if it is working and the module and central office Far end translated properly Troubleshoot for has not disconnected within 4 faulty cable minutes If this error occurs twice consecutively the trunk is busied out automatically whether Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled or not 8404 ON HOOK BEFOR
26. Test Notes For each test you should note the following m When beginning the board controller test or the internal loopback module test choose to run it once or repetitively m You can interrupt any module test by selecting Exit F5 on the PC A module test can fail for one of the following reasons The module being tested was not busied out Exit the test busy out the module and try again The error messages indicate that the module is faulty m f errors indicate that the module is faulty record them on the module repair tag immediately after running the test Control Unit Problems 4 35 Module Problems NOTE If the system does not recognize a 408 GS LS MLX module during testing check the release number of the system The 408 GS LS MLX module does not work with Releases 1 0 or 1 1 An 008 MLX module must be used to provide extension jacks with Releases 1 0 or 1 1 To run a module test follow the steps below 1 To determine which modules are suspect read the error logs and review any user reported problems 2 If the error logs indicate the processor is the problem refer to Processor Problems earlier in this chapter to service the processor before continuing Replacing a faulty processor may resolve module problems 3 Busy out or reset the module See Busy Out and Reset for general guidelines 4 Run the internal loopback test See Internal Loopback Test later in this chapter
27. configuration details on stations including video codecs 4 The cord length from the 7500B data module to the telephone cannot be more than 80 ft 24 m 5 Do not connect two 7500B data modules on one line Modem Data Stations A modem data station uses a modem to convert digital signals so that it can send and receive analog signals This type of station allows data communication without PRI facilities The system supports the types of modem data stations listed below m Analog Voice and Modem Data This station includes a data terminal and an analog multiline telephone Modem Data Only This station includes a data terminal and modem If this station s modem has a phone jack you can connect a single line telephone however voice and data at the same time are not possible MLX Voice and Modem Data This station includes a data terminal modem and an MLX telephone See Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacksj for your customer s specifications Then refer to the appropriate section later in this chapter for instructions on setting up modem data stations Connecting Data Equipment 6 3 Data Stations Te OI i 7500B Data Stations A 7500B data station uses a 7500B data module to convert MLX voice signals and DTE digital signals to the digital transmission signaling standard so that it can send and receive digital signals This type of station requires PRI facilities to send and receive data to and from digital dat
28. distance calling Also called public switched telephone network QCC Queued Call Console MLX 20L telephone used by a system operator in Hybrid PBX mode only Used to answer outside calls directed to a system operator position and inside calls direct inside and outside calls to an extension or an outside telephone number serve as a message center make outside calls for users with outward calling restrictions set up conference calls and monitor system operation RAM read only memory random access memory Computer memory in which an individual byte or range of bytes can be addressed and read or changed without affecting other parts of memory See ROM Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 27 Glossary S Remote Access System feature that allows an outside caller to gain access to the system almost as if at a system extension restore Procedure whereby saved and archived system programming is reinstated on the system from a floppy disk or memory card See also backup ring generator Circuit pack added to the power supply that generates a high voltage 20 30 Hz signal to ring a telephone riser cable Cable that runs between floors in a multistory building and connects wiring closets RS 232 Physical interface specified by the Electronics Industries Association E A that transmits and receives asynchronous data at distances of up to 50 feet 15 m robbed bit signaling Signaling in which t
29. if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Check the cable between the 100D module and the CSU then retest If the problem persists check the CSU settings Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module if in doubt escalate to your technical support organization Control Unit Problems 4 79 100D Module Problems Restoring the Module After completing the CSU Loopback Test follow the steps below to restore the module 1 Ifyou are finished testing modules restore the 100D module Refer to Restore learlier in this chapter for instructions 2 Reset the CSU For the 551 T1 CSU unplug the patch cord first from the EQ IN jack and then from the EQ OUT jack For the ESF T1 CSU flip the DTE LOOPBACK switch down to deactivate the loopback For the ACCULINK 3150 CSU press the right arrow key once to display the Ctrl selection then press F3 to select Ctrl Press the right arrow key twice to display the reset selection Now press F1 to initiate a reset of the CSU Automatic Tests for the 100D Module Every 15 minutes the system checks the 100D module for the following Initialization The system ensures that all T1 ports are properly initialized and placed into service It also resolves the conflicts of different service levels f
30. remove it by lifting up as shown in 2 Remove the top cover from each carrier by pushing it straight up from the front Introduction 1 15 Preparation for Hardware Maintenance m f you have a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 2 0 or earlier 1 Pry the clips from the housing on both sides of the control unit use a screwdriver if they are difficult to remove 2 Carefully pull the housing towards you NOTE If the MERLIN LEGEND Release 2 0 or earlier system has more than one carrier make sure you hold the housing assembly on the basic carrier at the sides otherwise the housing may disassemble as the front and side panels are only slotted together MERLIN II and MERLIN LEGEND 2 1 and later Communications System MERLIN LEGEND 2 0 and earlier Communications System Housing see Clip Figure 1 5 Removing the Control Unit Housing 1 16 Introduction Preparation for Hardware Maintenance E Disconnecting AC Power To disconnect the AC power see Figure 1 6 and follow the steps below 1 Disconnect the AC power to each auxiliary power unit by unplugging the power cord from the wall outlet 2 Disconnect the AC power to each carrier by unplugging the power cord from the wall outlet X Sue Power Cord a SON lt Ground O32 P Wire AUX Power Unit AC Power Cord outlet B Control Unit O AC Power Cord 48 VDC Auxiliary Auxiliary Powel Power liput Uni
31. then lower and slide into the deskstand b Replace the line cable into the line jack in the deskstand Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 19 Installing Multi Function Modules A L EE Telephone Base Figure 3 18 Adjusting the Deskstand Height 11 Adjust the deskstand height See Figure 3 18 a To change the deskstand s height from low to high press the top rear center of the deskstand to release the tab b Pull the deskstand up and insert the tab into the slot in the module cover c To readjust the stand see the instructions on the bottom of the card tray 12 Power up the telephone See Figure 3 19 a Plug the D8W cord from the telephone into the 8 conductor large modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter 3 20 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules AC Powel Wall Jack CURE Le s D6AP 8 r Power Supply aT Dss AA AAA u i Ammin Hii y AMCA AT iti il m piiri piiri wiji aiit Figure 3 19 Powering Up the Telephone after Installing the MFM b Connect one end of the D6AP cord to the 2 conductor small modular jack on the 40013 or 40092 adapter and plug the other end into the modular jack of the 406943837 power supply The total length of the cords connecting the power supply to the MLX telephone must be less than or equal to 50 ft 15 m A CAUTION Do not plug the
32. xxxxx Weekl y MemCard Backup Enter day 0 6 hr 00 23 and min 00 59 DHHMM XXXXX Backspace Exit Press Drop Alt P 2 Enter the day d 0 to 6 and time hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 when you want the automatic backup to run each week Weekly MemCard Backup 0 Sunday 1 Monday and so on Enter day 0 6 hr 00 23 and min 00 59 DHHMM Backspace Exit Dial or type dhhmm Q 3 Save your entry Select Enter F10 4 Return to the System Programming menu Select Exit two times F5 F5 Backup M essages During manual or automatic backup procedures additional screens may appear to alert you to problems with the translation memory card the backup file or the backup procedure This section contains illustrations of each screen and information about what to do if the screen appears Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 15 Backing Up with a Memory Card NOTE The screens shown in this section are from the manual backup procedure however the screens that may appear in both the manual and automatic backup procedures are similar The screens in both procedures differ only in the appearance of the first line On the automatic backup screens AutoMemory Card Backup replaces the word Backup shown on the screens below Backup Canceled Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Backup x x backup filename BACKUP 19 CANCELED File has been DELETED Exit If the system detects an err
33. 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks indicates no GS ground start trunks in the Incoming Trunk Type column m Insert the processor into the carrier as indicated in Installing the Processor in the Carrier later in this chapter NOTES 1 If the system is programmed for Permanent Key mode check the switch setting Refer to for detailed procedures If the switch is set to Permanent Key only operation all trunks revert to loop start If the switch is not set any programmed designation for ground start trunks is retained The ground start pool never has trunks assigned to it automatically but must be programmed after the ground start ports are designated Ground start trunks are assigned to the ground start pool on initialization except in a system switched for Permanent Key mode operation In Release 1 0 ground start and loop start trunks automatically defaulted to loop start 2 Beginning with Release 3 0 the feature module required for Release 2 1 and earlier is no longer needed The Release 3 0 processor module contains a PCMCIA memory card interface capable of accommodating a 4 MB memory card This card is used to install or upgrade system software and perform firmware upgrades on circuit modules It can be used to backup and restore system programming Installing the Control Unit 2 29 Installing the Processor A CAUTION Before touching leads connectors pins and other components when handling the circuit board u
34. 3 54 3 56 MLX telephone continued speakerphone 74 Sid testing intercom dial tone outside dial tone 7 6 7 7 with MFMs 7 5 17 6 Modem data station modem data only configuration diagram procedure 6 8 with analog voice configuration diagram 6 7 GPA settings 6 5 procedure 6 5 with MLX voice configuration diagram 6 10 procedure 6 11 Module installation settings for sna types1C and 5 2 2e trunk jacks 2 38 replacement Mounting hardware Multi Function Module MFM procedure 3 4 telephone SAA omen testing telephones with T R operation setting Multizone paging Music On Hold connection copyright release and license testing 7 16 with single zone paging N Network interface installation forms 1 4 Night Service feature testing 7 15 7 16 O Outlet testing 2 8 42 9 __ _ _ Outside dial tone testing 7 6 7 7 Installation IN 5 Index OL ee i Overview installation sequence programming 1 4 adjuncts installation control unit installation 1 3 data equipment connection network interface connection 1 3 1 4 telephone installation system upgrade 1 4 P Paging DTMF signaling multizone with background music Magic on Hold and bidirectional paging single zone with background music and Magic on Hold 3 36 single zone with customer supplied
35. 37 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 55 Assembling MLX Telephones D amp W a H Mounting Plate a 6306 i Figure 3 38 Routing the Cord Through the Backplate f Plug the free end of the cord into the LINE jack on the back of the telephone Route the cord through the cord channel above the jack See Figure 3 38 g Position the telephone on the mounting plate studs and then slide the telephone down to lock it in place To remove the telephone slide it up and off 8 Label the button assignment card a Pull the tab at the top of the plastic cover toward you 3 56 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Cordless or Cordless Wireless Telephones b Type or write the button assignments on the card c Insert the card and replace the plastic cover Be sure the textured side of the cover is facing you 9 Adjust the contrast on the telephone display m For an MLX 20L telephone slide the lever on the top of the telephone m For an MLX 10D MLX 10DP or MLX 28D telephone press the Menu button and select Cntrst follow the display prompts Installing Cordless or Cordless Wireless Telephones The sections below describe the ways you can connect MDC 9000 cordless or MDW 9000 cordless and wireless telephones to the system MDC 9000 Cordless Telephone You can connect the base unit of the MDC 9000 to an analog extension jack MDW 9000 Cordless Wireless Telephones The following is a brief overvi
36. 517Fl 3 or lower letter A WARNING Hazardous electrical voltages may be present if the following steps are not performed correctly To replace the ring generator follow the steps below Refer to Figure 4 2 throughout the procedure 1 Follow Steps 14 in Replacing the Power Supply later in this chapter to remove the power supply Then return to Step 2 below 2 Place the power supply on its left side and remove the five screws 3 Carefully turn the power supply over on its right side and then remove the top of the power supply housing 4 Detach the cables from the inside edge of the plastic housing by removing them from the clips 5 Disconnect the 4 pin cable from the header labeled P202 on the left side of the power supply circuit board You may need to pry back the clip to free the cable 6 Disconnect the other cable from the header labeled P101 on the right side of the power supply circuit board You need to grip this cable firmly and pull forcefully Control Unit Problems 4 5 Power Supply Problems 7 Remove the four screws from the ring generator as shown in 8 Remove the ring generator 9 Position the replacement ring generator as shown in Figure 4 2 Align the screw holes Make sure the PI header on the ring generator is on the same side of the power supply housing as the P101 header on the circuit board 10 Replace the four screws and fasten them to secure the ring generator 11 Connect one end of the new
37. 76 4 10 Acculink 3150 CSU Front Panel 4 75 4 13 Acculink 3150 CSU DTE Loopback Command 3 4 76 4 14 Acculink 3150 CSU DTE Loopback Command 4 4 77 Maintenance and Troubleshooting vii mm Figures 5 Central Office Problems 5 1 Installing the Control Unit Top Cover Release 2 1 and Later 5 30 5 2 Installing the Control Unit Front Cover Release 2 1 and Later 5 31 5 3 Assembling the Control Unit Housing Release 2 0 and Earlier 5 33 5 3 Installing the Control Unit Housing Release 2 0 and Earlier 5 34 B System Numbering Forms B 1 Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks B 3 Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks ing i B 2 B 2 Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts B 4 l ing Li B 5 B 4 Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers B 6 D Backing Up with a Memory CardChapter Name D 1 PCMCIA Memory Card D 3 D 2 Inserting the Memory Card D 4 Lo E Modifying a Release 2 1 or Earlier Processor for Key Mode E 1 Modifying the Processor for Key Mode E 2 E 5 E 2 Installing the Control Unit Housing viii Maintenance and Troubleshooting OK SS amp amp 7 7 amp amp amp Tables 1 Introduction 1 1 Function of PC Keys in SPM 1 13 EE OOOO 2 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 1 Transient Permanent Error Thresholds 9 2 2 2 Error Codes 2 6 3 Telephone Problems 3 E 4 Control Unit Problems 4 1 PEC and Apparatus
38. A 1 System Numbering Forms rE EEhrhrmrmrmrmrmrmC lt 2 2C Ct t i OSO O OS S Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Renumber System Q acs O Selected Extension Numbers U 3 Digit QO Set Up Space Mod Log Jack Jack Type j d Wire Person Location Type ID RE Eqpt i t Label or Function 1 Li tdi ET rs oo r eee eee EEEE E 107 7107 108 7108 HHEH Ee f 20 no 7140 ae Tl el ie ee ee aa aa EE fA Et o a a ae Se E E E 15 24 114 7114 eee coe A eee Ec Ce Ee See 29 119 7119 oe eee a ee TT zy a pe et pest T T e jz fre PO S al d dd fs is rs Tt f I Shaded lines indicate possible operator positlons Factory Setting t Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM or ISDN 7500B Data Module The system capacity for Personal Directories is decreased by one whenever an MLX 20L telephone is connected to an MLX port Figure A 1 Form 2a System N umbering Extension Jacks A 2 Installation System Numbering Forms E LCLCLCLCLCLCDCDCDC t CO OSOSC CS The following explains how to complete Form 2a The number in the logical ID column refers to the number of the extension jack in the control unit 1 In the Eqpt Equipment column enter the type of device such as an MLX 20L console that is connected to the extension jack On the second line enter any attached adj
39. ACCULINK 3150 CSU DTE Loopback Command 4 4 76 Control Unit Problems 100D Module Problems lt To run the CSU Loopback Test follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System slot Port Exit 2 Specify the 2 digit slot number nn 00 to 17 Slot Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit 3 Select the CSU Loopback Test Slot xx Make a selection Status Demand Test Busy out Reset Restore Error Events CSU 1 pbk clock Exit Upgrade F2 Dial or type nn then select Enter Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Error Events andClock are also displayed only for the 100D module F4 Control Unit Problems 4 77 100D Module Problems The screen below appears while the test is running At the same time the module s green LED flashes Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC CSU I pbk Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 CSU I pbk in Progress Exit The screen below appears only if the module passes the test If the test is successful contact the CO and ask them to check their end CSU I pbk Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 CSU I pbk Passed Exit The screen below appears when the test fails CSU I pbk slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 CSU Ipbk Fai ed XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
40. Access Log System Make a selection Status Upgrd Instll Error Log Inventory Access Log Exit F4 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 19 System Inventory mm ee The screen below shows the access log Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC SysProg MaintAccessLog gt Time Sta SP M hh mm XXXX XX hh mm XXXX XX hh mm xxxx XX hh mm xxxx xx To page through the events press the More button PgUp System Inventory If you need to contact your technical support organization you may also need to access the System Inventory screen The System Inventory screen shows you the hardware vintage software vintage and ROM ID for each module in the control unit Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance System lnventory More PC Procedure E6 gt F1 F3 PgUp To check System Inventory follow the steps below 1 From the Maintenance menu select the System option Maintenance Make a selection System Sl ot Port Exit F1 2 20 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory System Inventory pE ee Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Select the Inventory option System Make a selection Status Upgrd Instll Error Log E inventory Access Log Exit Enter F3 When you access the System Inventory screen Slot 00 information is displayed Line 3 indicates that the processor occupies Slot 00 System Inventory Slot 00 Board
41. D6AP cord into the 8 conductor large modular jack on the 400B or 400B2 adapter doing so can cause electrical damage to the control unit and to the telephone Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 21 Installing Adjuncts c Plug the power supply into a 117 V AC outlet that is not controlled by a wall switch d Insert the plug end of the 400B or 400B2 adapter into the wall jack 13 Test the MFM for T R operation See Testing MLX Telephones with MFMs in Chapter 7 14 Attach the adjunct to the MFM See Installing Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts This section provides general instructions for connecting most adjuncts NOTE If you need to connect the adjuncts differently from the instructions on the system forms record each jack and adjunct change on the appropriate system numbering form See Appendix A System Numbering Forms 1 Connect one end of the cord packaged with the adjunct usually a D4BU cord to the adjunct See the documentation packaged with the adjunct for instructions 2 Check the system form for the adjunct you want to connect Then refer to the appropriate step below m To connect an adjunct to an MLX telephone go to Step 3 m To connect an adjunct to a single line telephone go to Step 4 m To connect an adjunct to an analog multiline telephone go to Step 5 m To connect an adjunct to a 012 module go to Step 6 When you connect adjuncts to telephones make sure you route the adjunct
42. E Translation Card The backup and restore procedures previously available to system managers through SPM using the PC and floppy disks can now be performed using the memory card and the new Backup Restore option on the System menu A new automatic backup feature permits you to set the system to perform automatic backups to the memory card on a daily or weekly basis See Backup and Restore for more information This card is identified by a white label with black lettering Forced Installation For use by qualified service technicians only this card is used when the system software has been corrupted and a re installation must be done at the customer site The use of the card for forced installation is reserved for emergency situations in which the system software on the processor module has been damaged This card is identified by an orange label with black lettering In addition black stripes are present on the card to distinguish it from an upgrade card Figure D 1 shows a sample Translation card D 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card Se I Alsi dip 4 INSERT AT amp T PROPRIETARY THIS MEMORY CARD CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF AT amp T THAT IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OR USED EXCEPT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE AGREEMENTS MERLIN Legend Translation Card COM code 123456789 MFR 00DR 00 Four 4 Megabytes COPYRIGHT 1993 AT amp T AU RIGHTS RESERVED
43. EMI cord into the SMDR jack on the control unit 2 Plug the other end of the Z200A EMI cord into the SMDR jack on the back of the CAT 3 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the PRINTER jack on the back of the CAT 4 Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a 355A adapter 5 Plug the 355A adapter into the serial port on the back of the printer 6 Set the appropriate printer options for SMDR See Setting Printer Options and DIP Switches later in this chapter for instructions Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 9 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit IDIN om CAT PLUS Terminal CAT PLUS Connections Using Same AC Outlet D8W 87 SMDR Port Long Cord Z200A EM Filter Short Cord CAT Printer Figure 5 3 Connecting a CAT and Printer on the Same AC Outlet Connecting a CAT and Printer on a Different AC Outlet If the printer is not grounded to the same AC outlet as the control unit or CAT or if the printer is more than 50 ft 15 2 m from the control unit use the following procedure to connect a CAT serial printer to the control unit 5 10 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit ee SSS NOTE If you are installing the printer in a different room than the control unit make sure that both locations have working wall outlets and wall jacks and that the building wiring has been connected so that the wall jacks in each location connect wit
44. Events later in this chapter for details CSU Loopback Test The Channel Service Unit CSU Loopback Test verifies that the communication path between the following CSUs 551 T1 ESF T1 or the ACCULINK 3150 and the 100D module is operational Summary Console Procedure PC Procedure Appropriate Modules Time Estimate EQ IN and EQ OUT 551 T1 CSU DTE LOOPBACK ESF T1 CSU LINE LOOPBACK ACCULINK 3150 CSU Busy Out or Reset Menu gt Maintenance Slot gt Dial the slot no gt Enter CSU 1pbk F6 F2 Type the slot no gt F10 F4 This test can be run only on 100D modules Approximately 2 minutes For the 551 T1 CSU only connect a patch cord from the CSU EQ IN jack to the CSU EQ OUT jack Details are provided below For the ESF T1 CSU only flip the DTE LOOPBACK switch on the front panel to the up position to activate the loopback Details are provided below For the ACCULINK 3150 only select front panel Line Loopback command Details are provided below Prior to beginning the test busy out the 100D module Both Busy out and Reset are in the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu gt Mai ntenance gt Slot See Busy Out and Reset earlier in this chapter for additional information Control Unit Problems 4 71 100D Module Problems Interrupting the Test You can interrupt the test by selecting Exit Test Failu
45. IB POW aN3931 NITHAWN INaWdINoS 3NOHda Ta aisn Gin y E A 10 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Customer Support Information Security of Your System Preventing Toll Fraud As a customer of a new telephone system you should be aware that there is an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud Telephone toll fraud can occur in many forms despite the numerous efforts of telephone companies and telephone equipment manufacturers to control it Some individuals use electronic devices to prevent or falsify records of these calls Others charge calls to someone else s number by illegally using lost or stolen calling cards billing innocent parties clipping on to someone else s line and breaking into someone else s telephone equipment physically or electronically In certain instances unauthorized individuals make connections to the telephone network through the use of remote access features The Remote Access feature of your system if you choose to use it permits off premises callers to access the system from a remote telephone by using a telephone number with or without a barrier code The system returns an acknowledgment signaling the user to key in his or her barrier code which is selected and administered by the system manager After the barrier code is accepted the system returns dial tone to the user If you do not program specific outward calling restrictions the user will be able to place any call normally
46. MLX port Figure B 1 Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks B 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting System Numbering Forms The following explains how to complete Form 2a The number in the logical ID column refers to the number of the extension jack in the control unit 1 In the Eqpt Equipment column enter the type of device such as an MLX 20L console that is connected to the extension jack On the second line enter any attached adjuncts such as an answering machine In the Old Ext No column if the wire run is being changed enter the extension number of the old extension If you are working with a new installation leave this space blank In the Renumber to column enter the extension number of the extension if not already filled in This includes new installations Inthe Wire No column enter the number of the wire as indicated by the label on the wire Inthe Person Location or Function column enter the name of the person at the location of or the function of such as a fax machine the extension and any miscellaneous information particular to that extension Maintenance and Troubleshooting B 3 System Numbering Forms OI _ amp E_ _ 0 5 e Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts Maximum 127 Adjuncts Factory Set Telephone _ Person Location 2 digit PT ri 007300 A Soio JPEE p
47. Make sure that the modem has settings for speed and parity that are compatible with those of the data terminal If you are not sure see the customer s system manager or the documentation packaged with the modem data communications software and data terminal 3 Connect the modem to the control unit a Plug one end of a D4BU cord into the appropriate modem jack see the modem s documentation if you are not sure b Plug the other end into the appropriate basic extension jack on the 012 or 008 OPT module See Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks for the appropriate module and extension jack 4 Connect all power cords to an AC outlet that is not controlled by a wall switch 6 8 Connecting Data Equipment Modem Data Only Stations 008 OPT Module 012 Module Tip Ring 1 Extension jack Ae AC Outlet D4BU cord LINE jack EIA 232 D Cable P SERIAL connector AC Outlet Figure 6 2 Modem Data Only Equipment Configuration Connecting Data Equipment 6 9 MLX Voice and Modem Data Stations MLX Voice and Modem Data Stations Figure 6 3 shows the equipment configuration for an MLX voice and modem data station 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX Module MLX AC Outlet a Data Terminal MLX Telephone i with MFM i LINE jack l Sr EIA 232 D Cable RSs SERIAL connector Figure 6 3 Modem Data and MLX Voice Equipment Config
48. Observe the restore file validation screen Restore n n filename selected in Step 5 Restore Successfully Completed System is Restarting The session is finished and the Please Wait system restarts You must enter system programming again to continue Restore Messages During the restore procedure additional screens may appear to alert you to problems with the translation memory card the backup file or the restore procedure This section contains displays of each screen and information about what to do if the screen appears Card Missing or Card Not Inserted Correctly Memory Card Restore Verify that Memory Card has been inserted correctly The memory card is either not inserted or inserted incorrectly The restore is aborted You must reinsert the card and repeat the restore procedure This screen may also appear if the wrong type of memory card is inserted and a restore is requested within one minute of insertion Verify that the card is a translation memory card D 22 Maintenance and Troubleshooting packing a with a Memon Card Card Removed after Confirmation Memory Card Restore RESTORE IS CANCELED System is DOWN The memory card was removed from the processor slot while the restore was in progress The restore is aborted and the system performs a System Erase frigid start You must reinsert the memory card and repeat the restore procedure Wrong System Programming Port Console Display
49. P completed Memory Card cannot be The memory card cannot be formatted formatted Remove the card and repeat the procedure with another card Formatting of Memory The format was unsuccessful Remove the Card FAILED card and repeat the procedure with another card Missing Card or Card Not Verify that the card is inserted correctly and Inserted correctly repeat the procedure D 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card Backup Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data You should create a backup at least three times during system installation so that programmed information is not lost and once after each system upgrade service technician visit or major system reconfiguration Summary Backup Programmable by Mode Idle Condition Planning Form Factory Setting Valid Entries Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure PC Procedure Procedure Backup System Manager All System Forced Idle Form 1 System Planning Not applicable 1 to 11 character filename Yes No Insert memory card System gt Back Restore gt Backup Select backup file Dial the new backup filename Enter Yes Exit Exit Exit Insert memorty card F1 F9 F1 gt Select backup file Type the new backup file name F6 F1 gt F5 F5 F5 1 Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module Maintenance and Trouble
50. PBX Figure 9 7 Changing the Key Mode Switch Position to Closed Upgrading the System 9 13 Completing the Upgrade Completing the Upgrade A WARNING The following procedures are for qualified technicians or service personnel only installation or maintenance of this product by anyone other than qualified personnel may damage or impair the product the limited warranty does not cover such damage See the limited warranty for details Hazardous electrical voltages are present inside this product To upgrade to Release 3 0 you need m SPM Version 3 xx or higher m The version number of the SPM software currently installed if any m Release 3 0 processor module and forced installation PCMCIA card m DOS formatted disk NOTE You cannot upgrade system programming for the MERLIN II Communications System it must be reprogrammed To upgrade a MERLIN II Communications System see Upgrading from the MERLIN II Communications System later in this chapter Use the following procedure to upgrade to release 3 0 from Release 1 0 1 1 2 0 or 2 1 1 Install SPM 2 Backup system programming m To back up system programming from Release 1 0 or 1 1 you can use any version of SPM 1 16 is recommended E To back up system programming from Release 2 0 you must use version 2 09 or higher of SPM 9 14 Upgrading the System Completing the Upgrade E Jo back up system programming from Release 2 1 you must use version 2
51. Press the unlabeled display buttons The display should indicate Display Button n where nis the number of the display button 1 through 4 Testing MLX Telephones with MFMs You should test MLX telephones with MFMs for proper channel operation and test the MFM circuitry for the TTR the ring generator and the Message light To test an MLX telephone with an MFM installed and configured as a T R adapter follow the steps below 1 Connect a working 2500 type single line telephone with a Message light to the MFM adapter the 2500 telephone also must have a mechanical ringer 2 Pick up the handset and listen for dial tone Dial 09 You should hear another dial tone 3 Press any button This will deactivate the test tone 4 Dial 123456789 0 Press the switchhook quickly You should hear a confirmation tone Initializing and Testing the System 7 5 Testing the System TC 5 Hang up The control unit should send a ring burst and the Message light on the 2500 telephone should turn on 6 Turn off the Message light Dial the appropriate feature code Testing Telephones for Dial Tone To test for dial tone follow the steps below 1 Press an ICOM or SA button depending on the mode of operation The red LED next to this button should go on 2 Press the Speaker button The green LED next to ICOM or SA button should turn on you should hear a dial tone and the green LED next to the Speaker button should turn on 3 Press the Speake
52. Programming and Maintenance SPM 2 Power down the system a Turn off the power supply on the basic carrier b Turn off the power supply on each expansion carrier c Unplug the auxiliary power units if present from the AC outlet 3 Unplug the D8W cord s connecting the SMDR printer and or system programming PC Remove the processor module Inspect the processor module for any visible problems Inspect the carrier Nn Oo oO A For Release 3 0 and later skip to Step 8 For Release 2 1 and earlier install a feature module in the new processor Use the feature module from the old processor if it appears to be functioning correctly otherwise install a new feature module Sse herec ihe Fean Module that follows this section 8 Install the new processor module 9 Power up the system a Plug the auxiliary units if present into the AC outlet b Turn on the power supply on each expansion carrier c Turn on the power supply on the basic carrier The system automatically cold starts 10 Perform a System Erase frigid start See System Erase above for instructions 11 Restore system programming using one of the following 4 30 Control Unit Problems Processor Problems The backup floppy disk or original system programming disk See System Programming and Maintenance for instructions E The backup memory card or original system programming memor card Release 3 0 and later See Appendix D Backing Up with a
53. Remove the control unit housing See Figure 9 1 2 Power down the system as described earlier in this chapter See Remove the processor module from the carrier See Figure 9 3 4 Place the processor module on a flat surface with the wiring manager on your left 5 Unclip and remove the left side panel See Figure 9 5 9 10 Upgrading the System Modifying the Processor for Key Mode Release Each Catch on Module Remove PROCESSOR MODULE Figure 9 5 Removing the Processor Module Cover Upgrading the System 9 11 Modifying the Processor for Key Mode Lift Circuit board Up and Over PROCESSOR MODULE Figure 9 6 Removing the Processor Module Circuit Board 6 Holding the processor circuit board at each end lift it up and turn it over and away from you See Figure 9 6 Place the processor circuit board on a flat non metallic surface Carefully support the dip switch assembly with the index finger while moving the switch to the closed position See Figure 9 7 9 Replace the processor circuit board face components down into the module housing 10 Replace the processor module side panel and clip into place 11 Replace the processor module into the carrier See 12 Power up the system 9 12 Upgrading the System Modifying the Processor for Key Mode 4 ol UUUUUUULU Front om OF ae aT E CALO Ahihi MNHN ihbnninih G Rear a OS GX Es i Se YIN CLOSED lt OPEN KEY
54. Restore Slot xx Do you want to continue Yes Cancel Additional Information PC Xx slot number entered in Step 2 For all MLX modules BchLoopback is also displayed as an option on this screen For 100D modules CSU I pbk Error Events andClock are also displayed as options on this screen F3 Xx slot number entered in Step 2 F1 The screen below appears while the module is restoring service to lines trunks and extensions Restore slot xx Restore in Progress Xx slot number entered in Step 2 The screen below smears when the module successfully restored Restore Slot xx Restore Complete Exit 4 44 Control Unit Problems Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Module Problems Soa OOOO The screen below appears when the Restore fails Try again and be sure to specify the correct slot Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Restore Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Restore FAILED Board Mismatch Internal Loopback Test This test checks communication between the processor and the module being tested If you have not read Module Test Process above do so before continuing Summary Console Procedure Menu gt Maintenance gt lot Dial the slot no gt Enter sDemand Test slntLoopback sTest Once or Test Repetitive PC Procedure F6 F2 Type the slot no F10 F6 F3 F2 or F3 Appropriate Modules This test can be run on
55. See the documentation packaged with the video codec for instructions b Use the EIA 232 D cables to connect the PORT 1 jacks on each 7500B data module to the ElIA 232 V 35 converters c Use the DB 37 cables to connect the ElIA 232 V 35 converters to the video codec s V 35 communication ports See the documentation packaged with the video codec for instructions Connecting Data Equipment 6 19 Video Conferencing Data Stations e aaa 7 If itis not already connected connect the CSU to the 100D module on the control unit and to the 5ESS or 4ESS exchange switch See Installing the Channel Service Unit in Chapter 4 8 When you are ready to power up the system plug the power supplies CSU video conferencing equipment and control unit into the AC outlets 7500B Data Module and CSU Settings You need to set the 7500B data modules and the CSU as indicated in Table 6 2 If the customer s system is running at 56 kbps set the CSU line coding DIP switches according to the instructions in Setting the CSU DIP Switches in Chapter 4 Table 6 2 7500B Data Module Settings Settings 56 Kbps 64 Kbps Auto dial Off Off Busy out Off Off Datarest On Off DTR Follow Follow Duplex Full Full Mode Cs Cs Speed 56 000 64 000 6 20 Connecting Data Equipment Initializing and Testing the System When you have finished installation you are ready to initialize the system as described in this chapter Initializing the System T
56. Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Exit E2 5 18 Central Office Problems Checking Ports Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 3 Specify the dial plan extension number nnnn 1 to 4 digit number Station Dial or type nnnn then select Enter Enter station number nnnn Backspace Exit 4 Select Restore Station XXXX XXXX extension number entered Make a Selection in Step 3 Status Busy Out M Restore Exit F3 The screen below is shown until Restore finishes or fails Restore Station XXXX XXXX extension number entered in Step 3 Restore in Progress The screen below appears when Restore is completed successfully Restore Station Xxxx Xxxx extension number entered in Step 3 Restore Successfully Compl et ed Central Office Problems 5 19 Checking Ports E e OSS The screen below appears when Restore fails If this occurs exit and try again Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Restore Station XXXX Xxxx extension number entered in Step 3 Restore FAILED Resetting an RS 232 Port The ADMIN SPM port is RS 232 Port 1 and the SMDR port is RS 232 Port 2 Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance gt Port gt RS232 Port 1 orR 232 Port2 Dial the dial plan no Enter gt Reset Yes PC Procedure E6 F3 F3 or Type the dial plan no F10 gt F1 gt E3 To reset an RS 232 port foll
57. XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Exit Lines 3 through 6 identify the cause of the failure or the number of errors found per channel There are 24 channels numbered 1 through 24 Line 3 displays the results for channels 1 through 6 Line 4 is for channels 7 through 12 Line 5 is for channels 13 through 18 Line 6 is for channels 19 through 24 Interpreting Test Results If the testis successful the connection between the CSU and the 100D module is good and the 100D module is probably okay Continue with the next module test restore the module if you are finished testing 4 78 Control Unit Problems 100D Module Problems If the test fails find the error message in Table 4 6 and proceed as indicated Table 4 6 Internal Loopback Test Errors Error Messages Slot is not busied out Slot empty or not valid FMWR not in Standby Node Test running too long Not in TEST STANDBY mode Any errors on the CSU Ipbk Failed screen Any other error Corrective Action Exit the test busy out the slot and try again Exit the test and try again be sure to type the correct slot number Do not indicate an empty slot or the processor 00 Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Exit the test and try again
58. a similar feature used in Key mode only Use the same test for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR as explained in the test procedure Refer to Planning Forms 3e 3f and 3g for ARS information Group Calling Use the same test for the Listed Directory Number the QCC queue which is for Hybrid PBX only Use the same test for Group Paging Refer to Planning Form 7d for Group Calling information m Coverage Refer to Planning Form 7c for Group Coverage information If any feature does not work properly check system programming You can run these tests easily from an MLX telephone or an analog multiline telephone 7 12 Initializing and Testing the System Testing the System yy _ _ CCC ARS and SMDR Tests lf ARS patterns have been programmed you can test routing by placing toll calls and checking the trunk indicated on the SMDR printout Check the report to see which line trunk the system selected for an outgoing call The length of each toll call must be equal to or greater than the minimum SMDR recording time Otherwise SMDR will not recognize the attempt as a call To determine the minimum SMDR recording time check with the customer s system manager the factory setting is 40 seconds To verify ARS patterns follow the steps below 1 In Hybrid PBX mode determine which toll numbers to call by examining the system manager s ARS patterns 2 At any multiline telephone pickup the handset and dial the ARS ac
59. aa Enter Backspace Exit System Erase Frigid Start A CAUTION Do not perform a System Erase unless you are installing a replacement processor or following instructions from your technical support organization This procedure erases all system programming from the processor and resets the system to factory defaults Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance Slot Diall0 Enter gt Demand Test System Erase Line 5 left button System Erase Line 5 left button gt Yes PC Procedure F6 F2 Type 00 F2 F3 gt F3 F2 Preparation Time Approximately 1 minute To perform a System Erase Frigid Start follow the steps below Control Unit Problems 4 17 Processor Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System EE Slot Port Exit 2 Specify Slot 00 Sl ot Dial or type 00 then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 00 Backspace Exit 3 Select the Demand Test Slot 00 Make a selection Status Demand Test 4 Select System Erase twice Demand Test Slot 00 Poke and System Erase are not Make a selection displayed which prevents customers Peek from accidentally changing the Poke processor memory System Erase Press the System Erase button the F3 Exit left button for line 5 twice F3 4 18 Control Unit Problems Processor Problems Console Display
60. adjust the stand m You cannot wall mount MLX 20L and MLX 28D telephones m f you wish to wall mount an MLX 10 MLX 10D or MLX 10DP telephone you must remove the deskstand first Wall mounting an MLX 10D or 10DP telephone can make the display hard to read A 630B Phonemount not included is also required to mount an MLX 10 MLX 10D or MLX 10DP telephone on the wall To connect an adjunct such as an alert modem or fax machine to an MLX telephone the telephone must have an MFM installed in it If you have not already done so refer to installing Multi Function Modules earlier in this chapter 3 48 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Assembling MLX Telephones Figure 3 30 Adjusting or Removing the Deskstand To assemble an MLX telephone follow the steps below 1 Remove or adjust the deskstand See Figure 3 30 m If you want to leave the deskstand in the low position go to Step 2 E f you want to adjust the angle of the deskstand or remove it in order to wall mount the telephone a Place the telephone face down on a flat surface b Press on the top rear center of the deskstand to release the tab then pull it up towards you c Insert the tab into the slot in the module cover to adjust the height d To remove the deskstand continue to pull it up and away from the telephone e Release the deskstand from the front slot Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 49 SS MLX eee To Adjun
61. amplifier 3 32 single zone with PagePac Plus 3 31 single zone with UPAM 3 33 testing 7 16 7 17 PassageWay Direct Connect Solution hardware and software requirements 8 23 8 24 overview 8 22 Permanent Key mode 9 10 9 13 Personal computer PC more than 50 ft from control unit diagram 5 6 ___ hardware req uired 5 4 procedure within 50 ft of gontrol unit diagram IN 6 Installation PFT power failure transfer jack see Power failure transfer PFT jack Power tumingonj2 3 SSS S y Power failure transfer PFT jack testing Power requirements 2 542 8 Power supply installation copper shield 2 20 42 21 0 ferrite cores 2 22 2 24 power supply module ring generator turning power off Powering down the system 2 44 9 4 Powering up the system 2 43 Printers DIP switch settings applications printer AT amp T 475 476 printer AT amp T CAT printer more than 50 ft from control u adapter 5 5 19 diagram 5 hardware required 5 17 5 18 procedure 5 19 on outlet with AiG diagram hardware ae 59 O O connections 5 14 5 15 __ procedure 59 15 10 on outlet without CAT 5 8 5 9 __ lt control unit connections hardware required options 5 22 5 23_ _ ooo supported within 50 ft of control unit 5 16 5 17 diagram 5 16 45 17 __ o hardware required Index Processor installation
62. and bad Please use the feedback formon the next page to let us know how we can continue to serve you If the feedback form is missing write directly to Documentation Manager AT amp T 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 XX Maintenance and Troubleshooting FEEDBACK FORM MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3 0 Title Maintenance and Troubleshooting Order No 555 630 140 Date August 1994 Please rate the effectiveness of this book in the following areas Ap ia Ease of Use of Use ee ro Completeness G G G Accuracy e G Organization o o d Appearance e G Examples S e G ilustrations d o d Overa atisfaction 2 Please check ways you feel we could improve this book Q Improve the overview 2 Add more examples Q Add troubleshooting information Q Improve the table of contents QO Add more detail Q Make it less technical Q Improve the organization Make it more concise Add more better quick reference aids O Include more illustrations Q Add more step by step procedures Q Other 3 What did you like most about this book 4 Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet If we may contact you about your comments please complete the following Name Telephone Number Company Organization Date Address Send completed forms to Documentation Manager AT amp T 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 Fax 908
63. any module The 100D module and the 408 GS LS MLX module each have two digital switch elements DSEs both DSEs are tested Time Estimate It takes approximately 1 5 minutes to run each test The 100D module and 408 GS LS MLX module each take approximately 3 minutes because they each have two DSEs Control Unit Problems 4 45 Module Problems Busy Out or Reset Interrupting the Test Test Failure Restore Busy out or reset the module being tested prior to beginning the test Both Busy Out and Reset are in the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu Maintenance Slot See Busy Out and Reset earlier in this chapter for additional information You can interrupt the test both Test Once and Repetitive by selecting Exit If the test fails record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module Restore the module if it successfully completes all module tests and the errors no longer occur Restore is in the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu Maintenance Slot See the Restore procedure earlier in this chapter for additional information To run the Internal Loopback Module Test follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit 4 46 Control Unit Problems Module
64. are usually best A CAUTION The telephone company is responsible for providing appropriate protection for central office trunks Do not connect the central office trunks until you are certain that they are properly protected See Central in Chapter 2 for details To avoid coupling power supply noise onto system wiring allow at least 3 in 7 62 cm of clearance between the basic carrier s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located to the left of the control unit If the network interface is greater than 25 ft 7 62 m from the control unit connect the control unit to the network interface using an Off Premises Range Extender OPRE See the documentation packaged with the OPRE for complete installation instructions If you use staples to attach the cords to walls or baseboards make sure you do not pierce the cords National and local building codes specify the type of cable required for telecommunication wiring For example you cannot use indoor wiring DIW cab e inside or on top of air plenums or ducts along hot pipes or across walkways Consult your local ordinances and regulations for proper cable selection Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 1 Wiring eee Wiring The local telephone company should have installed the network interface the central office trunks already Before you install the system verify that the network interface is the proper type and that it is within 25
65. button assignments except the one for the fax line from the fax extension You should remove the Voice Announce feature from the fax extension If the dedicated fax line is shared for outgoing calls only you must program the Ringing option to No Ring at every extension except the MERLIN PFC fax extension The MERLIN PFC can operate in Hybrid PBX mode Behind Switch mode or in Key mode The following sections list differences in operation between the two modes 8 20 Installing Applications MERLIN PFC Hybrid PBX and Key Modes The dedicated fax line for incoming fax calls from the central office must be connected to a line jack on the control unit and the line cannot be assigned to a pool lf DID is used a DID number must be assigned to the fax extension If a dedicated private line is used assign a fax line to the voice extension No lines or pools can be programmed to the fax extension At the fax extension the dedicated fax line should be programmed to Immediate Ring and any other lines should be programmed to No Ring Behind Switch Mode The dedicated fax line should be programmed to the MERLIN PFC fax extension The dedicated fax line should be assigned as a secondary no ring line at the voice extension Hardware Requirements The MERLIN PFC telephone requires two analog ports one for the voice line and one for the fax line The telephone wiring between the control unit and the MERLIN PFC telephone must be insta
66. buttons to specify additional alphanumeric characters for labels Use the template provided with the MLX 20L telephone to see which line buttons correspond to which alphanumeric characters 7 Save your entry Select Enter F6 Note F6 not F10 Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 9 sce a with a es Card Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 8 Respond to the prompt Backup filename filename file selected in Step 5 or entered in Step 6 Do you want to continue Yes Select No to abort the backup F2 No Go to Step 11 Exit Select Yes to continue the backup F1 9 Observe the backup progress screen Backup filename filename file selected in Step 5 or Backup in Progress entered in Step 6 Please Wait xX percentage of backup xx completed completed Exit 10 Observe the backup completion screen nnnnnnnnnnn backup filename Backup nnnnnnnnnnn Backup Successfully Completed Exit 11 Return to the System Programming menu Select Exit three times F5 F5 F5 D 10 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card Automatic Backup If an automatic backup fails for any reason except when the failure results from the memory card being write protected the automatic backup feature is turned off Follow the procedure below to reprogram automatic backup Summary Automatic Backup Programmable by Mode Idle Condition Planning Form Factory Setting V
67. channel data See DCE communications equipment data hunt group See DHG Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 9 Glossary data module data rate data station data terminal data terminal equipment DCE D channel dedicated feature buttons delay dial start tie trunk DFT DHG dial access mm EEE See ISDN 7500B Data Module See bps Special type of extension where data communications take place includes DTE and DCE sometimes a telephone is also part of a data station An input output I O device often a personal computer that can be connected to the control unit via an interface See DTE and data terminal data communications equipment Equipment such as modems or data modules used to establish maintain and terminate a connection between the system and data terminal equipment DTE such as printers personal computers host computers or network workstations Data channel 64 kops channel that carries signaling information or data on a PAl or 16 kpbs channel to carry signaling information on BRI The imprinted feature buttons on a multiline telephone Conf or Conference Drop Feature HFAI Hands Free Answer on Intercom Hold Message Mute or Microphone Recall Speaker or Speakerphone and Transfer See dial repeating tie trunk direct facility termination See personal line data hunt group Group of modem or 7500B data stations that share a common access code Calls are connect
68. control unit for loose or broken connectors 4 Check transient errors in the error logs for any possible clues 5 If local power is provided check the power supply connectors and voltages 6 Replace the telephone with a telephone that works to determine whether the problem is the telephone itself 7 If trouble disappears replace the problem telephone 8 If the replacement telephone does not work properly check the other telephones connected to the same module m If these telephones work the problem may be the wiring or there may be a single port failure on the module To check the wiring go to Step 12 m f these telephones do not work the fault is probably in the module To check the module go to Step 9 9 Check the LEDs on the module If the module does not have LEDs see System Status in Chapter 4 for more information 10 Check the error log for relevant messages See Chapter 2 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 11 Replace the faulty module Telephone Problems 3 3 Fixing Telephone Problems yy EE EE rrlrli i _ _ONONONO CNYY T 12 Replace the wiring between the module jack field and the telephone to see if there is a wiring problem Analog Multiline Telephone Problems If telephone LEDs and or ringing tones do not work properly on analog multiline telephones follow the steps below 1 Move the T P switch on the left hand side to the T test position You should
69. correct errors in data transmission Data call made through an exclusively established and maintained connection between data stations See COR Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 7 Glossary ee clock Operation of digital facilities from a common clock synchronization CMS Call Management System DOS based application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering and distributing calls Also produces reports for call analysis co central office Location of telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling coaxial cable Cable consisting of one conductor usually a small copper tube or wire within and insulated from another conductor of larger diameter usually copper tubing or copper braid codec coder decoder Device used to convert analog signals such as speech music or television to digital form for transmission over a digital medium and back to the original analog form common channel See CCS signaling communications Software controlled processor complex that interprets system dialing pulses tones and or keyboard characters and makes the proper interconnections both inside and outside Consists of a computer software a storage device and carriers with special hardware to perform the actual connections Provides voice and or data communications services including access to public and private networks for telephones a
70. data module to the MLX telephone a Plug one end of a D8W cord into the PHONE jack on the 7500B data module b Plug the other end into the LINE jack on the MLX telephone 6 12 Connecting Data Equipment MLX Voice and 7500B Data Stations 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX Module i n H mi I i Hod on f BE Hid alt LINE jack MLX Extension E EIA 232 D Data SERIAL eao MLX Telephone WP90110 L7 Power Supply AC Outlet AC Outlet Figure 6 4 MLX Voice and 7500B Data Equipment Configuration 6 Connect the 7500B data module to the control unit a Plug one end of a D8W cord into the LINE jack on the 7500B data module b Plug the other end into the appropriate MLX extension jack See Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks for the appropriate module and extension jack 7 Connect all power cords to an AC outlet not controlled by a wall switch Connecting Data Equipment 6 13 7500B Data Only Stations 7500B Data Only Stations Figure 6 5 shows an equipment configuration for a 7500B data only station To set up a 7500B data only station follow the steps below 1 Use an EIA 232 D cable to connect the SERIAL port on the data terminal to the 7500B data module For any data terminal that has both COM1 and COM2 connectors make sure you use the one designated for data transmission See the customer s system manager if you are not sure 2 Make sur
71. dialing the outside number If the trunk is busy you hear a busy tone If you dial a wrong trunk type such as DID or an invalid trunk number you hear a reorder tone 5 If the module continues to malfunction replace it Central Office Problems 5 3 Trunk Errors a YT Incoming Trunk Problems If incoming trunks do not work properly try the following procedure 1 Place an incoming call through the troubled trunk a For a loop start LS trunk connect a single line telephone to the trunk at the network interface E For a ground start GS trunk connect a single line telephone to the trunk at the network interface and press the GS button For GS trunks the telephone must have a GS button attached to it 2 Listen for ringing Pick up the handset and check line seizure 4 Dial an outside number and verify that you have good two way transmission 5 At the maintenance terminal check the trunk programming to be sure this trunk has been properly translated See the system planning forms 6 If the module continues to malfunction replace it Testing Trunks Automatically The automatic maintenance program takes the ports out of service when a trunk is malfunctioning When a port is out of service it is maintenance busy The trunk is periodically tested and put back into service if possible Maintenance Busy Status When maintenance busy is enabled and a trunk cannot be seized for an outgoing call the trunk
72. discharge ESD when installing the modules and avoid touching leads connectors pins and other components Guidelines Follow these guidelines when you install modules as indicated on the Control Unit Diagram of Form 1 System Planning Do not leave empty slots between modules The system ignores modules installed beyond any empty slot lf a phantom module a programmed empty slot is indicated on the Control Unit Diagram make sure the slot remains empty and do not install any modules to the right of it The system ignores any modules installed to the right of a programmed empty slot Make sure you install each module in its assigned slot If you install a module in the wrong slot the system will not function properly Be sure to place all 012 modules and all 008 OPT modules without built in ring generators in carriers with modules that have ring generators so that the modules without ring generators can be supported Once you have installed the power supply and the processor in the basic carrier use the remaining slots for the modules as follows Basic carrier slots 1 through 5 First expansion carrier slots 6 through 11 Second expansion carrier slots 12 through 17 2 32 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Modules P Eri i _ OC t t Installing Modules To install modules starting from slot 1 the first open slot next to the processor follow the steps below 1 For each 400EM
73. end connections cannot be made on calls because of a full load on all possible services and facilities See also glare Broadcast Music Incorporated A module for example 100D or 408 MLX GSILS that allows you to connect lines trunks and extensions to the communications system or holds the processor or power supply Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 5 Glossary me board assignment SPM procedure for assigning ine trunk and extension modules to slots on the control unit board renumbering System programming procedure for renumbering line trunk and extension modules that have already been assigned to specific slots on the control unit bus Multiconductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several sources to any of several destinations button Key on the face of a telephone that is used to access a line activate a feature or enter a code ona communications system byte Sequence of bits usually eight processed together Also called octet E eee C Call Accounting See CAS System Call Accounting See CAT Terminal Caller ID In Release 3 0 and later a system feature that supports a caller identification service provided by some local telephone companies if local regulations allow supplying the calling party telephone number An 800 GS LS ID module on the system can capture this information and display it on the screens of MLX telephones See also ANI Call
74. existing system and do not have the required forms for your customer s system you can load System Programming and Maintenance SPM and print out the required forms If you find that you do not have a completed set of system forms for your customer s system contact your technical support organization or the Customer Service Center CSC See the inside front cover for telephone numbers The system forms that you need are specific for each system and include some or all of those described in the following sections 1 2 Introduction System Forms rrr Installling the Control Unit E Form 1 System Planning Some procedures in Chapter 2 Installing the Control Unit refer to the Control Unit Diagram which is printed on the reverse side of this form m Form 3c Incoming Trunks Tie If you install a 400EM module in the control unit use this form to determine the appropriate switch settings prior to installation Installing Telephones Required and Adjuncts Optional The following forms indicate the telephones and adjuncts that you must install m Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks m Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts m Form 4b Analog Multiline Telephone m Form 4d MLX Telephone m Form 4e MFM Adjunct MLX Telephone m Form 4f Tip Ring Equipment m Form 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog m Form 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital m Form 5c MFM Adjunct DLC m Form 5d Queued Call Consol
75. following circumstances An MLX telephone with an MFM and two DSSs requires a 406743419 power unit An MLX telephone without an MFM but with two DSSs requires a 406943837 power unit 400B adapter and the D6AP cord that is provided with the MFM An MLX telephone with one DSS and an MFM requires a 406943837 power unit 400B adapter and the D6AP cord that is provided with the MFM If one carrier has three or more MLX telephones each with a DSS attached use a 406943837 power unit 4006 adapter and D6AP cord for each MLX telephone and DSS after the first two E The total length of cords between the KS22911 L20r406743419 power supply and the MLX telephone must not be more than 50 ft 15 m Do not replace the 2 ft 61 cm D8AC cord packaged with the DSS with a longer cord Improper operation may result Connect each KS22911 L2 power supply to an AC outlet that is not controlled by a wall switch Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 43 Installing Direct Station Selectors amp To connect a DSS follow the steps below If you are connecting two DSSs to the telephone unpack the second DSS before you start 1 Adjust the angle of the DSS m The DSS is packed fully assembled with the deskstand in the low position If you prefer the low position go to Step 2 Toadjust the angle of the DSS to the high position a Place the DSS face down on a flat surface b Press on the top rear cent
76. frame One of several segments of an analog or digital signal that has a repetitive characteristic For example a DS7 frame consists of a framing bit and 24 bytes which equals 193 bits framing format Pattern of frames used in transmissions frequency generator See ring generator FRL Facility Restriction Level ARS calling restriction type that restricts outgoing calls to certain specified routes FX foreign exchange Central office CO other than the one that is providing local access to the public telephone network G General Purpose Adap See GPA glare Condition that occurs when a user tries to call out on a loop start trunk at the same time that another call arrives on the same trunk GPA General Purpose Adapter Device that connects an analog multiline telephone to optional equipment such as an answering machine or a fax machine ground start trunk Trunk on which the communications system after verifying that the trunk is idle no ground on tip lead transmits a request for service puts ground on ring lead to the telephone company central office CO Group IV G4 fax mach A fax unit offering 400 by 100 dots per inch DPI in fine mode that can operate at any speed for communication with a Group Ill G3 fax machine or another Group IV G4 fax machine GL 16 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary H Hands Free Answer on See HFAI Intercom hands free unit headset HFAI HFU Home sc
77. ft 7 6 m of the control unit If the network interface is more than 25 ft 7 6 m from the control unit make sure you have an OPRE The adapter you need to connect the central office trunks to the control unit depends on the type of network interface installed as shown in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Network Interfaces Network Interface Description Adapter RJ11 Connects one outside ground start GS loop start LS or Direct Inward Dial DID trunk to one modular jack RJ14 Connects two outside trunks to one modular 2 line adapter 267C type jack GS LS or DID RJ21X 50 pin connector connects 25 110AB1 jack 110AB1 jack panel block panel block to outside trunks GS LS or DID RJ2GX 50 pin connector for up to eight tie trunks 356A for eight or fewer tie trunks 259A for one tie trunk RJ48C X Connects DS1 facilities to a four pair jack Z601A if modular cords are two active pairs used After installing the adapter label each jack that connects a central office trunk to the control unit with the trunk s number Use the list provided by the local telephone company or System Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks for outside trunks as a reference 4 2 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface Wiring mmm NOTE If you need to connect the trunk cords differently from the instructions on the system forms record each change on Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks See Appendix A System Numberin
78. go to Step 5 3 Hybrid PBX mode only Do all modules in the carrier have MLX and or analog multiline J Yes telephone jacks 9 No m lf no auxiliary power is not required m f yes continue to Step 4 4 Hybrid PBX mode only Calculate the total number of MLX and analog multiline telephones Number of MLX 20L consoles connected to modules in the carrier Number of MLX 28D consoles connected to modules in the carrier Number of 34 button analog multiline telephones connected to modules in the carrier Total of MLX 20L MLX 28D and 34 button analog telephones m If total is less than or equal to 45 auxiliary power is not required m If the total is greater than 45 continue to Step 5 B 2 Installation Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 5 Calculate the estimated unit loads Module Qty x Unit Load Total op to y osmx s osor to ow 012 100D sess s woo S S wo y osasis o o y s wasnsmx ss w d owo y oasis o 800 GS LS ID 800 DID Total Estimated Unit Load m f the total is less than or equal to 54 auxiliary power is not required m lf the total is greater than 54 continue to Step 6 Installation B 3 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 6 Calculate the actual carrier unit load Qty x Unit Load Total Hybrid PBX or Equipment Modified Network Access Lines DID DS1 GS LS Tie Telephones MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 28D MLX 20L B
79. hang up The green LED should turn off the red LED should turn off and another red LED may turn on 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each incoming or two way dial repeating tie trunk Testing Outgoing Dial Repeating Tie Trunks Perform this test for dial repeating tie trunks that are two way or outgoing only If you are testing dial repeating two way tie trunks perform the incoming test as well To test outgoing dial repeating tie trunks follow the steps below 1 At any telephone that has access to a dial repeating tie trunk press the first tie trunk button The red LED next to the pressed tie trunk button lights Initializing and Testing the System 7 11 Jesting the System 2 Pick up the handset In Hybrid PBX systems with pooled tie trunks press an SA button and dial the pool dial out code The green LED next to the selected button lights 3 Dial the tie trunk number of the extension where someone is waiting for your call You should hear ringing 4 When the person answers verify that you have good two way communication then hang up The green LED should turn off the red LED should turn off and another red LED may turn on 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for each outgoing or two way dial repeating tie trunk Testing Selected System Features This section provides procedures to test the following system features Automatic Route Selection ARS For Hybrid PBX mode only Use the same test for Idle Line Preference
80. holes 4 Disconnect the expansion carrier connector from the previously mounted carrier and put the expansion carrier aside 5 Drill a pilot hole in the center of each of the four screw hole marks 6 Anchor the screws approximately halfway into the backboard 7 If housing clips are to be installed on the housing and this is the last carrier in the control unit place the housing clips around the right hand molding for the screws on the back of the carrier If not go to Step 8 8 Position the expansion carrier on the screws and slide it to the left to reconnect the expansion carrier card extender to the previous carrier s connector 9 Make sure the connection is secure 10 Make sure the carrier is level and that the housing clips extend as far as possible from the right side of the carrier h 1 Tighten the screws Installing the Control Unit 2 27 Installing Expansion Carriers BASIC CARRIER EXPANSION CARRIER CONNECTOR CARD EXTENDER under the breakaway tab BACKBOARD BACKBOARD Figure 2 9 Connecting the Carriers 2 28 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Processor M a H G EE a Installing the Processor Installing the processor includes the following procedures E f both of the following conditions are true follow the procedures in Chapter 9 Modifying the Processor for Key Mode Form 1 System Planning indicates Permanent Key mode Form
81. idle When you replace a module be sure to use the same module type For example do not put a 008 MLX module in place of a 400 GS LS module If a module is replaced with another type of module or if a module is added to the system without powering down the system first a cold start occurs If you move any module to a different slot be sure to renumber the modules by selectingBoard Renumber from system programming See System Programming for information on board renumbering To replace a module follow the steps below 1 Busy out or reset the module Busy Out is recommended 2 Label all cords if they are not labeled already and then unplug them from the module For information on labeling trunk and cords see Chapter 4 in Installation For instructions on checking poorly labeled wiring see Checking Unlabeled Wiring following Step 8 3 Run a demand test by entering test mode 4 Remove the module by pushing up firmly on the tab at the bottom rear of the module and inspect the module for visible damage 5 Insert the new module While holding the tab bring the bottom of the module towards you and away from the carrier 4 58 Control Unit Problems Module Problems pE S 6 Restore the module Lift up the module to disengage it from the rod at the top of the carrier 7 Connect the trunk and extension cords 8 Attach a tag error printout or any information that will help identify any visible problems failure sympt
82. in noisy environments StarSet This monaural headset is worn without a headband It uses a soft pliable ear tip that provides high quality sound yet allows you to hear other conversations or instructions in the workplace Supra Monaural This monaural headset has an adjustable headband It offers a soft comfortable ear cushion that reduces surrounding noise making it easier to understand the caller Supra Monaural Noise Canceling NC Same as above with noise canceling microphone to reduce background noise by up to 75 percent Supra Binaural Sound in both ears with soft ear cushion and adjustable headband Supra Binaural Noise Canceling NC Same as above with noise canceling microphone on flexible boom features windscreen and reduces background noise transmission by up to 75 percent Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 27 Installing Adjuncts E Manual Operation Analog Multiline Telephones Only Manual operation is appropriate when a headset is used occasionally You pick up the handset to answer a call and replace it to hang up The headset consists of the headpiece and a modular base unit The headpiece plugs into the modular base unit and the modular base unit connects to the telephone through the HANDSET jack on the side of the telephone The telephone handset is plugged into the modular base unit The modular base unit allows you to adjust the incoming volume switch between the headset and handset as need
83. it is already being used for the attendant console choose another jack If one of the jacks is already being used for system programming or maintenance use that jack Only one jack at a time can be used for system programming or maintenance 2 Plug the other end of the D8W 87 cord into the LINE jack on the underside of the MLX 20L console MLX 20L Failure If the MLX 20L console does not work follow the steps below 1 Replace the MLX 20L console with one that is known to be working if available 2 Ifthe failure persists or if a working MLX 20L console is not available connect the original MLX 20L console directly into the appropriate MLX jack on the control unit using a cord that is known to be working 3 If the trouble clears replace the original D8W 87 cord If not use the PC as your maintenance terminal and then troubleshoot the leftmost MLX module See Module Problems in Chapter 4 for instructions Introduction 1 3 On Site Programming Maintenance FE Eres eee OBS sen Be abl i 3S mal Alternate MLX 20L Ca Default Jacks Default a the first five 8 ti T Line Jack Line Jack Underneath the MLX 20L Console Figure l l Setting Up the MLX 20L Console 1 4 Introduction On Site Programming Maintenance Setting Up the PC Plug a PC into the ADMIN jack on the processor module as shown in Figure 1 2 If you are using a remote PC for system programming see
84. j 2 28 2 29 2 30 modifying for Key mode 9 10 49 13 Programming disk 7 2173 sd guides 7 2 o overview Protector 146A 2 14 2 15 ooo 147A 2 14 2 45 oO Z o R Radio frequency interference RFI Ring generator 2 19 2 20 S SAA Supplemental Alert Adapter see Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA Single zone paging 3 36 Software supported Speakerphones 7 4 SPM System Programming and Maintenance application 8 24 8 Stand alone products supported StarSet headpiece Station Message Detail Recording SMDR testing Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA Supplemental alerts Supra Binaural headpiece 3 27 Supra Binaural Noise Canceling NC teasee Bar Supra Monaural headpiece 3 27 Supra Monaural Noise Canceling NC headpiece System Erase System planning forms 1 2 System Programming and Maintenance SPM he 305 ssid System Speed Dial testing 7 144 7 14 T T R tip ring see Tip ring T R device Tak back 336 537 id Telephones connecting to control ait MLX backplate 3 54 13 56 button assignment card display extension label 3 power up 3 20 3 22 speakerphone supported 3 1 Bt unsupported 3 39 3 40 _ wireless 3 57 Installation IN 7 Index Testing the system analog telephones ground start trunks Group Calling feature 7 13 7 14 loop start trunks MLX telephones ba
85. jacks on the BR 241 B1 bridging adapter to the extension jacks indicated on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks Connect the EVEN jack on the bridging adapter to the extension jack that is associated with the even numbered extension not the logical ID 7 Connect all power cords to an AC outlet that is not controlled by a wall switch 6 6 Connecting Data Equipment Analog Voice and Modem Data Stations ee LCLCLCLCCtt lt OSC 408 408 GS LS or 008 Module Two adjacent Analog Extension jacks STATION En reas EVEN ODD BR 241 B1 Bridging Adapter AC Outlet 4 termina MES ata Terminal Analog Multiline Telephone D4BU cord L EQUIP jack LINE jack EIA 232 D Cable y SERIAL connector AC Outlet Figure 6 1 Analog Voice and Modem Data Equipment Configuration Connecting Data Equipment 6 7 Modem Data Only Stations Modem Data Only Stations Figure 6 2 shows the equipment configuration for a modem data only station To setup a modem data only station follow the steps below 1 If using an external modem use an EIA 232 D cable to connect the modem to the serial port on the data terminal If using an internal modem it should already be connected For a data terminal that has both COM1 and COM2 ports make sure you use the one designated for data transmission See the customer s system manager if you are not sure 2
86. logs 1 clearing 1 20 generated by system 1 19 1 20 23 o Alarm message 2 3 Analog multiline telephone 3 4 Apparatus codes 012 modules 4 5 Attendant dialing Audit procedure Calls lines Automatic tests 4 80 Auxiliary power unit replacing 48 49 ___ B B channel loopback test error messages table 4 summary Busy out extension C Call Forwarding feature Carrier types of problems Central office checking problems Circuit module firmware upgrading error conditions 4 66 4 70 procedure 4 62 4 66 __ summary 4 61 461 overview 4 60 4 61 Circuit pack Maintenance and Troubleshooting IN 1 Index re Cold star 1 21 si Error messages Control unit board memory programming failure housing installing Release 2 0 or earlier flash ROM won t terase 469 incorrect slot installing Release 2 1 or later memory card 4 66 4 69 ss 5 33 memory erase 4 469 removing 115 1 16 Error threshholds 22 power supply problems 4 2 4 11 ESF T1 CSU DTE loopback test powering down the system 4 1 4 2 processor problems Extension ring generator 4 4 busy out 5 13 5 CSU loopback test maintenance busy status 5 9 5 11 lt error messages restoring 5 18 procedure 4 78 restoring module results F summary Feature module replacing dia
87. logs follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the System option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit E1 2 Select Error Log System Make a selection Status Upgrd Instll Error Log Last mm dd yy hh mm Access Log Exit Enter 3 Select an error log option System Error Log If you select Last 10 Make a selection see Checking the Last 10 Errors Last 10 If you select Permanent see Per manent Checking Permanent Errors Transient If you select Transient most recent alarm see Checking Transient Errors Exit B Be R E The most recent alarm message stays on the System Error Log screen until it is replaced by another one The screen does not update the most recent alarm while displayed to see any updates you need to exit this screen and re enter Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 3 Error Logs A 8 i Checking Permanent Errors Follow Steps 1 through 3 above for Checking the Error Logs In Step 3 select Permanent Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Permanent Errors gt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Slot xx Port xx count xxx Press the More button to page PgUp First mm dd yy hh mm through the permanent errors Last mm dd yy hh mm Code xxxx Press the Drop button to delete Alt P Exit an error log entry Line 2 provides a brief description of
88. lw AT amp T 555 630 140 August 1994 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3 0 Installation Copyright 1994 AT amp T AT amp T 555 630 140 All Rights Reserved August 1994 Printed in U S A Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change See Appendix A Customer Support Information for important information It follows Maintenance and Trobleshooting in this binder Security of Your System Preventing Toll Fraud As a customer of a new telephone system you should be aware that there exists an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud Telephone toll fraud can occur in many forms despite the numerous efforts of telephone companies and telephone equipment manufacturers to control it For important information regarding your system and toll fraud see Parana A Coetomer Supper iormation ll follows Maintenance and Trobleshooting in this binder Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc
89. m Checking Ports 5 7 m Conclusion of Hardware Maintenance 5 30 OOOO EEE EEE EEE A Customer Support Information m Support Telephone Number A 1 m Federal Communications Commission FCC Electromagnetic Interference Information A 2 m m Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information A 2 m FCC Notification and Repair Information A 3 Installation and Operational Procedures A 5 DOC Notification and Repair Information A 6 m Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Communications du Canada et la reparation A 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting v TS Contents a B System Numbering Forms m Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks m Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts B 2 i B 4 C Unit Load Calculation Worksheet m Unit Load Worksheet C 2 D Backing Up with a Memory Card E E Modifying a Release 2 1 or Earlier Processor for Key Mode EE ee GL Glossary E IN Index vi Maintenance and Troubleshooting EE LUCUCUCCOCOCO C C Figures 1 Introduction 1 1 Setting Up the MLX 20L Console EE SeS e 4 Control Unit Problems 4 2 Replacing a Ring Generator 1 4 1 2 Setting Up the PC 1 5 1 7 4 7 8 551 T1 CSU Loopback Connection 4 74 4 9 ESF T1 CSU DTE Loopback Connection 4 74 4 11 Acculink 3150 CSU DTE Loopback Commands 1 4 75 4 6 4 7 Inserting the Upgrade Memory Card 4 62 4 8 4 12 Acculink 3150 CSU DTE Loopback Command 2 4
90. manage telephone usage and control costs by tracking calls placed from and received by the system 8 4 Installing Applications Call Accounting System mm NOTE CAS is also available as part of the UNIX System based Integrated Solution H IS Il and Integrated Solution Ill IS Ill software applications CAS runs on an approved DOS PC Two versions of the product are offered CAS for Windows and CAS Plus V3 HackerTracker System for CAS Plus V3 is a software enhancement designed to help detect fraudulent use of the communication system The HackerTracker software can detect abnormal calling activity by monitoring facilities and account code usage It then logs the activity and issues a real time alarm Considerations You can connect only one CAS to the system CAS operates on a dedicated PC running DOS Hardware and Software Requirements A typical CAS Plus V3 system consists of the following m An approved DOS PC with 640K RAM Hard disk drive with at least 3 MB of available space for the application software Parallel printer output Serial SMDR input E One parallel printer m D8W cord and 355AF adapter connecting the SMDR port on the communications system to the COM1 serial port on the PC m DOS version 3 3 or later Installing Applications 8 5 Call Accounting System CAS software To use CAS for Windows with the system the following components are recommended For a single site system an NCR 3315 PC 20 MHz
91. module into the processor 8 Insert the processor back into the carrier For more information about inserting the processor see Chapter 2 of Installation Module Problems If you suspect that a module is faulty do the following m To identify the cause of module errors run the module tests described below m To determine whether the module is faulty replace it with a module of the same type If the errors cease the problem is solved Module Tests The module tests in this section identify the cause of module malfunctions After each module test record any errors on the repair tag that will be shipped with the faulty module If the module is sent for repair this helps repair personnel troubleshoot the cause of the malfunction You should read through the following section Module Test Process before running any module tests NOTE A module on which you run tests cannot be used for service Because your customer depends on this service run module tests during off hours if possible If you cannot minimize the time required for each module s downtime whenever possible Control Unit Problems 4 33 Module Problems mm E Module Test Process Figure 4 6 shows the module test process Refer to it and the text that follows for the recommended approach to testing modules Check the equipment a power supply a maintenance terminal a processor use the PC when testing back up the system pro
92. of the control unit To connect the control unit to a dedicated AC outlet follow the steps below Turn the basic carrier s power supply switch to the OFF position Turn off the power supply switches on the expansion carriers Unplug the power cords from any auxiliary power units Plug one end of the power cord into the AC INPUT connector just below the power switch on the front of the basic carrier s power supply Plug the other end of the power cord into the AC outlet allowing at least 1 ft 30 4 cm of slack in the cord Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each expansion carrier A CAUTION Do not attach the power cord s to any building surfaces Installing the Control Unit 2 43 Powering Up the System Powering Up the System A CAUTION Follow the procedure below to power up the system only if the system is completely installed failure to comply with this procedure can result in shock hazard or damage to the equipment 1 Turn on the power switch for each expansion carrier start with the power supply in the rightmost carrier The green power lights on each expansion carrier power supply should turn on 2 Turn on the power switch on the basic carrier power supply The dot on the one character display LED flashes The green light on the power supply should turn on The red light on the processor should turn on for 15 to 45 seconds and then turn off All indicators on the 100D and 400EM line trunk modules if pr
93. office co trunks at the entrance to the site Carbon blocks or gas discharge tubes connected to an approved ground m Adequate bonding of the central office trunk protector ground and the power company ground A CAUTION Check these requirements with a simple visual inspection If you cannot verify that the central office grounding requirements are met contact the central office Do not connect the control unit to the central office trunks until you are certain that these requirements are met Installing the Control Unit 2 13 AC Power and Grounding Heavy Lightning Protection For most surges adequate protection is provided by meeting the previously listed requirements Additional protection is required when the customer is located in a heavy lightning area Connect a 147A protector to the system to limit surges from the AC lines and up to four CO trunks For systems with more than four CO trunks do the following m Connect a 146A protector to the 147A protector providing protection for an additional four trunks m Connect up to three maximum 146A protectors to a 147A protector allowing a maximum of 16 trunks on one 147A protector m For more than 16 trunks add another 147A protector and continue adding 146A protectors as needed See Table 2 3 for various configurations and Figure 2 4 for a typical 147A protector installation Table 2 3 Heavy Lightning Protection Number of CO Trunks 1 4 5 8 9 12 1
94. on the backup disk Maintenance Busy Causes The causes of maintenance busy vary according to the type of trunk and are detailed in the following sections Central Office Problems 5 5 Trunk Errors E TT Ground Start GS Trunk The following events cause maintenance busy on a ground start trunk m A seizure of the trunk is attempted that results in incomplete handshaking or no loop current between the CO and the system After four occurrences the trunk is put into a maintenance busy state and a permanent error is logged m The CO fails to disconnect when the GS trunk is dropped by the system After two occurrences the trunk is put into a maintenance busy state and a permanent error is logged Loop Start LS Trunk No loop current exists when the LS trunk is seized The port is marked maintenance busy and a permanent error is logged after four occurrences TieTrunk The following events cause maintenance busy on a tie trunk A seizure of an outgoing tie trunk fails A transient error is reported After four unsuccessful seizure attempts the port is marked maintenance busy and the error becomes permanent m The CO fails to disconnect A transient error is reported After two occurrences the port is marked maintenance busy and the error becomes permanent NOTE The test is not run on auto out tie trunks Maintenance Busy Programming You can select Mai ntenance Busy as a system programming option If
95. on this screen F6 4 Select the Board Controller Test Demand Test Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Make a selection Note Busy out slot first BoardCntrir IntLoopback Exit F2 Control Unit Problems 4 51 Module Problems n Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 5 Select Test Once or Repetitive Demand Test Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Board aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Board Controller Test once Repetitive F2 Exit F3 The screen below appears while the test is running At the same time if the module has a green LED it flashes Demand Test Slot xx Xx Slot number entered in Step 2 Board aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Board Controller Test in Progress If you are running the repetitive test this screen remains until the test fails To interrupt repetitive testing select Exit F5 The screen below appears only if you selected Test Once and the module passes the test Demand Test Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Board aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Board Controller Test Successfully Completed The screen below appears when either test Once orRepetitive fails Demand Test Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Board aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Board Controller Test FAILED XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Lines 5 and 6 show error messages XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX If there are more than two messages Exit select More to see them PgUp 4 52 Control Unit Problems Module Proble
96. overview of the installation process which varies from customer to customer Installation Sequence The following is a list of the components that the system can include and shows the order in which you should install them When installing your customer s system try to adhere to this order as much as possible 1 Install the control unit required 2 Connect power accessories to the control unit optional 3 Install the telephones required and adjuncts optional 4 Connect the telephones to the control unit required Introduction 1 1 System Forms mm 5 Connect the control unit to the network interface required 6 Connect the channel service unit CSU to the 100D module on the control unit required only with the 100D module 7 Connect the printer and PC to the control unit optional 8 Connect data equipment to the control unit optional 9 Initialize and test the system required 10 Install the control unit housing required 11 Install applications optional A list of required tools and equipment is given before each installation procedure System Forms Some of the installation procedures in this guide refer to system forms These forms indicate information that is specific to your customer s system The forms you need should be included with the system programming disk or memory card which contains all of the programming specifically for your customer s system If you are upgrading an
97. power cord s to any building surfaces Use only the power unit line cord supplied with the auxiliary power unit An incorrect cord will damage the power supply and may damage modules Installing the Control Unit 2 25 Installing the Auxiliary Power Unit 48 VDC Auxiliary Auxiliary pone Power Input Unit AC input f a Sip j Power Cord Ea Ca Ferrite Ground t f Cores Wire AUX Power Unit AC Power Cord 7 Control Unit AC Power Cord Figure 2 8 Installing an Auxiliary Power Unit 2 26 Installing the Control Unit Installing Expansion Carriers Installing Expansion Carriers If you are adding an expansion carrier to an existing system see the Control Unit he Control Unit in Chapter 9 before continuing If you are to install one or more expansion carriers follow the steps below to mount each one Refer to Figure 2 9 and throughout the procedure 1 Locate the breakaway plastic tab on the right side of the previously mounted carrier Using a flat blade screwdriver gently pry the tab open to expose the card extender 2 Align the connector of the expansion carrier with the card extender on the previously mounted carrier and slide the connector onto the extender 3 Mark the screw hole locations on the backboard using the expansion carrier or the template that comes with the preassembled plastic backboard as a guide Make sure the carrier is level before marking the
98. review the 10 most recently recorded errors either permanent or transient Trouble Accessing the Error Logs If you cannot access the error logs or if the system is inoperable use the following steps as a guideline to troubleshoot the system 1 Check the power supply LED a Is the power switch turned on b Is the power cord connected to an AC wall outlet that is not controlled by a wall switch If the LED is off and you are sure that the power is connected and turned on see Power Supply Problems in Chapter 4 2 If you still cannot access the error logs after checking the power supply see Processor Problems in Chapter 4 3 O ill cannot access the error logs after checking the processor see Carrier Problems in Chapter 4 4 If you still cannot access the error logs review the System Inventory screen as detailed in Chapter 2 and escalate the problem to your technical support organization Check the Access Log At any time during the maintenance process you can check the access log for maintenance and system programming This log indicates the last 20 times that someone accessed maintenance or system programming If you find that someone accessed maintenance or system programming shortly before the problem originated that person may be able to help you isolate the trouble by providing additional information on what they did 1 24 Introduction Maintenance Strategy E e Once you receive that in
99. ring generator s cable with the 3 pin connectors to the header labeled P101 on the power supply circuit board This cable connector as with all four of the cable connectors is keyed so that you cannot attach it to the header if it is turned the wrong way 12 Connect the other end of the cable to the header labeled P1 on the ring generator The cable headers P1 and P101 should be on the same side of the housing so that the cables are not crossing each other 13 Connect one end of the new 4 pin cable to the header labeled P202 on the power supply circuit board 14 Connect the other end of the cable to the header labeled P2 on the ring generator 15 Attach the cables to the clips on the inside edge of the plastic housing 16 Replace the top of the module housing Take time to ensure that the on off faceplate on the front of the power supply housing is aligned and inside the top cover 17 Carefully taking time to make sure the on off faceplate stays aligned turn the module over and replace the five screws 4 6 Control Unit Problems Power Supply Problems Step 7 Remove the four screws one in each comer of the ring generator Steps 1 through 3 RING GENERATOR Open the power supply Step 4 Detach cable from wire cip Detach cable from wire clip Grip here Grip Step 6 Here Disconnect the P101 header grip the sides and pull forcefully Step 5 i l Step 18 Disconne
100. speakerphone adjuncts 8110 Basic desk telephone with a built in speakerphone with volume control and Mute button with LED indicator 500MM Basic telephones equipped with rotary dials so no system features 554BMPA requiring and can be used Telephones with neon Message lights are 500SM not supported k Vintage telephone no longer available for sale or lease t Although the 8102 can be connected to a speakerphone and the8110 has a speakerphone they cannot be used for group paging not supported on single line telephones The auto answer function on the 8110 must be disabled Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 41 Installing Adjuncts Single Line Telephones in Release 3 0 and Later In Release 3 0 and later only single line telephones with positive disconnect are fully supported as system telephones any single line telephones equipped with a ground start button if necessary can be used as PFT telephones Older single line telephones can be used with Release 3 0 but their operation is slightly different Table 3 3 lists the single line telephones supported in Release 3 0 and later Table 3 3 Single Line Telephones Supported by Release 3 0 and Later Model Description 2500 YMGL Basic desk telephone with Message light and Flash button Flash button is used instead of the switchhook for features that require a switchhook flash such as Transfer and Hold 8101 Basic desk telephone with Message light and Flash button
101. system records errors not only for trunks but for T1 ports on the 100D module as well In some cases errors occur not because a single port fails but because the entire T1 link fails When this happens 100D automatic testing activates an alarm Troubleshooting Trunk Problems Table 5 1 provides a quick guide to troubleshooting trunks Central Office Problems 5 1 Trunk Errors Table 5 1 Troubleshooting Trunk Symptoms Symptom Section Incoming calls not being received Incoming Trunk Problems Cannot make outgoing calls Outgoing Trunk Problems General trunk problems Manual Correction of Trunk Problems NOTE If the customer reports ethos during conversations on T1 trunks with GS emulation to a toll office check the system programming for T1 trunks The system is not intended to work with GS emulation to a toll office Tie trunk emulation must be programmed Program the module to emulate tie trunks to the central office Manual Correction of Trunk Problems If the system cannot seize a trunk even after repeated attempts you may have to replace the module To identify the trunk problem follow the steps below 1 Check for dial tone at the control unit 2 If you do not hear dial tone check the error logs and make a trunk test call 3 Check for dial tone at the network interface It is sometimes difficult for the customer to detect trunk troubles If a trunk is down the system records an error in the error log and takes the
102. template wiring troughs D rings and D8W cords E Systimax This complete wiring kit contains 110 termination blocks with modular jacks a 110A field termination block a template wiring troughs D rings and patch cords Considerations Review the following items before you begin the procedure m f the way you connect the telephones differs from the instructions on the system forms record each jack and telephone change on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks See Appendix A System Numbering Forms m f you use staples to attach the cords to walls or baseboards make sure you do not pierce the cords 3 58 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit m f an MLX telephone or analog multiline telephone is in a different building from the control unit and is within 1000 ft 305 m of the control unit connect the telephone to the control unit using two In Range Out of Building IROB protectors Make sure you use an MLX specific IROB protector for an MLX telephone and an analog multiline specific IROB protector for an analog multiline telephone See the documentation packaged with the IROB protector for complete installation instructions m f the single line or T R telephone is 1000 ft 805 m or further from the control unit connect the telephone to the control unit using an Off Premises Range Extender OPRE See the documentation packaged with the OPRE for complete
103. the control unit into such an outlet invites accidental disconnection of the system Hardware Preassemble Process If an installation is to be preassembled wired programmed and tested on the new lightweight plastic backboard see Installing the Backboard Backboard Requirements The backboard should be wide enough to accommodate the carrier and up to two additional carriers assuming that system growth Is anticipated There should be enough room on each side of the control unit for the necessary wiring fields To accommodate the maximum control unit size make sure the backboard meets the following requirements m Material inch plywood Check with the local building code enforcement agency to see whether fire retardant material is required 2 4 Installing the Control Unit AC Power and Grounding EE Make sure that the material meets local building codes m Dimensions With Systimax wiring 7 ft wide by 4 ft high Without Systimax wiring 6 ft wide by 3 ft high Installing the Backboard When you are certain that the backboard meets the requirements indicated above or is the new lightweight plastic material backboard with preassembled equipment in place attach the backboard to the wall Use the following mounting hardware m For a wood mounting surface use wood screws m For brick cinderblock or concrete use masonry anchors m For plaster or plasterboard use toggle bolts m For sh
104. the error logs you can check the access log to help you troubleshoot Each time maintenance or system programming is accessed the event is recorded in an access log up to the last 20 events This information may be useful in determining whether one of those events caused an error detected shortly thereafter Reviewing the Access Log Each event is documented by the time and date of occurrence The station button Sta column indicates whether the event occurred from an MLX 20L console if so the extension number is displayed or from SPM SPMD if direct SPMR if remote The SP M column indicates whether the event originated from System Programming SP or Maintenance M 2 18 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Access Log x rr ttt t t t t C Scanning the Log The last 20 events are shown beginning with the most recently accessed event When you reach the end of the list you hear a beep and all variable information is cleared from the screen To return to the beginning of the list select Exit and then select Access Log again Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance sSystem sAccess Log PC Procedure F6 F1 F4 To check the access log follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the System option Maintenance Make a selection System Sl ot Port Exit E1 2 Display the first screen of the
105. the module and central office resolved replace the bad module If the If this error occurs four times problem persists reinstall the old module consecutively and if Automatic and test the trunk Maintenance Busy is enabled and the 50 maintenance busy limit has not been exceeded the trunk is busied out automatically 840D INCORRECT FIRMWARE STATE Turn power off for at least 1 second and If this error occurs 4 times then turn it on Repeat system consecutively and if Automatic programming procedure If problem Maintenance Busy is enabled and persists replace the module the 50 maintenance busy limit has not been exceeded the trunk is busied out automatically Continued on next page Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 17 Access Log ME Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description Action 840E UPLINK MESSAGE ERROR Turn the processor off and then on Communication problems between Repeat system programming procedure the processor and the modules The If the problem persists replace the module received an unrecognized module message from the processor 8C01 SLOTS NOT EQUAL Troubleshoot the slot descriptions in The module that occupies the your backup file against the actual indicated slot does not match the System modules that occupy those Slot information contained in the PC Slots After the mismatch is corrected or PCMCIA card backup file repeat the restore operation Access Log In addition to checking
106. the originating and terminating unit for tie trunk operation Tie Trunk Signaling The 400EM tie trunk module can transmit signals in three different formats Each format is made up of a specific signaling mode and a specific signaling type The DIP switches on the 400EM module allow you to select the signaling mode for tie trunk transmission The signaling type is selected through system programming Signaling Modes There are two signaling modes m E amp M This is a standard interface The E amp M signaling leads are separate from the transmission leads requiring a 3 pair wire interface Simplex In Simplex the two signaling leads are superimposed onto the analog transmission leads providing a 2 pair wire interface for connecting two local systems at minimal cost Protected or Unprotected Depending on the type of tie trunk installation protective resistance may be installed to protect the circuit from outside interference from high voltage transients or voltage fluctuations In Simplex mode the circuit always requires protective resistance The E amp M mode can be either protected or unprotected depending upon the location of the distant PBX Signaling Types Three different signaling types combine with the signaling modes Together these create the proper signaling format for each system Signaling types in each mode are as follows 2 34 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Modules SS eee E E amp M Mode Ty
107. the side panels to the front panel s in the same way 4 Pickup the housing and place it on the control unit If the system has more than one carrier make sure you hold the housing only from the basic carrier side otherwise the housing can disassemble Line up the wire clips that are attached to the carrier with the recesses on the outside of the side panels Push back the panels until the clips hook over the tabs and rest in the a recesses FRONT PANEL LINE UP WITH THE SEMICIRCLE ON INSIDE OF FRONT PANEL SLIDE TONGUES IN AND PUSH FRONT PANEL UP Figure 9 8 Installing the Control Unit Housing Upgrading the System 9 17 Completing the Upgrade TE 9 18 Upgrading the System System Numbering Forms When you change any existing trunk or extension wiring record information about the wiring on the appropriate system numbering form This appendix includes examples of all of the system numbering forms and instructions for completing Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks The system numbering forms which are included in this appendix are as follows n Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks a Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts sForm 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks a Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers Figure A 4 See System Planning for completed forms that contain more detailed information regarding the configuration of your customer s system Installation
108. then lift it straight up c Install a Release 3 0 processor module See Installing the Processor in Chapter 2 9 6 Upgrading the System Upgrading the Control Unit Figure 9 3 Removing a Module from the Carrier Replacing the Housing Clips 1 Remove the housing clips from the right side of the module Upgrading the System 9 7 Upgrading the Control Unit a Remove the rightmost module from the control unit See in Chapter 2 for instructions Using a flat blade screwdriver unscrew the upper right corner of the carrier only far enough to free the clip Pull the top right corner of the carrier toward you while grasping the housing clip and pushing it away from you to free it from the carrier When the clip is free enough to clear the screw molding on the back of the carrier slide the clip out and discard it Compare the Control Unit Diagram with the existing control unit If you are installing an additional expansion carrier in this upgrade do not replace the clips on the right side until the last expansion carrier is installed If no more carriers are to be installed replace the clip now making sure the clip is as far to the right as possible Secure the screw and then repeat Steps b c and d for the lower right corner of the carrier 2 Remove the power supply module to access the housing clips on the leftmost side of the carrier See Fic a Press up on the tab at the bottom rear of the power suppl
109. this means the LEDs turn on for others it means the phone starts ringing This test connects a test tone to the B channel and sends a repeated ring burst to the telephone m Onan MLX telephone with a DSS attached all LEDs light and the phone rings throughout the test E On an MLX display telephone the display blanks out and is replaced with a grid of small dots 3 Press each line feature button two LEDs each The red and green LEDs should toggle on and off 4 Press each fixed feature button that has an LED Feature HFAI Mute and Speaker Each LED should toggle on and off NOTE Mute and Speaker LEDs may not toggle consistently because they are managed by the control unit and the telephone 3 6 Telephone Problems MLX ene Tests 5 8 9 10 Press each fixed feature button that does not have an LED Transfer Conf Drop and Hold and each dialpad button When you press each one of these buttons the Message LED should toggle on and off Press the fixed feature buttons and the dialpad buttons in the order shown below to turn on all the LEDs a Volume down b Volume up c Transfer d Conf e Drop f Hold g Dial 123456789 0 The LEDs should toggle on and off If the MLX telephone does not have a display hang up and go to Step 9 if it does continue with the next step To test an MLX display press each display button Each button name should display in the upper left corner as described in T
110. tie line trunk module for jacks numbered 1 through 4 in check Form 3c incoming Trunks Tie for E amp M signaling type Set the dual in line packaging DIP switches on the front of the 400EM Tie Trunk module according to the E amp M signaling type settings listed in and Table 2 5 and shown in Figure 2 11 The default E amp M signal does not require any adjustments in the DIP switches 2 Remove the protective cover from each module s gold finger connector 3 Lower the hook on top of the module onto the rod on the top of the carrier in the appropriate slot See Fig 4 Make sure the connector on the module mates properly with the connector on the carrier 5 Swing the module into the slot and firmly push the module into the carrier until it locks into place A CAUTION To avoid damage do not force the module If the module does not insert easily press the bottom rear locking tab remove the module and inspect the module and carrier for damage or obstruction If there is no damage and no obstruction reinsert the module A damaged carrier or module must be replaced 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for each module you want to install Installing the Control Unit 2 33 Installing the Modules Tie Trunks Tie trunks connect two separate PBX communications systems either directly or through one or more central offices as if they were one system at the same location In the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System the 400EM module is
111. trunk out of service However if an incoming only trunk is down the only sign of trouble is customer complaints that incoming calls are not being received Check the error logs for messages about trunk type such as DID tie and T1 Also check the wiring and the system parameters for example touch tone rotary toll restriction and disconnect time interval 5 2 Central Office Problems Trunk Errors T Outgoing Trunk Problems If the system cannot sieze outgoing trunks try the following procedure NOTE You cannot perform this procedure on a rotary telephone 1 Check for outside dial tone at the network interface For GS trunks apply ground to the ring lead to get dial tone If dial tone is not present notify the customer 2 Pick up the handset of a test telephone to check for system dial tone For a Hybrid PBX system dial 03 3 Dial the 2 digit trunk number 01 80 of the trunk you want to test 4 Listen for dial tone E lf dial tone is not present use a test telephone to isolate the problems either to the module where the trunk terminates or to the location in the trunk access equipment lf dial tone is present dial a working outside number to verify that the call can be completed Dialing an outside number on a single line telephone works only if the trunk accepts touch tone dialing If you are using a single line telephone to dial out to an E amp M tie trunk or a T1 tie trunk wait for a click before
112. you perform on site maintenance through the ADMIN jack 5 Connect to the modem on the remote system When you hear dial tone dial 10 6 When you hear the modem tone hang up If nothing appears on the SPM screen press Enter 1 10 Introduction Using SPM Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 7 Enter the password Enter Password Type the remote access password The password you enter does not appear as you type it 8 Select an option SPM Main Menu Press one of the function keys Menu Select Function F1 Sys Program Maintenance F6 F2 Backup Restore F7 F3 Boards Pass Thru F8 E4 Print Opts Password F9 E5 Monitor Language F10 NOTES 1 If you do not know the password check the System Information Report or ask to speak with the system manager 2 You can change the password without knowing the old password only when you perform on site maintenance through the ADMIN jack Introduction 1 11 elie SPM The SPM Display SPM screens simulate the MLX 20L console see Figure 1 4 v2 QUIT Home Welcome to SPM PgUp MORE MENU The MERLIN LEGEND PgDn INSP System Programming F6 amp Maintenance Utility Please press any key to continue Version 2 09 F5 i LINE hi Al yt we OW Shift LINE Shift Shift LINE Shift a we a ve Pe Figure 1 4 The SPM Display Each SPM screen includes a 7 line by 24 character console simulation window that corresponds to the displ
113. you do there is also a menu Selection to include tie trunks 5 6 Central Office Problems Checking Ports Maintenance Busy Status See Checking Ports below for information on maintenance busy status Checking Ports You perform the following procedures from the maintenance terminal By selecting Port from the Maintenance screen you can check the maintenance busy status and other information for individual trunks and extensions Once you determine the maintenance busy status you might also be interested in the other features on the Port menu which include the following Resetting EIA 232 ports and modems Busying out and restoring trunks and extensions m Auditing DS1 PRI lines or calls Checking Trunk Maintenance Busy Status Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance gt Port oline Trunk Dial the dial plan no gt Enter Status PC Procedure F6 F3 Type the dial plan no F10 F1 To check a trunk s maintenance busy status follow the steps below Central Office Problems 5 7 Checking Ports Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Mai ntendnce Make a selection System Slot H ort Exit 2 Select the Line Trunk Option Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Modem Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port Exit F1 3 Specify the dial plan line number for the trunk nnn 801 to 880 Li ne Trun
114. 11 and RJ14 Interfaces 4 10 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface Wiring A CAUTION Incorrect wiring can damage the ports and cause them to stop functioning Make sure you use the proper cords For all GS LS modules do the following m Use a D2R cable from an RJ11 Do not use the Brand Rex Quad cable from an E66 block If you cannot avoid using the Brand Rex Quad cable reverse the tip and ring leads at the E66 block to correct the mismatch To connect the RJ11 and RJ14 network interfaces to the control unit follow the steps below 1 Test the central office trunks for proper connection See Testing Trunks later in this chapter for instructions 2 Label the network interface jacks the control unit module jacks and the D2R cords properly See Labeling Trunks later in this chapter for instructions 3 Plug one end of a D2R cord into the jack at the network interface and the other end into the appropriate line trunk jack on the control unit 4 Dress the wires properly RJ2GX Interface The RJ2GxX is a 25 pair amphenol interface that connects up to 8 tie trunks Construct the cross connect field in the same way you did for the RJ21X interface RJ21X and RJ2GxX interfaces do not require separate termination blocks If there is room on the termination block for the trunk wires you can punch down both the RJ21X and the RJ2GX on the same 110AB1 100JP12 block Leave any unused wires u
115. 16 or higher of SPM 3 Install a Release 3 0 processor module See Chapter 2 installing the 4 Perform a frigid start System Erase to ensure that all system programming is returned to default values Use System Erase from the SPM Maintenance menu Maintenance gt Slot gt 00 gt Demand Test System Erase Line 5 left button twice Yes See Maintenance and Troubleshooting for more information on System Erase 5 Convert the backup file This converts the backup file created in Step 2 to Release 3 0 format 6 Restore system programming this puts the system in an idle state and it cannot be used for the duration of the procedure Refer to Restoring from the System Programming Diskette in Chapter 7 for more information Use version 3 xx or higher of SPM and restore the file you converted in Step 5 7 If applicable program new features See System Programming for detailed programming procedures Upgrading from the MERLIN II Communications System To upgrade from the MERLIN II Communications System to Release 3 0 follow the steps below 1 Install SPM Install or upgrade to version 3 xx or higher of SPM 2 Remove the control unit housing See Installing the Control Unit in Chapter 2 if you need instructions 3 Replace old modules and add new modules as specified on the Control Unit Diagram of Form 1 System Planning Upgrading the System 9 15 Completing the Upgrade See Installing the Con
116. 3 16 17 20 21 24 NOTES Required Protectors 147A 147A and a 146A 147A and two 146As 147A and three 146As Second 147A Second 147A and one 146A 1 When you use the second 147A you can connect the 146As in any combination up to a maximum of three 146As per 147A 2 For detailed installation instructions see the documentation packaged with the protectors 2 14 Installing the Control Unit AC Power and Grounding 146A 147A Protector Status Indicato Light Protector Ground Strap AC Connection AC Surge Suppressor Scena rotector WE f et ONTROL UNI TEL CO LINE qQONTROL UNIT EL CO LINE LELI Control Unit To Cent l j Office T 10 12 or 14 Cross Connect Control r AWG Ground Wire Field Unit Module F Connect telecommunications equipment only to these outlets Maximum load 12 5A Figure 2 4 Installing 146A and 147A Protectors Installing the Control Unit 2 15 Unit Loads T Unit Loads A unit load is a measure of power 1 9 watts that you use to determine the electrical load that the components listed below place on the control unit s power supply m Telephones and adjuncts m 800 DID modules Only the telephones and adjuncts that connect to the analog and digital extension jacks ports on the control unit require unil load calculation When calculating unit load do not include any equipment with its own power supply Ch
117. 3 21 3 20 Routing the Cord s Through the Cord Channel 3 23 3 21 Manual and One Touch Headset Operation 3 29 3 22 Single Zone Paging with PagePac Plus 3 31 3 23 Single Zone Paging with Customer Supplied Amplifier 3 32 3 24 Single Zone Paging with UPAM 3 33 3 25 Single Zone Paging with Background Music and Magic on Hold 3 36 3 26 Multizone Paging with Background Music Magic on Hold and Bidirectional Paging Talk Back 3 27 Installing the Supplemental Alert Adapter 3 39 3 28 Connecting One or More DSSs 3 45 3 29 Wiring for Auxiliary Power 3 46 3 30 Adjusting or Removing the Deskstand 3 49 3 31 Connecting the Line Cords 3 50 3 32 Removing the Extension Label 3 51 Installation ix A t st CSOS SOSOS C C COCC Figures Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Continued 3 39 Connecting Two Voice Pairs to a Telephone Using a Bridging Adapter BR 241 B1 3 61 3 40 Removing the Connecting Block 3 63 4 1 RJ21X Network Interface Connector 4 5 x Installation Figures 5 Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 1 Connecting a PC Within 50 ft 15 2 m 5 3 5 2 Connecting a PC More Than 50 ft 15 2 m Away 5 6 5 3 Connecting a CAT and Printer on the Same AC Outlet 5 10 5 4 Connecting a CAT and Printer on Different AC Outlets Control Unit Connections 5 13 5 5 Connecting a Printer Within 50 ft 15 2 m 5 16 5 6 Connecting a Printer More Than 50 ft 15 2 m Away 5 19 5
118. 3 24 unsupported 3 39 Applications supported ARS Automatic Route Selection see Automatic Route Selection ARS testing AT amp T Attendant 8 16 Automated Document Delivery System ADDS 8 3 8 4 Automatic Route Selection ARS testing 7 13 Automatic start trunks testing incoming outgoing two way Auxiliary power unit installation 2 24 2 25 _ _ overview 2 17 B Backboard 2 2 2 3 _ _ _ Background music copyright release and license with multizone paging Magic on Hold and bidirectional paging 3 36 3 37 with single zone ing and Magic Installation IN 1 Index Call Accounting Terminal CAT documentation 8 9 sY hardware requirements 8 8 on outlet with CAT 5 9 5 10 lt on outlet with printer hardware req wabe procedure 5 9 5 10 _ on outlet without printer control unit connections Call Management System CMS documentation 8 11 8 12 ___ hardware and software CAS Call Accounting System see Call Accounting System CAS CAT Call Accounting Terminal see Call Accounting Terminal CAT CMS Call Management System see Call Management System CMS Components installation sequence Connecting block removal Control unit dimensions 2 3 2 4 e a oo backboard connecting to AC outlet 2 42 environmental requirements 2 2 2 3 forms for 1 3 front cover housing 7 22 9 17
119. 30 115 Equipment and Operations Reference 555 630 116 Pocket Reference 555 630 111 System Programming 555 630 112 System Planning 555 630 113 System Planning Forms Telephone User Support 555 630 122 MLX 10D MLX 10DP MLX 28D and MLX 20L Display Telephones User s Guide 555 630 150 MLX 10D Display Telephone Tray Cards 5 cards 555 630 153 MLX 28D and MLX 20L Telephone Tray Cards 5 cards 555 630 124 MLX 10 Nondisplay Telephone User s Guide 555 630 151 MLX 10 Nondisplay Telephone Tray Cards 6 cards 555 630 120 Analog Multiline Telephones User s Guide 555 630 126 Single Line Telephones User s Guide System Operator Support 555 630 134 MLX Direct Line Consoles Operator s Guide 555 630 132 Analog Direct Line Consoles Operator s Guide 555 630 136 MLX Queued Call Console Operator s Guide 555 630 138 MDC 9000 and MDW 900 Telephones User s Guide Miscellaneous User Support 555 630 130 Calling Group Supervisor s Guide 555 630 129 Data User s Guide xxiv Installation How to Comment on This Document LCLC t CSCU C C C How to Comment on This Document We welcome your comments both good and bad Please use the feedback form on the next page to let us know how we can continue to serve you If the feedback form is missing write directly to Documentation Manager AT amp T 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 Installation xxv How to Comment on This Document xxvi Installation
120. 386 with 6 MB of RAM and a 120 MB hard disk For a multi site system an NCR 3332 PC 66 MHz 486 with 16 MB of RAM and a 340 MB hard disk MS DOS 5 0 or higher Windows 3 1 or later VGA color monitor Bus mouse For a single site system a 525 MB tape drive For a multi site system a 120 MB tape drive Okidata Microline 184T dot matrix or OL830 laser parallel printer For communications using CAS for Windows the following components are recommended For a single site system one parallel port and two built in serial ports DB9 for direct switch connection and DB25 for other connections For a multi site system one parallel port and a four port Equinox Mark IV board with four RJ45 connections for direct switch hookup For remote diagnostics a Remote Maintenance Board If a modem is used an AT amp T COMSPHERE 3830 or compatible If you are using the 9 pin port on your PC for the direct switch connection you need a DB9 to modular adapter An RJ45 modular cable to connect the PC s COM1 port with the control unit s SMDR port 8 6 Installing Applications Call Accounting Terminal A summary of the installation procedure is provided below 1 Connect the hardware See Connecting a PC to the Control Unit in Chapter 5 2 Complete the CAS worksheets Make sure that they show all information you need on telephone lines and extensions calling patterns and processing options and departments and personnel 3 Load and
121. 5 V AC Frequency 60 Hz 5 Maximum current 3 amps per power supply Power consumption 225 watts per power supply AC Outlet Tests If the AC outlet tests indicate that any of the power requirements in Table 2 2 are not met your customer must contact a licensed electrician Do not install the system until all requirements are met If the AC outlet tests reveal any of the following conditions they must be corrected before you install the system m Open ground m Hot and neutral reversed m Open hot m Open neutral m Hot and ground reversed A WARNING Hazardous voltages are present during the following tests Follow all instructions carefully when working with AC power line voltages Using an Ideal 61 035 Circuit Tester or Equivalent 1 Plug the circuit tester into the outlet that you want to test 2 8 Installing the Control Unit AC Power and Grounding If the circuit is properly grounded the ye low and white lights on the tester turn on 2 Unplug the circuit tester Using a Volt Ohm Milliammeter VOM 1 Set the VOM to the lowest scale on which you can read 130 V AC 2 Measure the AC outlet voltages See Figure 2 2 m Phase to ground should be 110 to 125 V AC m Neutral to ground should be less than 1 V AC m Phase to neutral should be 110 to 125 V AC 110 125 Volts AC Phase Ground Less than 1 0 Volt AC 110 125 Volts AC Figure 2 2 Measuring the AC Outlet Voltages A WARNING If th
122. 54 or less auxiliary power is required Continue to Step 8 NOTE Empty slots are not permitted between modules B 6 Installation Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 8 Calculate the unit loads for slots 5 and 6 of the carrier Qty x Unit Load Total rf Hybrid PBX or Equipment Modified Square Network Access Lines DS1 0 0 0 0 GS LS 0 0 0 0 Tie 1 4 1 4 Telephones MLX 10 0 9 1 2 MLX 10D 0 9 1 2 MLX 28D 1 2 1 7 MLX 20L 1 1 1 6 BIS 10 0 9 1 1 BIS 22 1 0 1 3 BIS 22D 1 0 1 3 BIS 34 1 1 1 5 BIS 34D 1 1 1 5 MLC 5 0 0 0 0 MDC 9000 0 0 0 0 MDW 9000 0 0 0 0 10 Button Basic 0 9 1 1 10 Button HFAI 1 0 1 2 34 Button Basic 0 9 1 1 34 Button DLX 1 2 1 7 34 Button BIS 1 2 1 4 34 Button BIS DIS 1 2 1 4 Single Line Telephone 0 6 0 7 Continued Unit loads are computed per trunk for trunk type network access lines Installation B 7 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet Qty x Unit Load Total Hybrid PBX or Modified Square Equipment Optional Equipment Direct Station Selector General Purpose Adapter Hands Free Unit Headset Adapter t The MFM has its own individual wall power unit located at the telephone and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation Total Unit Load for Slots 5 and 6 Up to two DSSs one Dss per MLX 28D or MLX 20L console can be powered from each control unit carrier For example a 3 carrier system can have 6 system operator positions each with one DSS powered from the
123. 62 Control Unit Problems Module Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit E2 3 Specify the slot number nn 00 to 17 Slot Dial or type nn then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit 4 Select Upgrade The screen below smears for all modules except the 100D and MLX boards Slot Xxx Xx slot number entered in Step 3 Make a selection Status Demand Test For all MLX modules BchLoopback is Busy out Reset also displayed as an option on this Restore Upgrade EE screen Exit E8 The screen below appears if the module is a 100D Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 3 Make a selection Status Demand Test Busy Out Reset Restore Error Events CSU pbk Clock Exit Upgrade F10 Control Unit Problems 4 63 Module Problems T The screens below appear during the procedure Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Module Upgrade Validation of MemoryCard in Progress Module Upgrade Validation of MemoryCard Successfully Completed Exit When completed select Exit to continue 5 Select the firmware to be programmed Upgrade Slot xx aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Ver Select one aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Ver aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Ver aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Ver Exit 6 Select Yes Upgrade Slot xx Slot will be
124. 7 Connecting the 2486 Adapter and the 2012D Transformer 20 6 Connecting Data Equipment 6 1 Analog Voice and Modem Data Equipment Configuration 6 7 6 2 Modem Data Only Equipment Configuration 6 9 6 3 Modem Data and MLX Voice Equipment Configuration 6 10 6 4 MLX Voice and 7500B Data Equipment Configuration 6 5 7500B Data Only Equipment Configuration 6 6 Video Conferencing Configuration Installation xi Figures 7 Initializing and Testing the System 7 1 Ground Start Button 7 18 7 2 Installing the Control Unit Top Cover 7 21 7 3 Installing the Control Unit Front Cover 7 22 9 Upgrading the System 9 1 Removing the Control Unit Housing 9 3 9 2 Powering Down the System 9 5 9 3 Removing a Module from the Carrier 9 7 9 4 Replacing a Module in the Carrier 9 9 9 5 Removing the Processor Module Cover 9 11 9 6 Removing the Processor Module Circuit Board 9 12 9 7 Changing the Key Mode Switch Position to Closed 9 13 9 8 Installing the Control Unit Housing 9 17 EEEE SeSe A System Numbering Forms A 1 Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks A 2 A 2 Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts A 4 A 2 Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks A 5 A 4 Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers A 6 xii Installation S __ _ Tables EEE SeSe 2 4 Setting the 400EM Tie Trunk Module DIP Switches 2 35 2 5 Signaling Formats for the 400EM Tie Trunk Module 2 36
125. 88K1 retainer tool against the conductor pairs beneath the connecting block to be removed See Figure 3 401 Use pliers to grip the connecting block in the center See Figure 3 40 4 Move the block gently up and down and pull it out 5 If a conductor wire is accidentally pulled from a block pull it with the long nosed pliers to get some slack Use your fingers to lay the conductor wire back in its slot in the index strip and then reseat it with the D impact tool Seat the new connecting block by using the 788J1 impact tool 7 Replace the telephone wire onto the connecting block m f you have Interconnect Wiring remove the tag from the telephone wires and use the D impact tool to reseat the wires m If you have Systimax wiring attach the patch cord to the connecting block 3 62 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit NNS ANN a eae weenceeelnl lt L REMET TTT toate eit H 788 Ki p Pliers Retainer Tool Figure 3 40 Removing the Connecting Block Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 63 Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit 3 64 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface The way you connect the control unit to the network interface depends on the type of network interface that is installed While there are many ways you can do this the methods discussed in this chapter
126. 9000 0 0 10 Button Basic 0 9 10 Button HFAI 1 0 34 Button Basic 0 9 34 Button DLX 1 2 34 Button BIS 1 2 34 Button BIS DIS 1 2 Single Line Telephone 0 6 Continued Unit loads are computed per trunk for trunk type network access lines Maintenance and Troubleshooting C 7 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet Qty x Unit Load Equipment Hybrid PBX or Modiffied Optional Equipment Direct Station Selector General Purpose Adapter Hands Free Unit Headset Adapter Total Unit Load for Slots 5 and 6 t The MFM has its own individual wall power unit located at the telephone and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation Up to two DSSs one DSS per MLX 28D or MLX 20L console can be powered from each control unit carrier For example a 3 carrier system can have 6 system operator positions each with one DSS powered from the control unit m Ifthe unit load for slots five and six is less than or equal to 27 auxiliary power is sufficient for the carrier m lf the unit load for slots five and six is more than 27 continue to Step 9 C 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Unit Load Calculation Worksheet E 9 Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads for slots five and six through 27 Remember that the 100D 400 400 GS LS TTR 800 GS LS ID 800 and 800 GS LS modules have unit loads of 0 0 Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to recalculate unit loads for new configuration m f the e
127. 953 6912 THIS FORM MAY BE PHOTOCOPIED Introduction The purpose of maintenance is to detect report and clear problems quickly with minimal disruption of service The system attempts to isolate each problem to a single replaceable unit whenever possible by running automatic tests Errors that it cannot automatically correct are usually recorded in error logs Most troubleshooting relies on checking the error logs and interpreting them using Table 2 2 Error Codes in Chapter 2 Equipment To perform maintenance you need a maintenance terminal and some additional tools all of which are defined below Maintenance Terminal Whether you perform on site or remote maintenance you need a maintenance terminal m For on site maintenance you can use either an MLX 20L console or a PC with System Programming and Maintenance SPM software m For remote maintenance you must use a PC with SPM software Introduction 1 1 Equipment Detailed information about system programming is included in System Programming and in System Programming and Maintenance SPM You can use either a DOS PC or a Master Controller MCII or MCIII To connect a PC to the control unit you need a 355AF adapter and a D8W 87 cord NOTE On site programming maintenance is preferred if it is feasible remote programming overrides on site programming except when on site backup or restore is in progress See On Site Programming Maintenance and
128. AC Power Input Attach KEN an f Ferrite Cores wong Grounding Screw Open Position ao Feed AC Power Cord and Ground Wire through Wire Manager Wire Manager Figure 2 7 Installing the Ferrite Cores 2 24 Installing the Control Unit lasses the aurian Power Unit Installing the Auxiliary Power Unit The Control Unit Diagram on the back of Form 1 System Planning indicates whether an auxiliary power unit is required for the carrier that you are installing NOTE Use the 9024 auxiliary power unit for new installations You can continue to use a previously installed 335A auxiliary power unit as long as no new telephones or modules are added to the carrier To install an auxiliary power unit follow the steps below Refer to Figure 2 8 throughout this procedure 1 Turn off the switch on the power supply 2 Mount the auxiliary power unit on a surface preferably the backboard within 2 ft 61 cm of the control unit 3 Plug the power unit line cord into the AUX POWER INPUT jack on the power supply 4 Plug the other end of the line cord into the AUX POWER jack on the auxiliary power unit A CAUTION Do not plug the power supply or the auxiliary power unit into the AC outlet until you are ready to turn on the system as described in Powering Up the System later in this chapter If the system is backed up by an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS connect the auxiliary power to the UPS Do not attach the
129. Busied Out Xx slot number entered in Step 3 Line 2 displays the firmware version currently installed on the module Lines 4 5 and 6 display firmware F7 versions available on the memory F8 card F9 Xx slot number entered in Step 3 Do you want to continue H Yes No Exit 4 64 Control Unit Problems Module Problems If the firmware selected provides functionality that is different from the circuit module s current firmware the Maintenance display indicates that a Board Renumber will be required once the installation is complete Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Upgrade Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 3 Slot will be Busied Out Renum board when done Do you want to continue Yes No Exit If the module Busy Out is blocked by an active line or extension the following screen appears 7 Choose to wait for the module to busy out or reset the module Slot xx in Use Xx slot number entered in Step 3 Make a Selection MM Continue Busy Out Continue Busy Out does not intrrupt Ma Reset calls in progress but Reset does E1 E2 8 Observe the status screen below See the next section Error Conditions During Firmware Upgrade if error messages appear Upgrade Slot xx In Progress xx Completed Control Unit Problems 4 65 Module Problems TC EEhrhrlrlrlrlrlrlrlrmrmrrr One of the following screens appears when the upgrade has successfull
130. C 1 Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module 2 Select the System menu System Programming gt Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables LinesTrunks AuxEquip Exit Night Srvce F1 3 Select Back Restore System Make a selection Restart MaintenBusy SProg Port Date Mode Ti me Board Renum Back Restore EN Exit F9 4 Select Restore Memory Card Make a selection Backup Restore Auto Backup Exit F2 D 20 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 5 Select the restore file Memory Card Restore mmdd month and day of backup Select one BACK1 mmdd AUTO BACK1 BACK2 mmdd AUTO BACK2 BACK3 mndd Press the button or function key Exit next to your selection 6 Observe the restore file validation screen Memory Card Restore File is being validated 7 Respond to the prompt Restore n System will be down Do you want to continue n filename selected in Step 5 mm Yes Select Yes to continue the restore F3 me No Select No to abort the restore Go Exit back to Step 5 F2 8 Observe the restore progress screen Restore n n filename selected in Step 5 Restore in Progress Please Wait Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 21 Backing Up with a Memory Card Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 9
131. Codes for012 Modules 4 5 4 2 Codes Displayed on the Error Status Display During Forced Installation of System Software 4 25 4 4 Board Controller Test Errors 4 53 4 3 Internal Loopback Test Errors 4 49 4 5 Channel Loopback Errors 4 57 4 6 Internal Loopback Test Errors 4 79 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ix E _OO O O O O O O O O O O O O C C C C C Tables 5 Central Office Problems 5 1 Troubleshooting Trunk Symptoms 5 2 x Maintenance and Troubleshooting Safety The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS When installing telephone equipment always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire electrical shock and injury to persons including Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install a telephone jack in a wet location unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Use only AT amp T manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Communications System circui
132. Conferencing Data Stations rh Video Conferencing Data Stations You can use the 7500B data module with a Multipurpose Enhancement Board for synchronous data communication This type of station allows data transmission at speeds of 56 or 64 kbps This section is only a guideline for connecting video conferencing equipment to the system For additional information refer to the documentation packaged with the video codec Also for instructions on using the Multipurpose Enhancement Board or for additional information on setting up the 75006 data module see the documentation packaged with the 75006 data module You need the following hardware m 008 MLX module or 408 GS LS MLX module and a 100D module in the control unit ACCULINK 3150 CSU E Two 7500B data modules with two 7500B data module feature package 2 upgrades user manuals included Two Multipurpose Enhancement Boards install one of these in each 7500B data module for synchronous communication and an RS 366 Automatic Calling Unit ACU interface Two WP901 10 L7 power supplies one per stand alone 7500B Two 440A4 terminating resisting adapters Z77A multiple mounting mounting for multiple 7500B data modules PictureTel video codec unit Two Shore Microsystems SM 100EIA 232 V 35 converters or equivalent 6 16 Connecting Data Equipment Video seian Data Stations m Cables Two male male EIA 232 D cables 8 ft 24 m to connect the PORT 1 connector
133. E WINK If problem persists troubleshoot the tie Outbound dialing problems on tie trunk configuration Troubleshoot the far trunks For a tie trunk with delay dial or end to see if it is working and translated wink start the far end of the network properly Troubleshoot for faulty cable interface went on hook before the Replace the module handshake was completed Continued on next page Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 15 Error Logs E e Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description 8405 ON HOOK BEFORE READY Outbound dialing problems on tie trunks For a tie trunk with delay dial or wink start the far end of the network interface went on hook before the guard time elapsed 8406 INTERDIGIT TOO SHORT Inbound dialing problems on tie and DID trunks 8407 BAD UPDATE communication problems occurred between the processor and the modules Module may need to be replaced 8408 ROTARY RATE gt 12PPS Inbound dialing problems on tie and DID trunks 8409 ROTARY RATE lt 8PPS Inbound dialing problems on tie and DID trunks 840A BAD DOWNLINK MESSAGE Communication problems occurred between the processor and the modules The module received an unrecognized message from the processor Action Troubleshoot the far end of the network interface to see whether it is working and translated properly Troubleshoot for wink Start and faulty cable Troubleshoot the far end of the network Replace the modul
134. IP 8 Off Open off Closed on Applications Printer DIP Switch Settings For the Applications Printer the only DIP switch setting is the control switch Set all control switch DIP switches 1 through 8 to Off open Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 25 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit O lt 5 26 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting Data Equipment This chapter explains how to set up data stations A data station sends and or receives data If the data station includes a telephone the station can also send and receive voice If the system includes both modem and 7500B data stations that need to communicate with each other then you need to set up a modem pool for those data stations Modem pools are described in the applications note entitled MERLIN LEGEND Communication System Modem Pooling Data Stations A data station is a combination of equipment that can include a telephone and a PC printer optical scanner or fax machine If the data station is connected to a tip ring analog or MLX extension jack for data communications over analog trunks it requires a modem to convert the signal from digital to analog or from analog to digital If however the data station is connected to an MLX extension jack for data communications over a DS1 Digital Signal Level 1 Primary Rate Interface PRI facility it requires an ISDN 750013 Data Module inst
135. IS 10 BIS 22 BIS 22D BIS 34 BIS 34D MLC 5 MDC 9000 MDCW 9000 10 Button Basic 10 Button HFAI 34 Button Basic 34 Button DLX 34 Button BIS 34 Button BIS DIS Single Line Telephone Continued Unit loads are computed per trunk for trunk type network access lines B 4 Installation Unit Load Calculation Worksheet Unit Load Optional Equipment Direct Station Selectort General Purpose Adapter Hands Free Unit Headset Adapter Total Actual Unit Load t The MFM has its own wall power unit located at the telephone and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation Up to two DSSs one DSS per MLX 28D or MLX 20L console can be powered from each control unit carrier For example a 3 carrier system can have 6 system operator positions each with one DSS powered from the control unit m If the total actual unit load is less than or al to 54 auxiliary power is not required m If the total actual unit load is greater than 54 continue to Step 7 Installation B 5 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 7 Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads to 54 Remember that the 100D 400 400 GS LS TTR 800 GS LS ID 800 and 800 GS LS modules have unit loads of 0 0 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to recalculate unit loads for the new configuration m If the exchange reduces the unit load to 54 or less auxiliary power is not required m f the exchange does not reduce the unit load to
136. Instructions Additional Information PC Restore n n filename selected Change Sys Programming XXXX system programming port Port to Extension xxxx extension before Restoring Exit The system programming port is not set to the same system programming port as that set in the backup file The restore is aborted Use the Inspect feature to view the port of the file on the card Change the system programming port to match the port shown on the card see System Programming Position Assignment in System Programming or System Programming Summary and repeat the restore procedure Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 23 Backing Up with a Memory Card SSSS _ _ _ amp 5S CC Release Mismatch Restore n File is Not Compatible for Release X Y Restore Canceled Conversion Required n filename selected X Y release number Exit This screen only appears if you are upgrading from Release 3 0 or higher and the releases are not compatible Card Failure Console Display instructions Additional Information PC Memory Card Restore Restore Failure Try a different file or a new Memory Card If the restore fails because the card is damaged the system performs a System Erase frigid start Repeat the restore procedure using a different file and or memory card Card Failure after Confirmation Restore x X filename s
137. Instructions Additional Information PC 5 Select Yes Slot 00 System Erase System will be down Do you want to continue Yes No Exit F2 System Erase Full default Restarting Forced Installation of System Software A CAUTION Forced installation should only be performed under emergency situations in which on board system software has been corrupted All existing system programming will be erased by this procedure Beginning with Release 3 0 the system software can be installed or upgraded through the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module If system software becomes corrupted attempt to reinstall software with a Forced Installation memory card If that does not solve the problem replace the processor module Control Unit Problems 4 19 Processor Problems Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance System gt Upgrd Instll Exit Exit Yes PC Procedure F6 F1 F5 F2 1 Backup system programming To back up system programming onto a floppy disk see System Programming maintenance SPM To back up onto a memory card see If the processor or system software is not working you may not be able to back up system programming If the system has been programmed to perform automatic backups use the latest backup file to restore programming See Step 12 2 Insert a Forced Installation memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module See Figure 4 4 4 20 Control Unit Proble
138. Inventory Access Log Exit F1 Control Unit Problems 4 87 Checking System and Slot Status Interpreting the System Status Screen Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC System Status Slot00 R aaa Slot01 R aaa Y aaa G aaa Slot02 R aaa Y aaa G aaa Slot03 R aaa Y aaa G aaa Slot04 R aaa Y aaa G aaa R aaa status On Off No of red LED Y aaa status On Off No of yellow LED G aaa status On Off No of green LED Exit The System Status screen simulates LEDs for each module The simulated LEDs are represented as R red Y yellow and G green Immediately following R Y orG is its status aaa in the screens shown above which can be On Off or No status an empty slot in the control unit Red LED When the red LED is on the module is not in service because it is in standby mode being tested or is in an alarm condition When a module resumes normal operations the red LED turns off Yellow LED When the yellow LED is on it usually means that at least one call is in progress on that module This is usually true for modules with trunks When this is the status you must reset the board if you want to terminate any calls in progress rather than waiting for them to terminate during a Busy Out Green LED The green LED is usually off It may be on during power up or when an Internal Loopback or CSU Loopback Test is running Sample LED Display Slot 4 If a call is in progress on a modu
139. N LEGEND control unit E Up to four individual display units which can be mounted on analog multiline telephones or wall mounted for both analog and MLX telephones E An administrative keyboard Optional equipment includes an administrative display a PC and a serial printer For detailed instructions see MERLIN Identifier Installation and Administration When MERLIN Identifier is used with MLX telephones a pair of installer wired 104A termination outlets are required for each MLX set that is connected to a MERLIN Identifier display unit Modems You can connect a modem to one of the following m Single line telephone m MLX telephone with an MFM m GPA and analog multiline telephone 3 34 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts NOTE When a modem is connected to the TEL OTHER jack on the MLX telephone equipped with an MFM data calls can be made from the modem independently of the MLX telephone Users dial data calls from the data terminal keyboard See Chapter 6 Connecting Data Equipment for complete information on connecting data equipment Music On Hold and Magic on Hold You can connect a Music On Hold device to an LS or GS line trunk jack programmed for Music On Hold The system supports one such connection either Magic on Holdor a customer owned music source The external music coupler PEC 61398 uses an 8 ohm music source and two attenuation controls for setting the music level N
140. NTROL UNIT jack on the SAA 3 38 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts TO O Supplemental Alert Adapter CONTROL TELEPHONE UNIT ALERTER ON OFF C E i f a E Teleph elephone comrance i Wall Jack E a iE a AE a m eemo MM m train Alerter m noon ER om tee Figure 3 27 Installing the Supplemental Alert Adapter Unsupported Telephones Adjuncts and Adapters Do not connect the following analog telephone adjuncts and adapters to the system Doing so may cause damage to the device or the system E Basic Telephone and Modem Interface BTMI E Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2 BTMI 2 m ATR Interface ATRI Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 39 Installing Adjuncts EEE m MTR Interface MTRI m Off Premises Extension Unit OPX m System 25 Direct Extension Selector DXS See Table 3 1 for additional notes on unsupported telephones and adjuncts Table 3 1 Unsupported Telephones and Adjuncts Model Notes 51013 Personal Terminals Digital Communications Protocol DCP DCP telephones 7400 telephones and adjuncts asynchronous data units and multiple asynchronous data units that use DCP and are supported on the MERLIN II Communications System MET telephones Multibutton electronic telephones METs and adjuncts used with the Dimension PBX and Horizon systems Single line telephones with Message light does not work neon message waiting lights Analog telephone ad
141. OTES 1 PagePac Plus equipment can be used with a loudspeaker system to provide music Or it can provide paging without a music coupler 2 If the equipment uses rebroadcasted music or other copyrighted materials the customer is required to obtain a copyright release and may also require a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI To bypass the release and license requirement the customer can purchase a Magic on Hold system from AT amp T which does not require such a license Figures 3 25 and show different background music configurations with single zone and multizone paging Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 35 Installing Adjuncts PAGEPAC 20 OUTPUTS PAGING INPUT MUSIC VAC CJ Speaker Connection D4BU Block Cord Control 12345678 Connection Block Model PAM CC405258013 ACCESS MODE Set the AUOT MANUAL Access Mc switch to MANUAL D4BU Cord Standard Phono Patch Cord Music Coupler CC405476452 KS 23395 L 2 Figure 3 25 Single Zone Paging with Background Music and Magic on Hold 3 36 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts PAGEPAC PLUS N VIU 2 PAGE INPUT AmpliCenter D4BU Cord 5 Controller f Pn PAGE INPUT Br J40 bist ka E Zone ii ii Expansio
142. Problems EE Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Specify the slot number nn 00 to 17 Slot Dial or type nn then press Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit Enter 3 Select Demand Test Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Make a selection Status Demand Test For all MLX modules BchLoopback is Busy out Reset also displayed as an option on this Restore Upgrade screen For 100D modules CSU I pbk Error Events and Clock are also Exit displayed as options on this screen E5 4 Select Internal Loopback Test Demand Test Slot xx Make a selection Note Busy out slot first BoardCntrir E ntLoopback Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Exit E3 5 To run the test once or run it repeatedly select Test Once or Repetitive Demand Test Slot xxi xx slot number entered in Step 2 Board aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Internal Loopback EE Test Once MM Repetitive Select Test Once or Repetitive Bs Exit Control Unit Problems 4 47 Module Problems The screen below appears while the test is running At the same time if the module has a green LED it flashes Console Display Instructions Demand Test Slot xx Board aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Internal in Progress Loopback Test Additional Information PC Xx slot number entered in Step 2 If you are running the repetitive test the screen remains until the test fails To interrupt r
143. Processor Press the More button to review Hardware Vintage Xx information for each subsequent slot LEGEND 3 0 Vx x When you reach the display for the XXXXXXXXXXX last slot pressing the More button Exit redisplays the slot 00 information PgUp Reviewing the Screen Lines 4 5 and 6 indicate information that maybe asked of you when you call your technical support organization m Line 4 the hardware vintage indicates the revision level of the processor board s firmware m Line 5 indicates the release number for the system software followed by the official software version number m Line 6 indicates the revision levels of the ROM pairs on the processor board Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 21 System Inventory Ta The screen below displays information for slots other than Slot 00 Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC System Inventory Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Slot xx Board boardname Press the More button to review Hardware Vintage vv information for each subsequent slot Firmware Vintage vv When you reach the display for the last slot pressing the More button Exit redisplays the Slot 00 information PgUp Phantom Modules If the system includes a phantom module an empty slot that has been programmed the System Inventory screen does not recognize it When replacing or adding modules make sure phantom module slots remain empty and that no modules are installed to t
144. RE OF THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SET FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY ABOVE Voice Mail Systems Your voice mail system permits callers to leave verbal messages for system users or gain access to the backup position in an emergency as well as create and distribute voice messages among system users The voice mail system through proper administration can help you reduce the risk of unauthorized persons gaining access to the network However phone numbers and authorization codes can be compromised when overheard in a public location are lost through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information or through carelessness writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding them Additionally hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the information to other hackers Substantial charges can accumulate quickly It is your responsibility to take appropriate steps to implement the features Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 15 Customer Support Information A properly evaluate and administer the various restriction levels protect and carefully distribute access codes Under applicable tariffs you will be responsible for payment of toll charges AT amp T cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit resulting from unauthorized access To reduce the risk of unauthorized access through your voice mail system please observe the following procedures m Employees
145. RESTORE IS CANCELED Restore File Mode is Hybrid PBX Control Unit strap in place for KEY Exit A CAUTION This procedure should be performed only by qualified service personnel If the processor module has been strapped for Permanent Key mode a restore to Hybrid PBX mode is not possible See chapter 9 in the Installation Guide for details on modifying the processor D 26 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Modifying a Release 2 1 or Earlier Processor for Key Mode Release 2 1 and Earlier A CAUTION This procedure must be performed for KF registration with the FCC This procedure prevents the system from being programmed as a Hybrid PBX system Do this only if the system is programmed for Key mode and GS trunks are not indicated on Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks To modify the processor for Permenant Key mode follow the steps below Refer to 1 Remove the processor from its packaging Place the processor on a flat surface 3 If the feature module is installed remove it See Replacing the Feature Module in Chapter 4 for instructions Maintenance and Troubleshooting E 1 Modifying a Release 2 1 or Earlier Processor for Key Mode od en qo sam aiii i a lt i zui ii _ 3 AS touch HDR3 Figure E 1 Modifying the Processor for Key Mode A CAUTION Do not touch the HDR3 header on the processor board the header is exposed when the feature module is not instal
146. SS auxiliary power requirements wiring 3 46 connection diagram 3 430 procedure 3 43 3 48 considerations 3 43 installation testing DOS based products supported 8 2 DSS Direct Station Selector see Direct Station Selector DSS Dual tone multifrequency DTMF signaling E Electrical noise 2 3 Environmental rea Ferrite core installation Forms adjunct installation 1 3 control unit installation data equipment connection network interface connection telephone installation Frigid start 7 4 0 Front cover G General Purpose Adapter GPA Ground start GS button Ground start trunk testing Th e eoo Ground AC 2 10 central office 211 o Group calling delay announcement device 3 22 13 24 8 26 _ Group Calling feature testing 7 13 17 14 Installation IN 3 Index H Hardware supported 8 1 8 2 Headsets 3 27 Balea 3 290 Housing installation 9 17 removing 9 3 9 6 O replacing clips 9 7 9 10 I In Range Out of Building IROB protector 3 59 Initializing the system programming disk 7 2 z Translation memory card Installation summary of tasks 1 1 1 2 o system forms and1 2 1 4 _ _ Integrated Solution Ill IS hardware_requiremen overview 8 13 procedure UNIX System based products mo aba eee Integrated Voice R
147. XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Exit 100D Module Clock Status If you have not been trained to perform T1 maintenance contact your technical support organization for instructions on using this procedure Summary Console Procedure Menu Mai ntenance Slot Dial slot no gt Enter xClock Exit PC Procedure E6 gt E2 Type slot no gt E10 gt F9 F5 Control Unit Problems 4 83 100D Module Problems Console Display Instructions Slot Port Exit Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System 2 Specify the 2 digit slot number nn 00 to 17 Slot Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit 3 Select Clock Slot xx Make a selection Status Demand Test Busy out Reset Restore Error Events CSU I pbk Clock Exit Upgrade 4 84 Control Unit Problems F2 Dial or type nn then select Enter F10 Xx slot number in Step 2 CSU I pbk andError Events are displayed only for the 100D module F9 Carrier Problems LS Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 4 Ifyou need assistance in interpreting the information displayed on the screen contact your technical support Clock Slot xx mm dd yy hh 00 hh mm Admin as Active synch source PPM xxx Exit Carrier Problems Typical carrier problems include power supply failure sudden failure of one or more modules or system
148. Z200A EMI cable to the PRINTER jack of the CAT m D8W cord and 355AF adapter connecting the SMDR port on the communications system to the SMDR jack of the CAT A summary of the installation procedure is provided below 1 Before connecting the CAT set the 10 CAT switches to establish the speed or baud rate for the CAT and its associated printer 2 Connect the control unit CAT printer and power supply See Chapter 5 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit Do not use an outlet that is controlled by a wall switch 3 Test the CAT Plus following the instructions provided in the documentation packaged with the application 8 8 Installing Applications Call Management System CAT Documentation Call Accounting Terminal CAT Plus V3 for Business Installation and Use Call Accounting Terminal CAT Plus V3 for Hospitality Installation and Use Call Management System Call Management System CMS is a DOS based software application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering calls and distributing them to individual telephones Considerations You cannot connect a CMS in Behind Switch mode If a business requires more than 28 lines or employs more than 28 agents you can install up to two CMSs on a system to handle a second set of lines CMS operates on a dedicated PC with DOS version 3 3 or higher The CMS supervisor s console is a Direct Line Console CMS agents can use any MLX or analog multiline telep
149. Z3A2ADU S i z LP i Nt j ADU Crossover Cable Control Unit 400B2 e D6AP 20120 50M 4 Pair Plug Adapter Transformer AC Outlet Ended Cable ar o a Direct Connection Wall Jack BR1A 4P Adapter 102 Connecting Block Buildi r Wiring 103 Connecting Block DIW Wall 102 or 103 Jack Connecting Block D8W EIA 232 D D8W K i A E N AT b 7 T Cable Joints Figure 5 2 Connecting a PC More Than 50 ft 15 2 m Away 10 On the PC side plug one end of a D8W cord into a wall jack and the other end into the WALL jack on the Z3A2 ADU 11 Plug one end of an EIA 232 D cable into the 25 pin male connector on the Z3A2 ADU and the other end into the COM1 port on the PC 12 Plug the 2012D 50M transformer into a wall outlet 5 6 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a CAT to the Control Unit SS ao Connecting a CAT to the Control Unit The Call Accounting Terminal CAT is a stand alone unit that provides call accounting information It connects to the SMDR jack on the control unit and links the control unit to the CAT printer The connection of the CAT to the control unit depends on the distance and whether the CAT and control unit share the same AC outlet The CAT and CAT printer are connected at the same time For more information see Call Accounting Terminal in Chapter 8 a If the CAT is grounded to the same AC outlet as the control unit and the CAT and CAT pr
150. _ 4 36 o procedure 4 36 process diagram Modules replacing 4 58 5 5 5 11 N No dial tone 3 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting IN 3 Index ary 420 00 sss O Restart 1 20 ee a o 1 20 Restore A 5 20 sd Outgoing trunk 5 3 extension P Peek 4 12 Permanent error 2 Phantom modules Single line telephone 3 5 Poke 4 15 4 Slot status Port menu information provided 4 89 Power re procedure auxiliary power mite ey ___ summary interlocking post 4 2 4 3 Software installation LED 43 iti replacing Powering ae Processor module checking problems 4 12 replacing Remote equipment setting up 1 7 Reset modem 5 22 5 overview 4 37 4 38 procedure 4 40 4 42 _ __ RS 232 port 5 20 5 22 IN 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Index ee Trunk T Telephone problems analog multiline 3 4 lt Call Forwarding 3 5 3 6 determining cause 1 23 voice transmission wiring 3 3 Test automatic 4 81 B channel Loopback 4 54 4 57 board controller 4 50 4 53 CSU Loopback 4 71 4 80 o Toll fraud 1 6 U Unit loads 1 27 1 28 OSS O Upgrade memory card inserting V Top cover Release 2 0 or oaie Si 538 Voice messaging failure to transfer Release 2 1 or later 5 30 Voice transmission fue to tanster e8 Tou
151. a DOS based software application that allows you to use a PC to program and maintain the system SPM performs the same functions as an MLX 20L telephone used as a system programming console and has some additional features such as the ability to back up and restore files and print reports The PC display shows the same button and screen layout as an MLX 20L telephone Considerations SPM operates with DOS version 3 3 or later Unless the system is being backed up or restored a remote user takes priority over a local user If the local user is programming when a remote user connects to the system the system sends a message to the local user that a remote connection has been made and disconnects the local user The PC with SPM connects to the EIA 232 D ADMIN jack on the processor of the control unit The EIA 232 D baud rate is 1200 2400 bps with autobaud adjust A printer connected to the PC with SPM can print system programming reports Reports can also be sent to the printer that is connected to the SMDR port on the control unit However SMDR information may be lost while system programming reports are printed through the SMDR jack A UNIX System based version of System Programming and Maintenance is available as part of Integrated Solution Ill as discussed earlier in this chapter 8 24 Installing Applications System Programming and Maintenance SPM TF A i i Hardware Requirements The following hardware is required m An ap
152. a stations that are outside the system The system supports the following types of data stations connected to 7500B modules MLX Voice and 7500B Data This station includes a 7500B data module data terminal and an MLX telephone 7500B Data Only This station includes a 7500B data module data terminal and no telephone For your customer s specifications see Extension Jacks and Then refer to the appropriate section later in this chapter for instructions on setting up 7500B data stations NOTE A video conferencing data station is a synchronous 7500B data station Refer to Video Conferencing Data Stations for more information 6 4 Connecting Data Equipment Analog Voice and Modem Data Stations Analog Voice and Modem Data Stations Figure 6 1 shows the equipment configuration for an analog voice and modem data station GPA Settings The switch on the back of the General Purpose Adapter GPA used in Step 4 provides two settings Automatic and Basic Join is not used Use the Basic setting to m Originate modem calls m Originate telephone calls while using the modem When the GPA is connected to an analog multiline telephone and configured using the Automatic setting you can E Answer calls if this is the case an Auto Answer All button must be programmed so that calls can be answered automatically E Make and receive calls on the telephone while using the modem The speakerphone must not be used
153. able 3 2 below If any of these tests fail replace the MLX telephone Test the Multi Function Module MFM if present a Connect a single line telephone to the MFM b Pick up the handset on the single line telephone c When you hear the system access or intercom dial tone dial 09 from the single line telephone This connects the diagnostic test tone to the B channel d Dial 123456789 0 wait for silence and then quickly press the Recall button to perform a switchhook flash You should hear a confirmation tone three beeps e Hang up You should hear a ring burst and the Message LED should turn on f Dial 54 to turn off the Message LED and resume normal operations Telephone Problems 3 7 System Requirements for Touch Tone Receivers 11 If these tests fail replace the MFM Table 3 2 MLX Telephone Display Buttons Button Display Home HOME Menu MENU More MORE Inspect INSPECT Each unlabeled display button DISPLAY BUTTON nn where nnis 1 10 depending on which button you press System Requirements for Touch Tone Receivers The following symptoms indicate that the system needs more touch tone receivers TTRs m Single line telephone users do not get dial tone when they lift the handset to dial out m The voice messaging system fails to transfer calls m Calls ail to ring or go to coverage prematurely NOTE If these symptoms are present use the following steps to calculate the system requirements for tou
154. ach carrier by pulling the bottom front towards you and lifting it up as shown in Remove the top from each carrier in the system by pushing it straight up from the front Do not discard the housing unless new housing is provided You will reassemble the housing when installation is complete m For a MERLIN LEGEND Release 2 0 or earlier Communications System 1 5 From both sides of the control unit pry the clips free from the housing using a screwdriver if they are difficult to reach Carefully pull the housing towards you If the system has more than one carrier make sure you remove the housing only from the basic carrier side otherwise the housing may disassemble If the housing clips need to be replaced follow the procedure in Replacing the Housing Clips Discard the housing only if upgraded housing has been provided 9 2 Upgrading the System Removing the Control Unit Housing MERLIN II and MERLIN LEGEND 2 1 and later Communications System MERLIN LEGEND 2 0 and earlier Communications System Housing z o cip y Housing Figure 9 1 Removing the Control Unit Housing Upgrading the System 9 3 mene Down the System Powering Down the System You may need to power down the system to add upgraded equipment to the carrier A CAUTION Follow these steps in the exact sequence To power down the system follow the steps below and see 1 Turn off the po
155. additional AC outlets u Ifa printer or PC is installed on the system it must be plugged into the same AC branch as the power supply of the basic carrier If the printer or PC is 50 ft 15 m or more from the control unit or is plugged into a different AC circuit Asynchronous Data Units ADUs must be installed as well Printer includes complete installation instructions Em The AC power requirements indicated in AC Outlet Tests below must be met 2 6 Installing the Control Unit AC Power and Grounding From AC SR E Aee E a Load Center 77777777777777 2 separately fused 15A Ground Wire circuits 14 AWG 4 Box RACO 230 or equivalent HUBBELL Receptacles 5262 15A or equivalent 4 Cover RACO 807 or equivalent Single Poi Ground Ground Bar Mounted on a 4 Box Square D PK9GTA or approved equivalent Ground Wire 6 AWG Copper Approved Building Ground 12 or 14 AWG Copper Wire to Each Power Supply Grounding Screw Figure 2 1 AC Grounding Requirements A CAUTION The AC outlet for the control unit cannot be switch controlled Hugging the control unit into such an outlet invites accidental disconnection of the system The AC outlet must be properly wired as described in AC Outlet Tests Installing the Control Unit 2 7 AC Power and Grounding Table 2 2 AC Power Requirements Parameter Value Nominal voltage 117VAC Voltage range 110 12
156. adiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Num rique n met pas de bruits radioelectriques d passant les limites applicable aux appareils num riques de la class A prescribes dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique edict par le minist re des Communications du Canada A 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Customer Support Information SSS FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C RJ14C RJ21X Connection to E amp Mtie trunks requires a USOC RJ2GX Connection to off premises extensions requires a USOC RJ11C or RJ14C Connection to 1 544 Mbps digital facilities mus
157. ae Processor Module Figure 1 2 Setting Up the PC Introduction 1 5 Remote Programming Maintenance Remote Programming Maintenance Remote maintenance allows you to support the system from an off premises location You can check error logs and system status and restart the system remotely To perform remote maintenance you need a PC with SPM software a tip ring telephone and a 1200 bps modem Beginning with Release 3 0 a 2400 bps modem may also be used Considerations Review the following points before you begin remote maintenance procedures E Remote maintenance overrides on site maintenance and programming except when on site backup or restore is in progress Before you perform remote maintenance notify the customer s system manager You can perform remote maintenance and programming only from a DOS PC not from the UNIX environment If you are running SPM under IS Ill you cannot perform remote maintenance m Line noise can cause the SPM screen to display unpredictable results If this occurs hang up and redial NOTE Under applicable tariffs the customer is responsible for any charges incurred through the remote use of system facilities Precautions should be taken to prevent unauthorized use of the system s outside lines by remote callers also called toll fraud See Appendix A Customer Support Information for more information on security 1 6 Introduction Remote Programming M
158. ails to Erase Upgrade Slot xx xx slot selected in Step 3 Memory on motile will not erase Upgrade CANCELED Upgrade INCOMPLETE Exit Repeat the upgrade procedure If the upgrade continues to fail after several attempts the module should be replaced See Replacing the Module Control Unit Problems 4 69 100D Module Problems Upgrade Attempted on an Empty Slot Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Upgrade Slot xx XX slot selected in Step 3 No module in slot Exit Select Exit and repeat the upgrade procedure being careful to select the correct slot Board Memory Programming Failure Upgrade Slot xx xx slot selected in Step 3 Board Memory Programming Failure Upgrade CANCELED Upgrade INCOMPLETE Exit Repeat the upgrade procedure If the upgrade continues to fail after several attempts the module should be replaced See Replacing the Module 100D Module Problems The 100D module requires the CSU Loopback Test in addition to the other module tests See Figure 4 6 for a diagram of the entire module testing process If you have any questions about the 100D module that this section does not cover contact your technical support organization 4 70 Control Unit Problems 100D Module Problems Error Events In addition to checking the error logs the 100D module requires that you check the error events specific to the 100D module See Error
159. aintenance E C mmmmmtt COCO CS Setting Up Equipment for Remote Maintenance To setup equipment for remote maintenance follow the steps below while referring to Figure 1 3 and to nstallation 1 Connect the PC and modem m f you have an external modem use an EIA 232 D cable m f you have an internal modem the connection is already established 2 Use a D8W cord to connect the modem to a T R trunk jack 3 Use aD8W cord to connect the modem to a T R telephone T R jack D8W cord PHONE jack EXTERNAL MODEM D8W cord T R telephone Figure 1 3 External Modem Setup Introduction 1 7 Using SPM E Using SPM For more information on using SPM see System Programming and Maintenance Starting SPM The procedure for accessing SPM differs slightly depending on whether your PC is connected directly or by modem to the control unit With a Direct Local Connection To access SPM when your PC is connected directly to the control unit follow the steps below 1 If you do not have a hard drive insert the SPM diskette into Drive A and switch to Drive A if it is not already the current drive 2 Start the SPM program Type SPM The SPM Welcome screen appears as shown below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 3 Press any key Welcome to SPM If the main menu see Step 4 does The MERLIN LEGEND not appear or if the information on System Programmi ng the screen is garbl
160. al telephone You should hear a dial tone 7 18 Initializing and Testing the System Testing the System 6 If the telephone is connected to a GS trunk push the GS button attached to the telephone again 7 Dial an outside number make sure someone can answer the call 8 After the call is answered and you have verified that you have good two way communication tell the person the telephone number assigned to the outside line bridged by the PFT jack to which you are connected This is the number noted in Step 2 9 Have that person call the number after you hang up Your phone should ring after the caller completes dialing the number 10 Answer the phone and verify that you have good two way communication Hang up 11 Repeat Steps 1 through 2 and 4 through 10 to test all PFT jacks 12 Turn the power back on Follow the procedure in Powering Up the System in Chapter 2 Testing Touch Tone Receivers The 400 and 400 GS LS modules each provide four touch tone receivers TTRs The 008 OPT module 800 DID module 012 basic telephone modules and 800 GS LS ID modules each provide two TTRs To test TTRs follow the steps below 1 Pick up the handset of a touch tone single line telephone that is connected toa012 or 008 OPT module 2 Dial 04 and the 2 digit number starting with 01 of the TTR that you want to test You should hear a busy tone if the receiver is in use or a reorder tone if you misdialed or addressed a receiver no
161. alid Entries Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure PC Procedure System Manager All Not required Form 1 System Planning Weekly backup Sunday at 2 00 am Daily hhmm 00 to 23 00 to 59 Weekly dhhmm 0 to 6 00 to 23 00 to 59 No No To program daily backup Insert memory card System gt Back Restore Auto Backup Daily gt Drop Dial time Enter Exit Exit To program weekly backup Insert memory card System gt Back Restore Auto Backup gt Weel ky Drop Dial day and time Enter Exit Exit To program daily backup Insert memory card F1 gt F9 F3 gt F2 gt Alt P Type time F10 F5 F5 To program weekly backup Insert memory card F1 gt F9 F3 gt F3 gt Alt P Type day and time F10 F5 F5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 11 Backing Up with a Memory Card Procedure Automatic Backup Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module 2 Select the System menu System Programming gt Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables LinesTrunks AuxEquip Exit Ni ghtSrvce F1 3 Select Back Restore System Make a Selection Restart Mai ntenBusy SProg Port Date Mode Ti me Board Renum Back Restore i Exit F9 4 Select Auto Backup Memory Card Make a selection Backup Res
162. an Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or the customer can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require that you obtain such a license from AT amp T Hardware and Software Requirements The following hardware and software are required for CMS installation E An approved PC with 640K RAM 3 5 inch floppy disk drive and a 20 MB hard disk drive An approved monochrome or color monitor a CMS interface card with two 14 ft 4 27 m 4 pair modular plug telephone cords and one 14 ft 4 27 m DIN connector cord for connection to Digital Announcement Unit 8 10 Installing Applications Call Management System CMS software Digital Announcement Unit for CMS Parallel printer and cable to connect the printer to the PC Supervisor console MERLIN II System Display Console Agent telephones any MLX or analog multiline telephones supported by the system Two analog multiline modules 008 or 408 one to connect the two PC ports to the operator positions and one to connect the CMS supervisor console DOS version 3 3 or higher See the CMS documentation for a list of optional hardware that you can use with CMS CMS comes with a hardware installation checklist and information on installing the CMS software creating an agent directory programming lines and groups and testing and managing calls The control unit permits the connection of two CMS applications and each a
163. ance data for the previous 24 hour period 4 16 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface Installing the Channel Service Unit aaa Paradyne CS A 4 ACCULINK lt Fr Le NET EQPT NET r_e a a ca el a OK FAIL TEST SIG 00F ALRM EEr SIG 00F ALRM PDV BPV OURO UTE 20 0 E HE N H e NETWORK _ Figure 4 6 3150 Front Panel L A Quau L A EEn Qun EEN POWER AUX PORT COM PORT MODEM NETWORK L Qun Quau A Are CLASS 2 CAUTION AUX PORT OR COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN CR T1 NETWORK Figure 4 7 3150 Back Panel Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 17 Installing the Channel Service Unit 4 18 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface Installing the PC CAT or Printer Once you complete the installation procedures presented in the previous chapters you can connect a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR or Call Accounting Terminal CAT printer and a personal computer PC or a CAT and CAT printer to the system Connecting a PC to the Control Unit You can use a PC with MS DOS 3 3 or higher and SPM 3 XX for SMDR system programming or maintenance The method you use to connect the PC to the control unit depends on the distance between the hardware m If the PC is within 50 ft 15 2 m of the control unit see Connecting al PC Within 50 Feet on the following
164. and D8W telephone cords through the cord channel See Figure 3 20 3 Insert the other end of the adjunct cord into the TEL OTHER jack on the back of the MLX telephone Go to Step 7 3 22 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts To Adjunct Cord Channel D4BU Connects to TEL OTHER Jack Line Line MLX 10 Wall Mounted Telephone Figure 3 20 Routing the Cord s Through the Cord Channel 4 To connect an adjunct to a single line telephone a Connect a 26A2 bridging adapter to the telephone b Connect the cord from the adjunct to the bridging adapter c Reconnect the cord from the control unit to the bridging adapter d Go to Step 7 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 23 Installing Adjuncts ee 5 Toconnect an adjunct to an analog multiline telephone a Connect a 4 pair cord to the OTHER jack on the telephone b Connect the other end to the VT jack on a General Purpose Adapter GPA c Connect the cord from the adjunct to the TEL EQUIP jack on the GPA d Go to Step 7 Refer to General Purpose Adapter below for additional information 6 Insert the other end of the adjunct cord directly into the port for the logical ID on the 012 module as indicated on the system form Go to Step 7 7 Test the adjunct by dialing its associated extension General Purpose Adapter A General Purpose Adapter GPA lets you connect a T R device such as a single line telephone or mode
165. are 8 pin modular jacks RJ48C instead of male 15 pin D connectors Cables are shipped with the units for the CSU to Smart Jack connection Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 15 Installing the Channel Service Unit m There are no DIP switch options All options are set via software commands Access the options in the following ways Locally from the front panel Remotely using the integral 2400 bps modem The front panel of a local ACCULINK in Passthrough mode can access and option a remote CSU Locally and remotely through the COMPORT connector on the rear and a PC loaded with a Windows software package available at an extra charge from Paradyne The ACCULINK CSUs come equipped with two factory set option configurations Factory 1 Fact 1 and Factory 2 Fact 2 They leave the factory set at Fact 1 Two of the default parameters in Fact 1 are ESF B8ZS In the Fact 2 setting two of the default parameters are D4 AMI The CSUs offer a number of front panel alarms and monitor alarm conditions occurring either on the network interface or on the DTE interface If an ACCULINK CSU detects two alarm conditions at the same time it reports the higher priority alarm Alarms remain active until the alarm condition is cleared Network performance is continually monitored and maintained by internal memory registers when the network interface is configured for ESF operation The registers collect perform
166. arge ESD Remove the protective cover from the gold finger connector on the back of the power supply before inserting it into the carrier Installing the power supply can involve as many as four procedures depending on the system configuration The procedures are m Turning off all power to the control unit m Installing a copper shield m Installing the ferrite cores Installing the Control Unit 2 19 Installing the Power Supply NOTE It is not necessary to install ring generators in a new system with new012 apparatus code 517G13 or later letter modules or new 008 apparatus code 5171328 or later letter If you are upgrading or using older modules see Maintenance and Troubleshooting Turning Off the Power 1 Turn off each power supply 2 Disconnect all power cords and auxiliary units Installing a Copper Shield The added power supply in each expansion carrier can cause excessive noise in the module occupying the next slot To eliminate this noise a copper foil shield is installed over the power supply These shields and their labels are packaged in the power unit shielding kit included with the expansion carrier To install a copper shield follow the steps below Refer to Figure 2 6 throughout the procedure 1 Make sure all power is off 2 Place the power supply on a flat surface with the right side up as viewed from the front edge Wipe the module free of any dust or dirt 4 Peel the backing paper
167. at is not controlled by a wall switch Connecting Data Equipment 6 11 MLX Voice and 7500B Data Stations Ti MLX Voice and 7500B Data Stations Figure 6 4 shows the equipment configuration for MLX voice and 7500B data station The configuration shown in is for asynchronous 7500B data transmission For information on setting up synchronous 7500B data stations see Video Conferencing Data Stations later in this chapter The maximum cord length from the 75006 data module to the telephone is 80 ft 24 38 m Setting Up To set up an MLX voice and 75006 data station follow the steps below 1 Use an EIA 232 D cable to connect the serial port on the data terminal to the 7500B data module If the data terminal that has both COM1 and COM2 connectors make sure you use the one designated for data transmission See the customer s system manager if you are not sure 2 Make sure the 7500B data module option settings for parity and speed are compatible with the data terminal Speed is synchronized automatically if the factory setting has not changed If you are not sure about the speed and parity of the data terminal see the customer s system manager or the documentation packaged with the 7500B data module and data terminal 3 Plug the other end of the EIA 232 D cable into PORT 1 on the 75008 data module 4 Plug the WP90110 L7 power supply cord into the POWER receptacle on the 7500B data module 5 Connect the 7500B
168. at the cross connect field and listen for dial tone 4 12 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface decals Trunks 2 If you find a central office trunk that does not have dial tone check for a bad adapter or loose connection If adapters and wiring are in working order but you still do not hear a dial tone notify the AT amp T Service Center acting as the customer s agent 3 When you hear a dial tone dial a known telephone number to verify dialing After the central office completes the connection check that you have good two way transmission 4 If you cannot dial out on any of the trunks notify the AT amp T Service Center acting as the customer s agent It is the customer s responsibility or that of the customer s agent to report service outages to the local telephone company Testing Ground Start Trunks To perform this test you need a single line telephone with a ground key or a ground start button NOTE If a single line telephone with a ground key or ground start button is not available ground one side of the trunk To test ground start trunks follow the steps below 1 Plug the single line telephone into each central office line trunk jack either at the network interface or at the cross connect field 2 Pick up the handset You should hear a dial tone 3 Ground the ring lead by pushing the ground key or ground button or by grounding one side of the trunk 4 Remove the ground from the r
169. ating from single line telephones calls on tie lines incoming remote access and Direct Inward Dial DID calls and calls routed to the voice messaging system Table 3 4 System Requirement for TTRs Calls Hour Account Codes Used No Account Codes Used 110 2 180 350 420 610 710 ODD A A ooo aA RH The following modules supply TTRs for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Table 3 5 Modules with TTRs Module No of TTRs 008 OPT 2 012 400 GS LS 400 800 DID 800 LS ID Pp pe HB FS P 3 10 Telephone Problems Control Unit Problems The next step after resolving problems with telephones adjuncts and related wiring is to troubleshoot the control unit Troubleshoot the control unit components in the following order m Power supply m Processor m Line trunk and extension modules hereafter referred to as modulles m Carrier A WARNING Beware of hazardous voltages Only qualified technicians should attempt to service the control unit Follow all procedures care fully Backing Up System Programming Before performing any procedure that requires powering down the system save system programming in one of the following ways m Save the system programming to a floppy disk See System Programming and Maintenance SPM for detailed instructions Control Unit Problems 4 1 Power Supply Problems m Save the system programming to a memory card beginning with Release 3 0 See for detailed instructio
170. attached IS IIS III application on the system private branch exchange Local electronic telephone switch that serves local stations for example extensions within a business and provides them with access to the public network personal computer Personal Computer Memory Card International Association memory card See memory card Central office trunk that terminates directly on one or more telephones In Hybrid PBX mode a personal line cannot be part of a trunk pool Also called DFT direct facility termination Also refers to lines represented on line buttons in Key Mode Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 25 PFT pool port Power Failure Transfer power supply module PRI primary system operator position prime line Glossary Power Failure Transfer Feature that provides continuity of telephone service during a commercial power failure by switching some of the system s trunk connections to telephones connected to specially designated extension jacks In Hybrid PBX mode a group of outside trunks that users can access with a Pool button or by dialing an access code on an SA button Also used by the ARS feature when choosing the least expensive route for a call See jack Also refers to extension or line jacks before these are numbered according to the dial plan during programming The lowest jack on a module is always Port 1 See PFT Device that directs electricity to modules and tel
171. ay Streams of touch tone codes used by voice messaging applications to communicate with the system s control unit modulator demodulator device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over a telephone line and analog signals received on a telephone line to digital signals A type of data station that includes a modem as its DCE It may also include an MLX telephone for simultaneous voice and data MLX voice and modem data station an analog multiline telephone analog voice and modem data station or a single line telephone for dialing only modem data only station These data stations connect respectively to MLX analog or tip ring extension jack modules They provide analog transmission of data GL 22 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary mm eee modem pool Pair or group of pairs of modems and data modules with interconnected RS 232 interfaces that converts digital signals to analog or analog signals to digital thereby allowing users with 7500B data stations to communicate with users who have analog modem data stations module Circuit pack in the control unit that provides the physical jacks for connection of telephones and or outside lines trunks to the communications system In the name of a module the first digit indicates the number of ine trunk jacks it contains the last digit indicates the number of extension jacks it contains If no letters appear after the number a line trun
172. ay area of the MLX 20L telephone To the right and left of this console simulation window are columns listing the keys that correspond to similarly located buttons on the MLX 20L telephone The 10 function keys identified on screen as F1 through F10 are used to select screen options When a screen displays several choices press the function key identified by the label next to your choice If you were working on the console you would press the telephone button next to your choice Below the console simulation window are 20 simulated line buttons Using PgDn Inspect you can determine the status of each line 1 12 Introduction Using SPM mm eee A list of labels on the right side of the screen shows key combinations that correspond to buttons on the MLX 20L telephone Table 1 1 describes the function of PC keys within SPM Table 1 1 Function of PC Keys in SPM PC Key Console SPM Function Home Home Quit Exit from SPM and return to the DOS prompt when you have finished system programming If you are using a modem the call is disconnected End Menu Return to the SPM Main Menu PgUp More Display more menu items when there is an additional screen and the gt symbol appears next to the key PgDn Inspect Show the current information that has been programmed for a feature or button Alt P Drop Stop Enter a stop in a speed dialing sequence This combination also deletes an entry in a field in any screen exc
173. blem It allows either side of the PRI interface to synchronize both ends by exchanging messages m Auditing Calls If troubleshooting indicates problems with PRI calls to or from MLX telephones this audit if successful fixes the problem It allows either side of the PRI interface to synchronize both ends by exchanging messages NOTE If an audit fails the customer should call the CO to correct the problem from that end Repeat the audit when the problem is fixed Auditing Lines Summary Procedure PC Procedure Appropriate Slot or Port Time Estimate Backup Procedure Busy Out or Reset Interrupting the Test Restore Menu Maintenance Port gt B Channel gt Dial the slot and port no gt Enter gt Audit Lines F6 F3 F7 Type the slot and Port no F10 gt F1 This test can be run only on the slot and port of a DS1 PRI B channel 4 minutes Not required Not required You cannot interrupt this test Not required Central Office Problems 5 25 Checking Ports pE To audit lines follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Mai ntenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit E3 2 Select the B Channel option Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Modem Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Exit E7 3 Specify the slot and port number ss 2 digit slot number pp 2 digit p
174. blem to one of the following areas m Telephone m Control unit m Central office NOTE If you change the jack assignment of any telephone be sure to record the extension jack change on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks See Appendix B System Numbering Forms for details Check Telephone Problems _ a Ff N lf a customer reports telephone problems use the following steps as a guideline for determining the possible cause Chapter 3 Telephone Problems discusses telephone problems in more detail Discuss the problem with the user who reported the problem Run the appropriate test to verify the complaint Replace the telephone with one that works properly If the problem persists go to Checking the Error Logs below If the problem persists replace the telephone wiring Check the Error Logs If a system alarm turns on see the top right area of Figure 1 7 begin troubleshooting by checking the permanent errors in the error logs Use the following steps as a guideline to check the error logs For more information on performing the procedures soo Creda te Enor Logs Chapter 2 Also when you check the error logs you should refer to Table 2 2 in Chapter 2 for a detailed description of each problem Introduction 1 23 Maintenance Strategy mm ee 1 Check the permanent errors 2 If errors still exist check the transient errors 3 Check the last 10 errors whenever you want to
175. bling the Control Unit Housing Release 2 0 and Earlier Central Office Problems 5 35 Conclusion of Hardware Maintenance Figure 5 4 Installing the Control Unit Housing Release 2 0 and Earlier 2 Line up the wire clips attached to the carrier with the recesses on the outside of the side panels See Figure 5 4 If the wire clips are not attached to the control unit see Installing the Housing Clips in Chapter 2 of Installation 3 Push the panels back until the clips hook over the tabs and rest in the recesses 5 36 Central Office Problems Customer Support Information Support Telephone Number In the U S A only AT amp T provides a toll tree customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 24 hours a day If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system call the Helpline or your AT amp T representative Outside the U S A if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system contact your AT amp T representative Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 1 Customer Support Information Federal Communications Commission FCC Electromagnetic Interference Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can r
176. cable 355A for a male connector 355AF for a female connector Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 15 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit SMDR Printer Figure 5 5 Connecting a Printer Within 50 ft 15 2 m To connect a printer within 50 ft 15 2 m follow the steps below Refer to Figure 5 5 1 Plug the short end of a Z200A EMI cord into the SMDR jack on the control unit Plug the other end of the Z200A EMI cord into a 355AF or 355A adapter 3 Plug the female end of the adapter into the 25 pin male connector on the printer s interface cable or into the serial port on the printer 4 Set the appropriate printer options for SMDR See Setting Printer Options and DIP Switches for instructions 5 16 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit Connecting a Printer 50 Feet 15 2 m or More Away Use this procedure to connect a printer to the control unit if the following conditions apply The printer is not a CAT printer connected to a CAT E The printer is 50 ft 15 2 m or more from the control unit m The printer is not grounded to the same AC outlet as the control unit The printer is not grounded to an outlet that is on the same 117 V AC branch as the control unit and that is 50 ft 15 2 m or closer to the control unit NOTE If you are installing the printer in a different room than the control unit make sure that both locations hav
177. ce the FIC is 04DU9 B for D4 framing format or 04DU9 C for extended framing format and the SOC is 6 OP For equipment to be connected to DID facilities the FIC is 02RV2 T and the SOC is 9 0F The quantities and USOC numbers of the jacks required For each jack the sequence in which lines are to be connected the line types the FIC and the REN by position when applicable m Disconnection You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s a REN The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENS contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area A 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Customer Support Information Installation and Operational Procedures The manuals for your system contain information about installation and operational procedures Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that the equipment not be used and that it be disconnected from the network until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can b
178. ce Power FAX Attendant Sysfem Integrated Factory settings 70 main 891 dial in tie 892 automatic m tie Adminisfrafion will automatically set Loop Sfarf Reliable Disconnect to Yes t Hybrid PBX mode only Figure B 3 Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk J acks Maintenance and Troubleshooting B 5 System Numbering Forms E 3 3SPTCS Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers ee Pools Group Calling Form 2c Factory Set Renumber Form 7d Fanton Sel Benumof inti to Description Label 70 770 890 771 891 772 892 773 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 Pagi e y Factory Set Renumber Group ID Number to 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 Park Zi Biot Factory Set Renumber Form 6a cara Number to Description 881 882 883 884 885 886 es aa i i SSS Listed Directory Factory Set Renumber 888 Number Number to QCC Queue DSS Page Buttons a ah 800 PAGE 1 Beginning extension for range_ PAGE 2 Beginning extension for range Beginning extension for range Remote Access Factory Set Renumber Pr code Form 3a Number to PAGE 3 Beginnning extension for range 385 ae ARS Dial Out Default Renumber Code to oe 9 Hybrid PBX mode only ARS Dial Out Code is Idle Line Preference Code in Key mode Reserved for AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System
179. cess code and one of the toll numbers Make sure the call is completed before hanging up Repeat Step 2 for additional toll numbers 4 At the SMDR printer verify that the call was made on the correct trunk group and check the number of seconds before the call is reported on the SMDR printout If there are errors check system programming Group Calling Test To test Group Calling features follow the steps below 1 Make sure that each group member is logged into the group To log in each member dials 44 2 At any telephone pickup the handset and dial the trunk that is programmed to ring for a particular calling group 3 At the ringing telephone have someone pickup the handset and verify that you have good two way communication 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each calling group 5 Make additional calls to check each member of each calling group Initializing and Testing the System 7 13 eae the Secu 6 At any telephone pickup the handset and dial the group extension number 7 Test the calling group delay announcement if provided for each group a Make the group busy or have all members log out of the group by dialing 44 at each group extension b Repeat Step 2 c After listening to the delay announcement hang up d Repeat these steps for each group 8 At the ringing telephone have someone pickup the handset and verify that you have good two way communication System Speed Dial Test To test System Speed Dial numbe
180. ch tone receivers 1 Determine the number of TTRs required for the voice messaging system if present from Table 3 3 3 8 Telephone Problems System Requirements for Touch Tone Receivers 2 Estimate the hourly call volume for calls originating from single line telephones incoming calls on remote access and Direct Inward Dial DID lines and calls on tie lines 3 Use Table 3 4 to determine the number of TTRs required by the system m Use Column 2 if account codes are not being used m Use Column 3 if account codes are being used 4 Add the number of TTRs obtained in Steps 1 and 3 Use Table 3 5 to determine the number of TTRs already supplied 6 Compare the numbers obtained in Steps 4 and 5 to see if additional TTRs need to be added 7 Add anew module if indicated See Installation A voice messaging system requires a certain number of touch tone receivers TTRs in addition to any system requirements for TTRs The number of TTRs required by the voice messaging system depends on the number of ports used by the voice messaging system Table 3 3 TTRs Required by VMS _______Numberof VMS Ports Number of TTRs Required 2 3 2 4 2 6 3 8 4 12 6 Telephone Problems 3 9 System Requirements for Touch Tone Receivers E IA Table 3 4 estimates the total number of TTRs required in the system based on call volume and whether the system uses account codes The call volume in this table includes all calls origin
181. ch tone receivers calculating system requirements W Warm start Wires 459 Wiring problems 334 required by VMS 3 9 system requirements 3 10 Transient errors 2 4 Transient permanent error thresholds 2 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting IN 5 Index IN 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
182. ckup procedure Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 17 Backing Up with a Memory Card A CAUTION The memory card may be write protected to avoid the accidental erasure of the backup files Make certain this is not the case before you change the write protect tab Card Failure Memory Card Backup Backup Failure Try a different file or a new Memory Card Exit If the card is damaged repeat the backup with a different card If a backup is in progress and fails the system makes two additional attempts at the backup At the start of each attempt a message appears with the percentage of the backup that is completed If the backup fails after three attempts the screen shown above appears Repeat the backup procedure using a different file and or memory card Restore Use this procedure to restore system conditions that were backed up onto a translation memory card The information in a backup file on the translation card is copied to the system The restore procedure is necessary under the following conditions a System RAM is corrupt a A previously stored set of system conditions is preferred over the current set The processor module is replaced m After a System Erase frigid start has been performed m The system software has been reinstalled D 18 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing up with a Memo Card The Inspect feature Inspect or PgDn is available to view the attributes of the backup files o
183. cold starts A CAUTION Do not plug the power supply or the auxiliary power unit into the AC outlet until you are ready to turn on the system as described in Powering Up the System in Chapter 2 of Installation Do not attach the power cord s to any building surfaces Control Unit Problems 4 11 Pr r_Problem Processor Problems If the error logs or any aspect of troubleshooting indicate that the processor is the problem back up system programming if possible See System Programming and Maintenance SPM for instructions on backing up to a floppy disk See for instructions on backing up to a PCMCIA card Call your technical support organization for troubleshooting instructions If you are instructed to perform Peek Poke or System Erase refer to the appropriate section below Do not perform any of these procedures unless you are instructed to do so lf you are instructed to replace the processor see Replacing the Processor later in this chapter Peek Peek is a demand test that allows you to examine but not change system memory A caution Do not perform Peek unless you are following instructions from your technical support organization Summary Console Procedure Menu gt Maintenance sSlot Dial00 gt Enter Demand Test Peek Dial Address More PC Procedure E6 gt E2 Type 00 gt F2 F1 Type Address gt PgUp 4 12 Control Unit Problems Proce
184. control unit m If the unit load for slots five and six is less than or equal to 27 auxiliary power is sufficient for the carrier m lf the unit load for slots five and six is more than 27 continue to Step 9 B 8 Installation Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 9 Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads for slots five and six to 27 Remember that the 100D 400 400 GS LS TTR 800 GS LS ID 800 and 800 GS LS modules have unit loads of 0 0 Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to recalculate unit loads for new configuration m f the exchange reduces the unit load for slots five and six to 27 or less auxiliary power is sufficient m f the exchange does not reduce the unit loads for slots 5 and 6 to 27 install wall power units for the appropriate number of telephones to reduce the unit load to 27 NOTE Empty slots are not permitted between modules Installation B 9 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet B 10 Installation 146A protector 147A protector 400EM tie trunk 7500B data station data only video conferencing configuration diagram data module settings procedure 6 19 6 with MLX voice configuration diagram procedure A AC outlet test 2 8 2 9 Adapters 248B 5 17 5 21_____ list of unsupported 3 39 3 40 ADDS Automated Document Delivery System see Automated Document Delivery System ADDS Adjuncts forms for installation procedure 3 22
185. control unit To connect data equipment to the system see Chapter 6 Connecting Data To connect the MERLIN PFC see Chapter 8 Installing Installing Multi Function Modules The Multi Function Module MFM is an optional adapter that provides a modular jack connection to MLX telephones for the two classes of adjuncts listed below Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 1 Installing Multi Function Modules Tip ring T R devices such as single line telephones fax machines modems and credit card verification terminals Once connected the MLX telephone and adjunct work independently of each other This means they can send and receive calls at the same time The MFM is the only T R adapter you can use with MLX telephones Supplemental alerts such as bells chimes horns and strobes These alerts notify people in noisy areas of incoming calls Considerations Review the following items before you begin the procedure If you install an MFM do so before you assemble the MLX telephone You must connect the KS 22911 power supply to an electrical outlet within 50 ft 15 m of cord length of the MLX telephone If you connect an MFM and two DSSs to a telephone you must install a 406743419 power unit If a wall jack is more than 7 ft 213 cm from an MLX telephone you must use a longer D8W cord The MFM uses one of the two channels when it is active This means that when an adjunct such as a fax machine and the MLX telepho
186. ct Cord Channel D4BU Connects to TEL OTHER Jack Tr Line g MLX 10 MLX 10 Desk Telephone Wall Mounted Telephone Figure 3 31 Connecting the Line Cords 2 Connect the line cords See Figure 3 31 a Plug one end of the D8W cord into the LINE jack on the bottom of the phone Route the D8W cord through the cord channel on the back of the telephone If the telephone is for desktop use turn it face up and plug the D8W cord into the wall jack Insert the other end of the coiled H4DU handset cord into the jack on the side of the telephone 3 50 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Assembling MLX Telephones Ja MLX 10 Figure 3 32 Removing the Extension Label 3 Connect the handset Insert one end of the coiled H4DU handset cord into the handset 4 Label the extension identification card a Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the side of the plastic cover while holding your finger on the opposite edge use the paper clip to push and lift the cover See Figure 3 32 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 51 Assembling MLX Telephones Figure 3 33 Labeling the Extension b Type or write the assigned extension number on the card See Figure 3 33 c If you are wall mounting an MLX 10 MLX 10D or MLX 10DP telephone go to Step 5 If you are assembling a desk telephone go to Step 6 3 52 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Assembl
187. ct the P202 CLN Wilke anager male header pry the clip away I h dificati from the header and rar eater pull the header straight up E when finished Equipped with 1296 Freq Gen Figure 4 2 Replacing a Ring Generator 18 Verify that the modification label Equipped with 129B Freq Gen is attached to the front of the power supply shown in Figure 4 2 If not attach the label supplied with the new ring generator 19 Reinstall the power supply follow Steps 5 8 in Replacing the Power Supply later in this chapter Control Unit Problems 4 7 Power Supply Problems Replacing Auxiliary Power Units Follow this procedure if any of the following symptoms occur m The LEDs on the multiline telephones that are connected to the last two modules in the carrier do not light The last two slots in the carrier do not have power m The power supply LED is off To replace the auxiliary power unit follow the steps below Refer to Figure 4 3 throughout this procedure 1 Make sure the switch on the power supply module is turned off 2 Unplug the power supply and the auxiliary power unit from the AC outlet 3 Disconnect the cord from the AUX POWER INPUT jack on the power supply module 4 Remove the auxiliary power unit with the two cords still attached Mount the replacement auxiliary power unit in place of the old one 6 Plug the power unit line cord into the J2 DC OUTPUT jack on the replacement auxiliary power un
188. d data communications features Voice features include traditional telephone features such as Transfer and Hold and advanced features such as Group Coverage and Park Data features allow both voice and data to be transmitted over the same system wiring Intended Audience This book is intended for qualified field technicians who install and upgrade the system How to Use This Book Qualified technicians can use this book as a guide to installation and upgrading procedures The technician is given specific steps for installing all units of the control unit telephones adjuncts and data equipment Installation xix How to Use This Book pE S Refer to the following documentation for additional information m Equipment and Operations Reference provides detailed information on system hardware telephones and other equipment m Feature Reference provides details on the features of the communications system E System Planning provides procedures and forms for planning a system for installation m System Programming gives procedural instructions for programming system features Users guides and Operators Guides give procedural instructions for programming and using telephone features Related Documents later in this section provides a complete list of system documentation together with ordering information In the U S A only AT amp T provides a toll free customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 24 hou
189. d start Restart or frigid start System Erase also causes a orF to appear on the error code status display on the processor module There are three types of system restarts all of which occur automatically m Warm start you cannot select this from the Maintenance menu Cold start select Restart to do this manually m Frigid start select System Erase to do this manually 1 20 Introduction Maintenance Strategy Warm Start A loss of power for less than 250 ms can cause a warm start If this occurs calls in progress are not dropped but calls in the process of being connected may be dropped Considerations m Power interruptions of less than 100 ms usually do not affect the system m Warm starts may cause telephones without incoming calls to ring Cold Start Restart If you need to restart the system cold start Restart is recommended Restart drops all calls but saves system programming To perform a cold start select Restart as follows Console Procedure Menu SysProgram sExit System Restart Yes PC Procedure F6 F5 F1 F1 F2 Considerations A cold start Restart occurs automatically after a power interruption of more than one second A cold start Restart does not blank out the screen on an MLX 20L telephone until the cold start is completed A cold start Restart can cause extensions with the Extension Status feature to lose their toll restrictions m For
190. d to people who need it and impress upon them the need to keep it secret If anyone who knows the password leaves the company change the password immediately m f you have a special telephone line connected to your Hybrid PBX or Key system for Remote Administration and Maintenance you should do one of the following Unplug the line when it is not being used Install a switch in the line to turn it off when it is not being used Keep the Remote Administration and Maintenance telephone number secret Only give it to people who need to know it and impress upon them the need to keep it a secret Do not write the telephone number on the Hybrid PBX or Key system the connecting equipment or anywhere else in the system room m f your Remote Administration and Maintenance feature requires that someone in your office transfer the caller to the Remote Administration and Maintenance extension you should impress upon your employees the importance of only transferring authorized individuals to that extension A 18 Maintenance and Troubleshooting System Numbering Forms When you change any existing trunk or extension wiring record information about the wiring on the appropriate system numbering form This appendix includes examples of all of the system numbering forms and instructions for completing Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks The system numbering forms which are included in this appendix are as follows
191. dialed from a telephone associated with the system Such an off premises network call is originated at and will be billed from the system location Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 11 Customer Support Information The Remote Access feature as designed helps the customer through proper administration to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network Most commonly phone numbers and codes are compromised when overheard in a public location through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information or through carelessness for example writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding it Additionally hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the information to other hackers Enormous charges can be run up quickly It is the customer s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to properly implement the features evaluate and administer the various restriction levels protect access codes and distribute access codes only to individuals who have been fully advised of the sensitive nature of the access information Common carriers are required by law to collect their tariffed charges While these charges are fraudulent charges made by persons with criminal intent applicable tariffs state that the customer of record is responsible for payment of all long distance or other network charges AT amp T cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance o
192. drive and a 125 MB streaming tape drive The Master Controller Ill is a tower 20 MHz 486 SX PC with six available EISA bus slots with the tape drive installed It has 8 MB of RAM memory either 200 or 500 MB hard disk drive and a 250 MB streaming tape drive 8 14 Installing Applications integrated Solution Ill 1 2 The following hardware is also required E A 355AF adapter for connecting the Master Controller to the serial port on the control unit if they are within 50 ft 15 2 m of each other and are on the same AC branch circuit ADUs for connecting the Master Controller to the serial port on the control unit if they are not within 50 ft 15 2 m of each other and or they are not on the same AC branch circuit Any additional hardware required by the individual applications included in IS Ill including the cables and adapters for connecting the applications to the system m VP4 boards or IVP6 cards for AUDIX Voice Power and FAX Attendant E 012 basic telephone module to provide the tip ring interface for AUDIX Voice Power TR114 boards for FAX Attendant A summary of the installation procedure is provided below Setup the equipment and identify the hardware for IS Ill Connect the hardware as shown in the instructions 3 Install the software and test the IS III application If a voice application is installed you will need two 125 MB tape cartridges for system backup For more information consult Integrat
193. ds 54 an auxiliary power unit is needed to allow that carrier to support up to an additional 27 unit loads A CAUTION Running the system with more than 54 unit loads per carrier may not appear to do harm However this can cause the system to malfunction creating NO Trouble Found situations such as malfunctioning LEDs on multiline telephones or power unit failure Any extension that is connected to the modules in the last two slots receives power from the auxiliary power unit instead of from the power supply If an auxiliary power unit is required refer to Installing the Auxiliary Power Unit later in this chapter for instructions Installing the Basic Carrier Continue with this procedure only if you have met all of the requirements discussed earlier in this chapter NOTE When you mount the basic carrier onto the backboard leave 29 in 73 66 cm of backboard to the right This allows you to easily install and remove the control unit cover and also allows enough room for system expansion to the right for the total length of up to three carriers Installing the Control Unit 2 17 Installing the Basic Carrier mm eee To install the basic carrier follow the steps below 1 Mark the screw hole locations on the backboard using the basic carrier or the template supplied with the plastic preassembled backboard as a guide See Figure 2 5 Make sure the carrier is level before marking the holes Drill a pilot hol
194. e Troubleshoot the far end of the network interface to see if it is working and translated properly Troubleshoot for faulty cable Replace the module Turn the processor off and then on Repeat system programming procedure f problem persists escalate to your technical support organization Troubleshoot the far end of the network interface to see if it is working and translated properly Troubleshoot for faulty cable Replace the module Troubleshoot the far end of the network interface to see if it is working and translated properly Troubleshoot for faulty cable Replace the module Turn the processor off and then on Repeat system programming procedure If the problem persists replace the module Continued on next page 2 16 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Error Logs Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description Action 840B NO LOOP CURRENT Replace the module with a similar communication problems between module and test If the problem is the module and the central office No resolved replace the bad module If the loop current problem persists reinstall the old module If this error occurs 4 times and test the trunk consecutively and if Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled and the 50 maintenance busy limit has not been exceeded the trunk is busied out automatically 840C STUCK RINGING Replace the module with a similar Communication problems between module and test If the problem is
195. e QCC Connecting the Network Interface The following forms indicate the trunks that you must connect to the control unit Information regarding the channel service unit CSU is included on these forms m Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Introduction 1 3 Erooramminy the eem m Form 3a Incoming Trunks Remote Access m Form 3b Incoming Trunks DS1 Connectivity 100D Module m Form 3d Incoming Trunks DID Connecting Data Equipment The following forms indicate the data equipment you will need to set up data stations m Data Form 1a Modem Data Station m Data Form 1b 75006 Data Station m Data Form 2 Data Hunt Groups Programming the System If you have a system programming disk created with SPM or a Translation memory card you do not need to program the system Instead you can use the disk or memory card to restore the system see Chapter 7 Initializing and Testing the System for instructions If you did not receive a disk or a memory card and it is your responsibility to program the system see System Programming for instructions Upgrading the System If you are upgrading to Release 3 0 from Release 2 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 or from the MERLIN II Communications System refer to Chapter 9 Upgrading the System then Chapter 7 Initializing and Testing the System for upgrade instructions NOTE You cannot retain the programming from the MERLIN II Communications System You m
196. e following as described earlier in this chapter 012 module m MLX telephone with an MFM m GPA and analog multiline telephone An industry standard announcement device such as a Digital Announcer Unit provides Night Service information or announces to a caller that calling groups are busy Credit Card Verification Terminals You can connect a credit card verification terminal to one of the following as described earlier in this chapter m 012 module m MLX telephone with an MFM 3 26 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing aduncis If you connect a credit card verification terminal to an MFM the terminal can place and receive calls independently of the MLX telephone Do not use a GPA to connect a credit card verification terminal to the system because the terminal cannot dial out through the GPA Headsets Headsets are designed for hands free telephone use and consist of several components depending upon whether manual or one touch operation is used Any AT amp T headpiece works in either mode Headpieces Six different headpieces are available Each is light comfortable and uses a transparent voice tube to eliminate a cumbersome large microphone Each comes with a 10 ft 305 cm coiled cord and a quick disconnect latch Mirage This is a small almost unnoticeable monaural headset that uses a disk shaped receiver It can be worn on either ear instead of a headband or ear tip This headset is not useful
197. e made only by the manufacturers their authorized agents or others who may be authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this equipment contact your authorized AT amp T dealer or in the U S A only contact the National Service Assistance Center NSAC at 1 800 628 2888 Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Changes at Local Telephone Company Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service Hearing Aid Compatibility The custom telephone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC Automatic Dialers WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 5 Customer upper Information Perform such activities in off peak hours such as early morning or late evening a D
198. e AC outlet as the control unit and is within 50 ft 15 2 m of the control unit refer to m If the CAT serial printer is used with a CAT and is either not grounded to the same AC outlet as the control unit or is more than 50 ft 15 2 m from the control unit refer E etc cand Prrerond m If the SMDR or CAT printer is within 50 ft 15 2 m of the control unit and is connected to the same 117 V AC branch as the control unit refer to Connecting a Printer Within 50 Feet 15 2 m m f the SMDR or CAT printer is more than 50 ft 15 2 m from the control unit and is not connected to the same 117 V AC branch as the control unit refer to Connecting a Printer 50 Feet 15 2 m or More Away A CAUTION Before touching leads connectors pins and other components wear a properly grounded wrist strap to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD 5 8 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit irr Connecting a CAT and Printer on the Same AC Outlet Use this procedure to connect a CAT and CAT serial printer into the same AC outlet as the control unit provided the CAT is fewer than 14 ft 4 27 m and the printer is fewer than 50 ft 15 2 m from the control unit You need the following hardware for this procedure m Z200A EMI filter m D8W cord m 355A adapter To connect a CAT and CAT printer on the same AC outlet follow the steps below See 1 Plug the short end of the Z200A
199. e Control Unit AC Power and Grounding To Central ies z DIW or Office or Line GAH 25 Pair Cable Serving D Interface Facilit l d Bond ng ity L A gt O iple B i Conductor optior al D2R Cords Commercial Power DERA Hii 12 A C j E Plug Outlet Ground L i Wire Jo Earth eet nd Ground Bond Rod Wire Figure 2 3 Central Office and AC Grounds Installing the Control Unit 2 11 AC Power and Grounding A WARNING Improper ground can cause equipment failures service outages and electrical shock Verify that the AC power uses an approved ground for its primary ground that all voltage limiting devices are grounded to an approved ground and that the ground is one of the approved grounds listed below Approved Grounds Approved grounds are listed below in order of preference m Building Steel The most preferred ground Acceptable Water Pipe Must be a metal not plastic or vinyl underground water pipe at least 1 2 in 1 27 cm in diameter and in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 ft 3 m It must be electrically continuous so that the protector ground is uninterrupted Check for insulated joints plastic pipe and plastic water meters that might interrupt electrical continuity A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building a concrete encased ground or a grou
200. e an empty slot or the processor 00 FMWR not in Standby Mode Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Test running too long Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Not in TEST STANDBY mode Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Any other error Record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module NOTE Be sure to check the second screen if testing a 100D module or a 408 GS LS MLX module Restoring the Module When you are finished running module tests restore the module See Restore earlier in this chapter Control Unit Problems 4 49 Module Problems oes Board Controller Test This procedure tests the module s internal functions such as ROM RAM the timer dual port RAM and so on Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance gt lot Dial the slot number gt Enter sDemand Test BoardCntrir Test Once or Test Repetitive PC Procedure F6 F2 Type the slot no gt F10 F6 F3 F2 or F3 Appropriate Modules This test can be run on all modules except the processor Time Estimate Less than 1 second Busy Out or Reset Busy out or reset the module being tested prior to beginning the test Both Busy Out and Reset are
201. e center of the right side of the module cover with one hand to release the locking tab c Swing open the module cover to release it from the left side locating slot 3 8 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules Lift Out of locating Slot Figure 3 7 Removing the Module Cover d Lift module cover out of locating slot and place to one side Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 9 Installing Multi Function Modules Locking Tab Line Jack Handset Jack Locking Tab Figure 3 8 Removing an MFM Module 4 To install a new MFM go to Step 5 To reset jumpers on an existing MFM go to Step 6 To remove an existing MFM continue see Figure 3 8 a Disconnect any cords attached to the phone and note the connections so that you can reconnect the cords to the appropriate jacks later b Locate the MFM locking tabs on the top and bottom of the telephone base then spread the tabs apart to release the MFM c Grasp the MFM by the edges and pull it up to free the connector pins Do not touch the Connector pins d Set the MFM aside on a clean surface 3 10 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules Locking Tab Socket Connector Pins Line Jack Locking Tab Figure 3 9 Installing an MFM Module 5 Install the new MFM See Figure 3 9 Hold the MFM circuit board by the edges with the long connector pins facing the socket Take care not t
202. e in italics indicates characters you dial at the telephone or type at the PC Product Safety Labels Throughout these documents hazardous situations are indicated by an exclamation point inside a triangle and the word caution or warning A WARNING Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided xxii Installation Security A CAUTION Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided Security Certain features of the system can be protected by passwords to prevent unauthorized users from abusing the system You should assign passwords wherever you can and limit knowledge of such passwords to three or fewer people Nondisplaying authorization codes and telephone numbers provide another Appendix A Customer Support layer of security For more information see following Maintenance and Troubleshooting Installation xxiii Related Documents Sc LL_ amp Related Documents In addition to this book the documents listed below are part of the documentation set Within the continental United States these documents can be ordered from the AT amp T Customer Information Center by calling 1 800 432 6600 Document No Title System Documents 555 630 117 Introduction 555 630 118 System Manager s Guide 555 630 110 Feature Reference 555 6
203. e in the center of each of the four screw hole marks Anchor the screws approximately halfway into the backboard Position the carrier on the screws and slide the carrier to the left a Ff WS N Tighten the screws LP PPA A A Mounting Surface A ZEL L S Mounting i Screw Vl Yn Backboard Figure 2 5 Marking the Basic Carrier Screw Holes 2 18 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Power Supply Installing the Power Supply A WARNING Do not attach any cab es or power cords to the power supply until it is installed in the carrier Do not power up the control unit until all of the modules and power equipment are installed Once they are installed refer tol Powering Ud later in this chapter Failure to comply with this procedure can result in shock hazard and or damage to the equipment If you are upgrading an older system and a ring generator is specified in the system forms Control Unit Diagram install it in the power supply before putting the power supply in the carrier The procedure is detailed in Maintenance and Troubleshooting For expansion carriers only a copper shield must be installed on the power supply before installing it in the carrier The procedure is explained in Installing a Copper Shield later in this chapter Before touching leads connectors pins and other components use a properly grounded wrist strap to prevent damage from electrostatic disch
204. e that captures detailed usage information on incoming and outgoing voice and data calls Printer used to produce SMDR reports Connected to the system via an RS 232 jack on the processor module See SDN Pause Stop or End of Dialing signal in a programmed dialing sequence such as an Auto Dial or Personal Speed Dial number System Programming and Maintenance DOS or UNIX system based application for programming and maintaining the system Configuration in Key mode operation in which all outside lines appear on all telephones See extension See extension jack See SMDR Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 29 Glossary mm ee Supplemental Alert See SAA Adapter switchhook flash Momentary 320 ms to 1 second on hook signal used as a control signal May be directed either to the control unit or to a host switch outside the system Also called Recall or timed flash synchronous data Method of transmitting a continuous digital data stream in transmission which the transmission of each binary bit is synchronized with a master clock See also asynchronous data transmission system acceptance Test of all trunks telephones data terminals and features test after installation to ensure that they are working correctly System Access See SA buttons buttons system date and Date and time that appear on MLX display telephones and time SMDR reports system programming Programming of system functions and featur
205. e that the 7500B data module option settings for parity and speed are compatible with the data terminal Speed is synchronized automatically if the factory setting has not been changed If you are not sure about the speed and parity of the data terminal see the customer s system manager or the documentation packaged with the 75006 data module and the data terminal 3 Plug the other end of the EIA 232 D cable into PORT 1 on the 7500B data module 4 Plug the WP90110 L7 power supply cord into the POWER receptacle on the 7500B data module 5 Use a 440A4 terminating resistor adapter to connect the 7500B data module to the control unit a Use a D8W cord to connect the 440A4 terminating resistor adapter to the LINE jack on the 7500B data module b Use a second D8W cord to connect the other end of the adapter to the appropriate MLX extension jack See Form 2b System Numbering Digital for the appropriate module and extension jack 6 Connect all power cords to an AC outlet not controlled by a wall switch 6 14 Connecting Data Equipment 7500B Data Only Stations 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX Module MLX Extension jack 7 D8W cord 440A4 100W Terminating Resistor Adapter lt lt ElA 232 D ata Cable __Terminal SERIAL a connector AC Outlet AC Outlet Figure 6 5 7500B Data Only Equipment Configuration Connecting Data Equipment 6 15 Video
206. e voltage readings do not measure the values required the AC outlet is improperly wired do not install the system Advise the customer to have a licensed electrician correct the problem Installing the Control Unit 2 9 AC Power and Grounding Grounding Requirements Proper grounding of the installation site safeguards the system by protecting it from the following m Lightning m Power surges m Power crosses on central office trunks m Electrostatic discharge ESD When installing the control unit make sure you meet the following grounding requirements The control unit the central office trunk protector and the AC power service panel should be as close to each other as possible Because equipment can be located throughout a building the National Electrical Code requires that the ground point for the central office trunk protector be bonded to the AC power ground as shown in The AC outlet and the single point ground bar must be properly grounded as shown in and Each power supply in the control unit must be connected to the single point ground bar by a 12 AWG or a 14 AWG solid copper wire andi alshow this connection This wire run should be as short as possible preferably within 5 ft 152 cm not to exceed 10 ft 305 cm See Approved Grounds later in this chapter for more information The AC outlet must be connected to the 147A protector with 12 AWG or a 14 AWG solid copper wire 2 10 Installing th
207. e working wall outlets and wall jacks and that the building wiring has been connected so that the wall jacks in each location communicate with each other You need the following hardware for this procedure Z200A EMI filter Adapter for the interface cable connector 355A for the male connector 355AF for the female connector 400B2 power adapter Z3A2 ADUs BRIA 4P adapter or 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block 8 position wall jacks EIA crossover cable ADU crossover cable 2012D transformer Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 17 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit m 248B adapter m D8W cords m D6AP power cord m EIA 232 D cable m 4 pair plug ended cable To connect a printer 50 ft 15 2 m or more away from the control unit follow the steps below See 1 Plug the short end of a Z200A EMI cord into the SMDR jack on the control unit 2 Plug the other end of the Z200A EMI cord into a 355AF adapter 3 Plug the female end of the 355AF adapter into one end of an EIA crossover cable 4 Plug the other end of the EIA cable into the 25 pin male connector of the Z3A2 ADU A CAUTION If the printer is in a building outside the main building control unit location you must install an ADU and an additional protector in each building The ADUs and protectors provide both the control unit and the printer with additional protection against lightning inadvertent contact with power lines and power curren
208. e you have initialized the system it is ready for system acceptance testing Perform the basic tests below to test trunks telephones and features If any equipment is not working properly see Maintenance and Troubleshooting for troubleshooting instructions Testing MLX Telephones This switch based software test verifies that the LEDs ringer buttons switchhook and B channel operation for MLX telephones are working correctly You cannot run this test when the telephone is in programming forced idle or maintenance mode When an MLX telephone is in test mode the system considers it busy and therefore not available for use Initializing and Testing the System 7 3 Toing the Se If you hang up during any of these procedures test mode ends automatically Keep the following in mind when using the speakerphone m lf the Mute button is pressed before the Speaker button the Mute LED cannot be turned off it winks The Mute and Speaker LEDs remain steady during test mode The pressing of the Mute button is processed within the telephone When the telephone test is originated from the Speaker button every second press of the Mute button causes the Mute LED to flash off momentarily Also both the Mute and Speaker LEDs may occasionally remain on after disconnecting with the Speaker button m Press the fixed feature buttons repeatedly to toggle the LEDs on and off To test the basic features of an MLX telephone follow the st
209. e zone paging and later in this chapter show single zone and multizone paging configurations that include background music through a Magic on Hold audio source Bidirectional paging also called talk back is shown in Figure 3 26 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 29 Installing Adjuncts A Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF Signaling You can connect external paging systems that use dual tone multifrequency DTMF signaling such as PagePac Plus with Zone Expansion Unit paging systems to an LS or GS line trunk jack programmed for paging operation including bidirectional paging operation talk back PagePac Plus does not require an adapter Zone paging systems such as the PagePac series require one LS or GS jack You can use any zone once the paging jack is activated You must use a Universal Paging Access Module UPAM or PagePal for PagePac series systems other than PagePac Plus to connect a paging system that requires contact closure an impedance matching transformer or both Use a Loop Start Trunk Adapter when a customer supplied paging system does not require contact closure 3 30 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts PAGEPAC PLUS OUTPUTS Speaker PAGING INPUT MUSIC T Cord FI yoye Coy oh il anEeN i y aay oy Nw See ay ay eye Control Unit Figure 3 22 Single Zone Paging with PagePac Plus Installing Tel
210. ead of a modem Table 6 1 provides a detailed comparison of data station configurations Connecting Data Equipment 6 1 Data Stations TTL Table 6 1 Data Station Configurations Type of Telephone GPA or Station for voice MFM DCE DTE Analog voice Analog multiline GPA Modem Terminal PC fax cannot and modem telephone and dial optical scanner or data BR 241 B1 host computer bridging adapter Modem None None Modem Terminal PC fax credit data only card verification optical scanner or host computer MLX voice and Any MLX MFM Modem Terminal PC fax credit modem data telephone card verification optical scanner or host computer MLX voice and Any MLX None 75006 Data Terminal PC fax credit 7500B data telephone module card verification optical scanner host computer or video codec 7500B None None 7500B Data Terminal PC fax credit data only module and card verification optical a 440A4 scanner host computer ae or video codec terminating resistor adapter 6 2 Connecting Data Equipment A single line telephone may be attached for dialing purposes Data Stations NOTES 1 The analog voice and modem data station requires a bridging adapter to connect the telephone to the two adjacent analog extension jacks 2 The 7500B data only station requires a terminating resistor adapter to connect the 75006 data module to the MLX extension jack 3 See Video Conferencing Data Stations later in this chapter for
211. eans of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 DOC Certification No 230 4095A CSA Certification No LR 56260 Load No 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 7 Customer Suppor Information Renseignements sur la notificat
212. ecking Unit Loads In the event of maintenance or equipment changes recalculate the unit loads for each carrier where there is a new configuration Use the worksheet in Appendix B Unit Load Calculation Worksheet As a general rule if you can distribute the 800 DID modules and telephone modules equally across the carriers you prevent unnecessary drain on any one carrier However the rule varies depending on the system s mode The next two sections provide the rules for calculating unit loads in various modes Unit Loads for Hybrid PBX Mode The power supply model 391A1 generally supports six modules of any type in Hybrid PBX mode without requiring an auxiliary power unit If the following conditions are true however the unit loads on a carrier can exceed the 54 unit maximum and therefore require auxiliary power All six carrier slots are occupied by MLX telephone or analog multiline telephone modules The carrier has a total of more than 45 MLX 20L telephones or 34 button analog multiline telephones installed 2 16 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Basic Carrier E Unit Loads for Key or Behind Switch Mode In a Key or Behind Switch system with four or fewer modules no calculation is needed The power supply model 391A1 generally supports four modules of any type Auxiliary Power Units The power supply provides 54 unit loads to each carrier If the unit load requirement for a carrier excee
213. ect the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Sl ot Port Exit F2 2 Specify the slot number n 00 to 17 Slot Dial or type nn then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit 4 38 Control Unit Problems Module Problems LL i Console DispIay Instructions Additional Information PC 3 Select Busy Out Slot xx XX slot number entered in Step 2 Make a selection Status Demand Test For all MLX modules BChLoopbck is E Busy out Reset also displayed as an option on this Restore Upgrade screen For 100D modules CSU 1pbk Error Events andClock are also Exit displayed as options on this screen F2 4 Select Yes Busy out Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 Do you want to continue Ma Yes Cancel Exit The screen below appears while the module is discontinuing service to lines trunks and extensions without disrupting calls in progress Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Busy Out Slot xx Busy Out in Progress The screen below appears when the module is successfully busied out Busy out slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 Busy Out Complete Exit Control Unit Problems 4 39 Module Problems The screen below appears when the busy out fails again be sure to specify the correct slot Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Busy Out Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 Busy out FAILED Reset Summary Pr
214. ecurely on the base of the wire manager on the modules Central Office Problems 5 31 Conclusion of Hardware Maintenance Top Cover Empty module an ae Figure 5 1 Installing the Control Unit Top Cover Release 2 1 and Later 5 32 Central Office Problems Conclusion of Hardware Maintenance Figure 5 2 Installing the Control Unit Front Cover Release 2 1 and Later Central Office Problems 5 33 Conclusion of Hardware Maintenance Installing the Control Unit Housing Release 2 0 or Earlier After you have completed maintenance and troubleshooting follow the steps below to reinstall the Release 2 0 or earlier control unit housing 1 Assemble the control unit housing See m f the housing is already assembled go to Step 2 m f the housing is not assembled a Lay the front panel s face down b If you are housing more than one carrier connect the front panels together by lining up the arrows and then sliding the panels until the semicircles form a complete circle c Connect the side panels to the front panel s similarly 5 34 Central Office Problems Conclusion of Hardware Maintenance Right Hand Front Panel Side Panel Line Up With the Semicircle on Inside of Front Panel gt TO ATTACH IGN ARROWS SLIDE OMPLETE CIRCLE Slide Tongues in and Push Front Panel Up Figure 5 3 Assem
215. ed and temporarily mute the line See One Touch Operation All Telephones One touch operation allows you to touch a button to answer a call On analog multiline telephones use a headpiece with a plug prong base unit and an adapter 502C The headpiece connects to the plug prong base unit which in turn connects to the adapter The adapter plugs into the OTHER jack on the underside of the telephone The plug prong unit provides switchhook control for answering calls by pressing a button You can also adjust the incoming volume On MLX telephones the headpiece is attached to a modular base unit which is attached to the telephone The handset is also attached to the modular base unit See Figure 3 21 3 28 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts OTHER Jack underside 3 Plug Prong Base Unit 4 y h 5 if if en 4 tok 1 COP Headpiece Handset SOS at s NN Jack Handset Jack Headpiece Headpiece gt 502C Adapter Manual Operation One Touch Operation One Touch Operation Analog Multiline Analog Multiline Telephones MLX Multiline Telephones only Telephones only Figure 3 21 Manual and One Touch Headset Operation Loudspeaker Paging Systems Use a loudspeaker paging system to page co workers and make announcements You connect the paging system to the jack of an LS or GS line trunk that is programmed for paging Figures amp 22 8 23 lene n various configurations for singl
216. ed press any key amp Maintenance Utility again Please press any key to continue Version X XxX 4 Select an option by pressing one of the function keys SPM Main Menu Menu Select Function Fi Sys Program Maintenance F6 F2 Backup Restore F7 F3 Boards Pass Thru F8 F4 Print Opts Password F9 F5 Moni tor Language F10 1 8 Introduction Using SPM mm With a Local or Remote Modem Connection When the equipment is set up you can perform remote maintenance by dialing the remote processor s built in 2400 1200 bps modem You can dial the modem directly or call the system operator and request to be transferred to the modem Both procedures are explained below Dialing the System Operator If you do not know the remote access trunk number dial the number for the customer s system To dial the operator follow the steps below 1 Start SPM When the Welcome message appears press any key 2 Enter the command to put the modem in originate mode this command varies depending on the type of modem you are using 3 Pick up the handset on the T R telephone and dial the customer s system operator the Listed Directory Number for the customer s system 4 When the attendant answers the call explain what you are doing and ask for any passwords you may need then ask the operator to transfer you to the modem by pressing the Transfer button and then dialing 10 NOTES 1 If the password is not known c
217. ed Solution Ill Installation and Maintenance Guide Installing Applications 8 15 AT amp T Attendant AT amp T Attendant AT amp T Attendant is a stand alone application that provides operator like services through the use of prerecorded messages and electronic switching Considerations You cannot connect AT amp T Attendant to a system that operates in Behind Switch mode You cannot connect AT amp T Attendant to a system that has an AUDIX application or a voice mail system installed You can connect a maximum of four Attendants to the system You should program all lines to AT amp T Attendant for reliable far end disconnect The system may need more touch tone receivers if m Single line telephone users do not get a dial tone m AT amp T Attendant fails to transfer calls m Calls fail to ring or go to coverage prematurely When Attendant is set up for both daytime and after hours operation the time on each Attendant s clock must match the system clock so that the system recognizes the end of the business day Hardware Requirements AT amp T Attendant requires connection to a 012 basic telephone module You can use up to eight jacks on a 012 basic telephone module for AT amp T Attendants When using fewer than eight jacks you can use the remaining jacks for tip ring devices 8 16 Installing Applications MERLIN MAIL a The following hardware is also required E AT amp T Attendant unit and cords E Some AC power str
218. ed in a round robin fashion to the first available data station in the group See feature code GL 10 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary Dialed Number identification Service dial out code dial plan dial repeating tie trunk DID DID trunk digital Digital Communications Protocol digital data station Digital Signal 0 Digital Signal 1 digital switch element E ee See DNIS Digit usually a9 or digits dialed by telephone users to get an outside line Numbering scheme for system extensions lines and trunks Tie trunk on which the originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off hook signal to the receiving end and waits for the receiving end to send an off hook signal followed by an on hook signal Also called delay dial start tie trunk Direct Inward Dialing Service that transmits from the telephone company central office and routes incoming calls directly to the called extension calling group or outgoing trunk pool bypassing the system operator Incoming trunk that receives dialed digits from the local exchange allowing the system to connect directly to an extension without assistance from the system operator Representation of information in discrete elements such as off and on or zero and one See also analog transmission See DCP See 7500B data station See DSO See DS1 See DSE Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 11 Glossary A CC digital transmissi
219. eet metal use sheet metal screws and attach them to the structural members NOTE The mounting hardware should resist a combined pullout force of at least 650 pounds 295 kilograms AC Power and Grounding Proper power and grounding are essential for the system to run correctly and safely A CAUTION If any of the following requirements are not met the customer must contact a licensed electrician Do not install the system until all requirements are met Installing the Control Unit 2 5 AC Power and Grounding Verify that all of the following power and grounding requirements are met The load center of appropriate current rating must be equipped with circuit breaker s labeled 120 VAC 15 amps E Each breaker must protect one dedicated quad AC outlet or two dedicated duplex AC outlets E All AC outlets must connect to the same load center and the ground wire must connect to the single point ground bar on the first AC outlet see m One outlet must have an attached ground bar connected by a 6 AWG copper wire to an approved ground see page 2 12 for a description of approved grounds This ground bar is the system s single point ground see To prevent someone from accidentally shutting off the power do not connect the control unit to a switch controlled outlet m The AC outlet should be within 5 ft 152 cm of the control unit Each carrier requires one AC outlet receptacle m Auxiliary equipment requires
220. elected Restore Failure RESTORE IS CANCELED System is DOWN D 24 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card EE If the restore fails because the card is damaged the system performs a System Erase frigid start Repeat the restore procedure using a different file and or memory card Wrong Type of Card Memory Card Restore Inserted Memory Card is not the correct type Remove and insert MERLIN LEGEND Backup Restore Card Exit The inserted card does not match the card option selected from the System menu Remove the card and repeat the restore procedure with the correct type of card See Card Types for information about the card labels Board Mismatch Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Restore x X filename selected Restore Failure RESTORE IS CANCELED Board mismatch between control unit and file Exit A mismatch exists between the hardware components present on the current system and the hardware components reflected in the backup file The restore is aborted You can do one of the following m Repeat the restore procedure with another file m Modify the system hardware to match the configuration of the backup file and repeat the restore procedure with the same file Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 25 oo a with a emon Card Strap in Place for Key Mode but Mode is Set to Hybrid Restore n n filename selected Restore Failure
221. elephone module to that telephone This provides the telephone with the two voice pairs needed to use these features See Figure 3 39 NOTE The numbers of these telephone jacks are boxed on the system forms In Figure 3 39 the label on the bridging adapter refers to the default dial plan extension number not the telephone port number The even jack on the bridging adapter should be connected to the odd numbered telephone port and the odd jack on the bridging adapter should be connected to the even numbered telephone port 3 60 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit Processor C d a Central Office jai A j Lines Bridging Adapter BR 241 B1 r COA EVEN Station AAAA Ay ODD Telephone Figure 3 39 Connecting Two Voice Pairs to a Telephone Using a Bridging Adapter BR 241 B1 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 61 Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit a Removing Damaged Connecting Blocks In some cases a connecting block becomes damaged and must be removed To remove a damaged connecting block follow the steps below 1 Remove the wires or the patch cord from the connecting block m f you have Interconnect Wiring use long nosed pliers to remove the telephone wires and tag the wires with tape to identify their positions m If you have Systimax wiring pull off the patch cord 2 Place a 7
222. emory card only if the installation is performed through the maintenance screens Memory Card Is Corrupt Upgrade Installation Information on the Memory Card is corrupted Please remove the Memory Card Exit Select Exit and repeat the forced installation procedure with a new memory card Control Unit Problems 4 27 Processor Problems System Busy If the forced installation is attempted while a line trunk or extension is busy the following screen appears System Busy Pls Wait Dial Code xxxx P ss pp When all lines trunks or extensions are freed the installation continues Select Exit to return to the System menu and cancel the installation If system software is corrupted system maintenance may not provide an accurate indication of busy lines trunks or extensions If this seems to be the case verify that the listed extensions are truly not busy then perform the installation by power cycling the system See Step 3 above Other Error Conditions The following error conditions may not be viewed on the error code status display or the maintenance screens Power Cycle During Installation The system automatically begins the installation procedure again If the power source is unreliable it is possible for the installation procedure to retry indefinitely See or Chapter 2 of Installation for details on providing a reliable power source Removal of Memory Card During Installation The system is in an indeterminate
223. epetitive testing select Exit F5 The screen below appears only if you selected Test Once and the module passes the test Demand Test Slot xx Board aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Internal Loopback Test Successfully Completed Exit Xx slot number entered in Step 2 The screen below smears when either test Test Once or Repetitive fails Demand Test Slot xx Board aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Internal Loopback Test FAILED XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Exit xx slot number entered in Step 2 The 100D and 408 GS LS MLX module each have two DSEs To display the second DSE s test results press the More button PqUp Lines 5 and 6 identify the cause of the failure or the number of errors found per DSE port There are 16 DSE ports numbered 0 through 15 Line 5 displays the results for ports 0 through 7 Line 6 is for ports 8 through 15 Interpreting Test Results If the test is successful the module DSE ports are free from error Continue with the next module test or restore the module if you are through testing 4 48 Control Unit Problems Module Problems eee If the test fails find the error message in Table 4 3 and proceed as indicated Table 4 3 Internal Loopback Test Errors Error Messages Corrective Action Slot is not busied out Exit the test busy out the slot and try again Slot empty or not valid Exit the test and try again be sure to type the correct slot number Do not indicat
224. ephones on the system One power supply module is needed for each carrier and an auxiliary power unit is added if the module exceeds capacity Primary Rate Interface Standard interface that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems As used in North America provides twenty three 64 kbps B channels for voice and or data and one 64 kops D channel which carries multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels First jack on the first MLX or analog multiline extension module in the control unit that is the extension jack with the lowest logical ID in the system Individual extension number assigned to a telephone in a system operating in Behind Switch mode Each telephone user has his or her own prime line and is automatically connected to that line when he or she lifts the handset GL 26 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary EEE processor module programming port reassignment protocol public network Module in the second slot of the control unit Slot 0 to the right of the power supply module Includes the software and memory that runs the system Reassignment of the system programming jack position to any of the first five extension jacks on the first MLX module in the control unit Set of conventions governing the format and timing of message exchanges between devices such as an MLX telephone and the control unit Network that is commonly accessible for local or long
225. ephones and Adjuncts 3 31 Installing Adjuncts CUSTOMER SUPPLIED AMPLIFIER voice Speaker fe D4BU PAGE INPUT Cord i Ji 117VAC HARRIS DRACON Model 22050 900 Ji Loop Start Trunk Adapter GER a7 17VAC WHEELOCK Control Unit POWER SUPPLY MODEL EPS 2401 WARNING The black wire from the LS trunk adapter power cable must be connected to the positive input of the Wheelock PS The grey on black wire must be connected to the negative input Figure 3 23 Single Zone Paging with Customer Supplied Amplifier 3 32 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts PAGEPAC 20 Speak ces PAGING INPUT 117 MUSIC yic Universal Paging Access Module LC name RIS Kes letter Model PAM CC405258013 AUTOMANUAL Set the Access Mode switch to MANUAL Control Unit 117VAC WHEELOCK POWER SUPPLY MODEL EPS 2401 Figure 3 24 Single Zone Paging with UPAM Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 33 staking Raundi MERLIN Identifier MERLIN Identifier allows the use of local telephone company caller identification services to receive store and use calling party number information Before installation verify that this service provided by the Central Office is available on the lines to be connected Each MERLIN Identifier consists of the following E A control unit which must be located near the MERLI
226. eps below 1 Pick up the handset of the telephone you are testing and push an ICOM button in Key or Behind Switch mode or an SA button in Hybrid PBX mode 2 When you hear dial tone dial 00 to activate test mode You should hear a steady test tone over the handset and a ring burst over the speaker The telephone s red and green LEDs should be on 3 To test the line buttons press any line button with two LEDs red and green The diagnostic tone should stop and the LEDs for that button should go off 4 Press the same line button repeatedly to toggle between the green and red LEDs For a QCC the display should show the name of the feature programmed on the button 5 To test a fixed feature button with one LED press the button The Feature and HFAI LEDs should turn off The first press of the Speaker button should turn off the Mute LED The second press of the Speaker button should turn off the Speaker LED 7 4 Initializing and Testing the System Testing the System 6 To test the red Message light press a fixed feature button without an LED such as Transfer Conf or Drop or any dialpad button The Message light should turn off 7 Hang up the handset to leave test mode Testing MLX Display Telephones While the MLX display telephone is in test mode follow the steps below to test the display buttons 1 Press each fixed display button Home Menu Inspct and More The display should spell out these button labels 2
227. ept one in which you are entering a speed dialing sequence Alt E Conf Flash Enter a switchhook flash in a speed dialing sequence Alt C n a TopSP Return to the top of the System Programming menu Alt H Hold Pause Enter a Pause in a speed dialing sequence ALT U n a Convert Convert a backup file from an earlier release to Release 2 0 or later format Continued on next page Introduction 1 13 Using SPM S Table 1 1 Continued Ctrl F1 n a Help Display a help screen about SPM operations To exit from Help press End Ctrl F5 n a Reset Reset the communications port For example if the information on the screen is garbled try exiting from and then recentering the screen If the screen remains garbled use Ctrl F5 to clear the screen and return to the SPM Welcome screen Note that using Ctrl F5 drops the modem connection Ctrl F8 n a Browse View print reports saved with Print Opts Ctrl F9 n a Escape to shell To use this key in sequence you must set DEBUG 1 in the SPM configuration file ams cfg You can then use this key sequence to execute DOS or UNIX system commands To return to SPM type exit Enter 1 Enter This key on your PC can be used instead of F10 Enter when Enter appears as a choice in the 7 by 24 console simulation window Bksp Backspace The lt Bksp can be used instead of F9 when it appears as a choice in the 7 by 24 console
228. er identification display capabilities Local telephone power is required if the MLX telephone is not wired with 4 pair extension wiring or if you use a MLX 20L or MLX 28D with a Direct Station Selector DSS The MLX telephone must have Idle Line Preference activated 8 22 Installing Applications PassageWay Direct Connect Solution m _ x The Automatic Line Selection on the MLX telephone should be programmed so that Idle Line Preference is on an ICOM button in Key and Behind Switch modes or an SA button Hybrid PBX mode Hardware Requirements The following hardware is required An approved DOS PC with the following An 80286 or higher processor 80386 or higher recommended An available serial port A minimum of 2 MB of RAM A 3 5 inch 1 44 MB high density drive or a 5 25 inch 1 2 MB high density drive A hard disk drive with 2 MB of space available A Windows compatible color video monitor A Windows compatible pointing device a mouse or trackball is recommended Microsoft Windows version 3 7 or later E PassageWay adapter E 9 pin to 25 pin adapter for 9 pin serial ports 4 ft 4 pair keyed modular telephone cord D8AC For more information consult Passage Way Solution User s Guide Installing Applications 8 23 System Programming and Maintenance SPM System Programming and Maintenance SPM System Programming and Maintenance SPM is
229. er of the stand to release the tab then pull the stand toward you and away from the DSS c Insert the tab at the bottom of the stand into the other slot d Lower the stand and press the tab at the top into the corresponding slot on the DSS 2 Install the D8AC cord on the DSS a Plug one end of the D8AC cord into the IN jack on the DSS b Route the D8AC cord through the cord channel on the left side of the DSS c If you are installing only one DSS go to Step 4 If you are installing two DSSs repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second DSS then go to Step 3 3 Wire the two DSSs See Figure 3 28 a Place the two DSSs side by side and face down b Route the D8AC cord from the IN jack on the second DSS DSS2 through the cord channel on the first DSS DSS1 c Plug this D8AC cord into the OUT jack on DSS1 3 44 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Direct Station Selectors D8W D8AC ACA AEE MLX Telephone Figure 3 28 Connecting One or More DSSs 4 Wire the telephone to the DSS unit s See Figure 3 28 a Remove the handset from the telephone then place the telephone face down on a flat surface to the right of the upside down DSS unit s b Plug the D8AC cord from the IN jack on the DSS1 into the DSS jack on the telephone then route the cord through the cord channel c Plug the D8W line cord into the LINE jack on the MLX telephone The D8AC and D8W cords share the cord cha
230. es No Exit If you begin a backup procedure with an unformatted or incorrectly formatted card this screen appears The inserted memory card is not the correct type You have the option of formatting the memory card as a translation memory card or repeating the backup procedure with a different translation memory card NOTES l Only 4 MB Series or Series II PCMCIA memory cards may be formatted except those already formatted as translation cards If a memory card cannot be formatted a message appears on screen These messages are noted in the procedures as appropriate Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 5 Backing Up with a Memory Card EE ____________ _ _ _ _ _ SS rt i e le OS S S S tTChCOt CSOSCS 3 A memory card may need to be formatted if it is intended for use as a translation card but is currently blank or contains data other than backup files for the system Format Warning Format Memory Card All data on card will be DELETED Do you want to continue Yes This screen appears if you respond to the system prompt to format the memory card Select Yes or press F3 to begin the memory card format Table D 1 lists the screen messages that may appear while formatting is in progress Table D 1 Memory Card Formatting Messages Message What it Means Formatting Memory Card The format is in progress Formatting of Memory The format was successful and has Card Completed
231. es that affect most users performed from an MLX 20L telephone or a PC using SPM See also extension programming and centralized telephone programming System See SPM Programming and Maintenance system renumbering Procedure used to change the numbers assigned to telephones adjuncts calling groups paging groups park zones remote access and lines trunks T1 Type of digital transmission facility that in North America transmits at the DS7 rate of 1 544 Mbps GL 30 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary TDM telephone power supply unit tie trunk timed flash tip ring touch tone receiver T R trunk trunk jack trunk pool TTR time division multiplex Process where the transmission channel is divided into time slots Equipment that provides power to an individual telephone Private trunk directly connecting two telephone switches See also automatic start tie trunk delay dial start tie trunk immediate start tie trunk and wink start tie trunk See switchhook flash Contacts and associated conductors of a single line telephone plug or jack See TTR See tip ring A telecommunications path between the communications system and the telephone company central office CO or another switch Often used synonymously with line See ine trunk jack See pool touch tone receiver Device used to decode DTMF touch tones dialed from single line telephones or Remote Access telephones U un
232. esent should turn on and then off They remain off when the modules are idle 3 If any of these conditions are not met refer to Troubleshooting 2 44 Installing the Control Unit Powering Down the System Powering Down the System You may need to power down the system for troubleshooting during installation or to add new equipment to the carrier A CAUTION Follow these steps in the exact sequence To power down the system follow the steps below 1 Turn off the power supply on the basic carrier 2 Turn off the power supplies on the expansion carriers 3 Unplug any auxiliary power units Because the power supplies are already off the sequence for removing auxiliary power cords is not important 4 Unplug the system from the AC outlet Installing the Control Unit 2 45 Powering Down the System mmm 2 46 Installing the Control Unit Installing Telephones and Adjuncts The control unit supports the MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 10DP MLX 20L and MLX 28D telephones with or without Direct Station Selectors DSSs as well as analog multiline and single line telephones It also supports various adjuncts which may require Multi Function Modules MFMs or other adapters for installation This chapter provides installation instructions for the following procedures E Installing Multi Function Modules m Installing adjuncts m Installing Direct Station Selectors E Assembling MLX telephones Connecting telephones to the
233. eshoot the processor If problem persists troubleshoot the processor Troubleshoot module and or processor If problem persists troubleshoot the processor Continued on next page 2 6 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Error Logs Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description 0009 000A 0008 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 FRIGID START System was restarted and initialized to default programming This error is also logged after a System Erase POWER UP COLD START A RAM failure was detected in the processor System programming is okay CARD INSERTED REMOVED SLOT STREAM CNT EXCEEDED Slot has generated excessive interrupts FMWR NOT IN STANDBY MODE Module firmware is not in standby mode COMMAND BUFFER FULL TASK RUNNING TOO LONG INVALID SLOT INTERRUPT Cannot determine module responsible for generating the interrupt STACK OVERFLOW Processor problem Action If the processor was removed while in use the system may perform a frigid start due to loss of system programming Restore system as described in System Programming and Maintenance SPM or in Appendix D Backing up with a Memory Card If problem persists troubleshoot the processor No action required If problem persists troubleshoot the module If problem persists troubleshoot the module If problem persists troubleshoot the processor and module No action required howe
234. esponse IVR applications Intercom dial tone testing 7 6 Interference IROB in Range Out of Building protector see In Range Out of Building protector IS Ill Integrated Solution Ill see Integrated Solution III IS Ill IVR Integrated Voice Response applications see Integrated Voice Response IVR applications IN 4 Installation K Key mode Release 2 0 and earlier 9 1649 17 ss modifying processor for 9 1 0 9 13 L Lightning protection 2 14 2 Line jack labeling Loop start trunk testing Loudspeaker paging connection 3 29 oS O DTMF signaling multizone with background music Magic on Hold and bidirectional paging single zone_with customer supplied amplifier 3 32 single zone with Music on Hold 3 36 single zone with PagePac Plus single zone with UPAM3 3213 33 _ M Magic on Hold MERLIN Identifier Ba S y O 7 MERLIN MAIL Meee req 8 19 overview 8 17 17 Bgo 19 ports required 8 17 17 MERLIN PFC Phone Fax Copier Behind Switch mode 8 21 D hardware requirements a Hybrid PBX and Key BeTa overview 8 20 MFM Multi Function Ntodute Function Module MFM Mirage headpiece Index MLX telephone assembly backplate 3 56 1 3 57 button sesignment ad considerations 3 48 deskstand display extension label 3 51 43 52 handset holder 3 5243 53 line cords mounting
235. ew of procedures and considerations for installation of the MDW 9000 telephone For more detailed information see the installation guide that comes with the telephone m f possible place the radio module of a wireless telephone in the same room and on the same wall as the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit A minimum distance of 3 ft is required between the radio base and the control unit The radio module must be within 24 ft of a properly grounded 3 prong AC outlet that is not controlled by a wall switch and connects to the control unit through an analog multiline jack with a line connector Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 57 Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit m The charging base station requires only a three prong AC outlet that is not connected to a wall switch E The telephone handset must be within range of the radio base The indoor range is 400 through 600 ft and the outdoor range is up to 1000 ft m Except while charging the handset does not need to be located near the charging base Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit The way you connect telephones to the control unit depends on the number of telephones you are connecting For 24 telephones or less use a direct connection For 25 telephones or more use cross connect fields For building cross connect fields use one of the following wiring kits E Interconnect Wire This complete wiring kit contains 110 jack panel blocks a
236. f the Maintenance and Troubleshooting guide Run a demand test by entering the test mode Power down the system if required See Powering Down the System later in this chapter for instructions Remove the module by pushing up firmly on the tab at the bottom rear of the module While holding up the tab swing the bottom of the module towards you and away from the carrier Lift up the module to disengage it from the rod on the top of the carrier Inspect the module for visible damage Insert the new module See Figure 2 10 10 Restore the module Refer to Chapter 7 Initializing and Testing System for instructions 11 Connect the trunk and extension cords 12 Attach a tag error printout and any information that will help identify any visible problems or failure symptoms Installing the Control Unit 2 41 Replacing a Module Figure 2 13 Removing Modules from the Carrier 2 42 Installing the Control Unit Connecting the Control Unit to an AC Outlet Connecting the Control Unit to an AC Outlet A N A CAUTION Make sure the AC outlet has been tested for proper grounding The outlet should be 117 V AC 60 Hz 3 wire phase neutral ground See AC Outlet Tests earlier in this chapter for instructions To prevent someone from accidentally shutting off the power do not connect the control unit to a switch controlled outlet The AC outlet should be within 5 ft 152 cm
237. f this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense For furtiar ECC formations ees Appenanc A Customer Support Iniermation Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicable aux appareils num riques de la class A prescribes clans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Trademarks ACCULINK Accunet MERLIN II MERLIN LEGEND Magic on Hold and MultiQuest are registered trademarks and AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System MERLIN MAIL MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 10DP MLX 20L MLX 28D and PassageWay are trademarks of AT amp T in the U S and other countries UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc Ordering Information The ordering number for this document is 555 630 140 To order this document call the AT amp T Customer Information Center at 1 800 432 6600 in Canada 1 800 255 1242 For more information about AT amp T documents refer to the section entitled Related Documents in About This Book The Pocket Reference
238. fed digital 800 offering for inward calling memory card Storage medium similar in function to a floppy disk that allows information to be added to or obtained from the communication system through the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module MERLIN Identifier Adjunct that allows users to receive store and use information provided by caller identification services provided by the local telephone company MERLIN Mail Voice Application that provides automated attendant call Messaging System answering and voice mail services on the system Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 21 Glossary MFM MLX 10 or MLX 10D telephone MLX 10DP MLX 20L telephone MLX 28D telephone mode codes modem modem data station Multi Function Module Adapter that has a tip ring mode for answering machines modems fax machines and tip ring alerts and an SAA mode for 48 VDC alerts Installed inside an MLX telephone and is used to connect optional equipment to the telephone The optional equipment and the telephone operate simultaneously and independently 10 line button digital telephone offered with MLX 10D or without MLX 10 a 2 line by 24 character display Same as an MLX 10D except it has an adjunct in the back for connecting the Passageway Direct Connect Solution application 20 line button digital telephone with a 7 line by 24 character display 28 line button digital telephone with a 2 line by 24 character displ
239. for instructions 12 Reconnect the D8W cord s connecting the SMDR printer and or system programming PC 13 Attach a tag to the old processor Use the tag to identify any visible problems and relevant error reports Replacing the Feature Module NOTE This section applies only to releases earlier than Release 3 0 A CAUTION Make sure that you have a backup of system programming before replacing the feature module See Backing Up System Programming To replace the feature module follow the steps below 1 Make sure system power is off 2 Remove the processor from the carrier a Press up on the tab on the bottom rear of the module b Pull the bottom of the module away from the carrier c Lift upward to disengage the module from the rod on the top of the carrier 3 Place the processor on a flat surface 4 Grasp both metal rings on the outside of the feature module and pull straight up Control Unit Problems 4 31 Pr r_Problem A CAUTION Grasping only one of the rings may cause damage to components on the processor circuit board or feature module 5 Check the HDR4 header on the processor circuit board for proper mode operation For more information about modifying the mode see blot Installation Figure 4 5 Replacing the Feature Module 4 32 Control Unit Problems Module Problems 6 Align the connectors on the new feature module with the connectors in the processor see Fig 7 Firmly press the new feature
240. formation use any maintenance or system programming feature that may lead to the root of the problem See Access Log for Maintenance and System Programming in Chapter 2 for adltonal information See System Programming for information about system programming and the Inspect function Check the Power Supply If the error logs indicate the power supply as the source of the problem see Power Supply Problems in Chapter 4 Check the Processor If the error logs indicate the processor as the source of the problem use the following as a guideline to check the processor m Back up system programming System programming can be backed up to a floppy disk using SPM For Release 3 0 system programming can be backed up to a memory card and later using SPM or the MLX 20L console See Appendix D Backing Up with a Memory Card for more information m See Processor Problems in Chapter 4 to troubleshoot the processor Check the Modules If the error logs indicate any modules see Module Problems in Chapter 4 Check the Control Unit Carrier Within the control unit the last possible cause of a problem is the carrier If the carrier is damaged it must be replaced See Carrier Problems in Chapter 4 for instructions Introduction 1 25 Unit Loads Check the Trunks Troubleshoot the trunks that are connected to the control unit See Chapter 5 Central Office Problems Check
241. from the smaller copper foil shield to expose the adhesive Check the positioning of the foil shields before sticking them to the side of the module Once in place the foil is difficult to remove 5 Position the foil on the upper part of the module and work out any air bubbles as you press the foil firmly in place 2 20 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Power Supply TT 6 Peel the backing paper from the larger copper foil shield to expose its adhesive 7 Position the foil on the lower part of the module a The shields must meet b They should not overlap or have any space between them Installing the Control Unit 2 21 Lisle the Power Supply Upper Copper Foil Shield Lower Copper Foil Shield lf Power Unit Information Label z 2 Zz UL Label or CSA Label Figure 2 6 Installing a Copper Shield in the Power Supply 8 Tuck the foil shield tightly along the ledge or crease of the housing and work out any air bubbles as you press the foil firmly in place 9 With the copper foil shield in place put the power unit information label on the lower piece of foil 10 Attach the UL or CSA label on the power supply below the copper foil shield 2 22 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Power Supply Installing the Power Supply Module in the Carrier 1 Lower the power supply module hook onto the rod on top of the carrier 2 Make sure the connector on the module mates properly wi
242. g Forms Also you may need to know the interface codes for network facilities These codes are shown in Table 4 2 by trunk type and adapter type Table 4 2 Central Office Network Interface Codes Federal Interface Trunk Type Code for Trunk Network Interface LS central office trunk 02LS2 RJ11C RU14C RJ21 GS central office trunk 02GS2 RJ11C RJ14C RJ21 DID 02 RV2 T RJ11C RJ14C RJ21 OPS 0L13C RJ11C Tie trunk TL31M RJ2GX DS1 04DU9 B RJ48C X 04DU9 C See note below NOTE The preferred network interface is the RJ48X If a customer s site uses the RJ48X interface and the customer s equipment does not provide connection the T1 trunk s receive pair is looped back to the transmit pair This simplifies troubleshooting the T1 trunk from the central office In most installations the network interface is connected through a cross connect field to the control unit However for systems with fewer than 24 extensions you can connect the trunk wires directly to the control unit When constructing wiring fields between the network interface and the control unit you must order hardware as individual parts Do not use Interconnect Wiring or Systimax wiring kits Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 3 Wiring RJ21X Interface The RJ21X network interface has a female 50 pin 25 pair amphenol connector as shown in Figure 4 1 To connect the RJ21X interface to the control unit you must build a wi
243. g interface that multiplexes twenty four 64 kbps channels into a single 1 544 Mbps stream Direct Station Selector 60 button adjunct that enhances the call handling capabilities of an MLX 20L or MLX 28D telephone used as an operator console data terminal equipment Equipment that makes the endpoints in a connection over a data connection for example a data terminal personal computer host computer or printer dual tone multifrequency signaling Touch tone signaling from telephones using the voice transmission path DTMF signaling provides 12 distinct signals each representing a dialed digit or character and each composed of two voiceband frequencies EE E E amp M signaling EIA EIA 232 D Electronic Switching System endpoint Trunk supervisory signaling used between two communications systems in which signaling information is transferred through 2 state voltage conditions on the Ear and Mouth leads for analog applications and through two bits for digital applications See also tie trunk Electronic Industries Association Physical interface specified by the HA that transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of 50 ft 15 m See ESS Final destination in the path of an electrical or telecommunications signal Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 13 Glossary mm Ee ESF ESS expansion carrier extension extension jack extension prog
244. g list shows the old term on the left and the new term on the right trunk module trunk jack station station jack analog data station digital data station analog voice and analog data station digital voice and analog data station analog data only station digital data only station digital voice and digital data station Typographical Conventions line trunk module line trunk jack extension extension jack modem data station 7500B data station analog voice and modem data MLX voice and modem data modem data only station 75005 data only station MLX voice and 7500B data station Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the information presented Example It is very important that you follow these steps You must attach the wristband before touching the connection The part of the headset that fits over one or both ears is called a headpiece If you press the Feature button on an MLX display telephone the display lists telephone features you can select A programmed Auto Dial button gives you instant access to an inside or outside number Purpose Italics indicate emphasis Italics also set off special terms The names of fixed feature factory imprinted buttons appear in bold The names of programmed buttons are printed as regular text Continued on next page Maintenance and Troubleshooting xvii Product Selai Labels Typographical Conventions Conti
245. g the Interlocking Post below Checking the Interlocking Post If the power supply is not working follow the steps below to check the interlocking post 1 Follow Steps 1 4 in Replacing the Power Supply later in this chapter to remove the power supply then return to Step 2 below 2 Check the small cylindrical interlocking post on the carrier that locks into the power supply Clan EM If the post is broken replace the carrier Control Unit Problems 4 3 Power supply Problems TE Crm Interlocking Post V Aa Figure 4 1 Power Supply Interlocking Post 3 Ifthe interlocking post is not broken reinstall the power supply follow Steps 5 8 in Replacing the Power Supply later in this chapter Replacing the Ring Generator If tip ring devices such as single line telephones fax machines and answering machines do not ring and an older 012 module is installed try the procedure below 4 4 Control Unit Problems Power Supply Problems Current 012 modules contain built in ring generators apparatus code 517G13 28 or higher letter If tip ring devices connected to a newer module do not ring see later in this chapter See Table 4 1 below to determine which 012 module is installed Table 4 1 PEC and Apparatus Codes for 012 Modules 012 Module PEC App Code with Ring Generator 61494 517G13 28 or higher letter Basic Telephone 61487 517E13 or without ring generator
246. ge screw holes 11 Repeat Steps 8 10 until the faulty carrier is removed Replacing the Carrier After removing the faulty carrier use the steps below as a guideline for installing a new carrier 1 Install the replacement carrier s See nstallation for instructions 2 Replace the modules with all cords connected as they were before Checking System and Slot Status In addition to checking error logs the access log and running module tests you can request System Status and Slot Status information for each module System Status The power supply processor 400EM module and 100D module are the only modules that have LEDs The System Status screen displays simulated LEDs for the processor and each of these modules but not for the power supply 4 86 Control Unit Problems Checking System and Slot Status o _ SOOSOCSCNONNCN The System Status procedure allows you to check simulated LEDs for the processor and other modules This is explained in detail in Reading the System Status Screen later in this chapter Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance System Status PC Procedure F6 F1 F1 To check System Status follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the System option Maintenance Make a selection System Sl ot Port Exit E1 2 Select Status System Make a selection Status Upgrd Instll Error Log
247. ges the Message LEDs on his or her telephone is on provided that a physical telephone has been assigned to that mailbox Trunks to be answered by MERLIN MAIL should be programmed for reliable far end disconnect Callers who dial from rotary telephones cannot use MERLIN MAIL features The system may need more touch tone receivers if m Single line telephone users do not get a dial tone m MERLIN MAIL fails to transfer calls m Calls fail to ring or go to coverage prematurely m Message waiting lights fail to light MERLIN MAIL and AT amp T Attendant should not be used on the same system Programming of MERLIN MAIL is through a touch tone interface 8 18 Installing Applications MERLIN MAIL A MERLIN MAIL has an EIA 232 D serial port and an external modem to support remote diagnostics You cannot use the first four logical IDs on a 008 OPT module to physically connect telephone equipment however you can use the extension numbers of these logical IDs for phantom extensions Additional touch tone receivers TTRs may be needed for the 012 module to handle a large number of voice connections The MERLIN MAIL unit can be desk or wall mounted and should be placed in an area with low humidity and proper ventilation Follow the power and ground procedures for T R telephones that require auxiliary power Hardware Requirements The following hardware is required for MERLIN MAIL installation MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging S
248. gram 4 320 0 D procedure Forced installation Dialtone 3 8 codes displayed during 4 25 error conditions during 4 25 E summary Frigid start 1 22 4 17 Error codes Front cover TA 2 1 or later Error events 1 16 Error log checking 1 23 interpreting error codes 2 5 2 18 overview 2 1 printing trouble accessing 1 24 H Housing installing Release 2 0 or earlier Release 2 1 or later 5 30 5 33 removing 1 15 Hybrid PBX mode IN 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Index I Incoming trunk 5 4 Interlocking post Internal loopback test errors interpreting results procedure summary 4 45 Jack assignment 1 23_ __ K Key mode 1 27_ _ i O L LEDs 4 86 4 87 4 88 Line noise 1 6 Cid M Maintenance programming on site remote 1 7 strategy 1 18 1 26 _ terminal 1 1 1 2 oo tools 1 2 Maintenance busy causes 5 6 overview 5 4 status extension trunk 5 7 45 9 Memory card inserting 4 20 4 21 messages 4 26 4 28 MLX telephone display buttons 3 8 tests 3 6 3 8 MLX 20L console failure 1 3 setting up diagram 1 4 procedure 1 3 Modem dialing 1 10 1 11 resetting 5 22 5 24 Module problems 100D 4 70 4 85 persistent 4 37 Module tests busy out or reset 4 35 4 37 component check notes 4 35 _ oS O overview 4 33 434
249. gramming MLX modules Check the error logs Da erneer d a Rave any paresor promene Hira einai Resolve any processor problems Busy out or reset the module errors Run the Internal Loopback test errors 6 Check the error logs Record the errors on the repair tag and continue with the next step 7 Run the BchLoopback test Wi Scalers for MLX modules only Run the CSU Loopback test ee for 100D modules only v 9 Replace the module 10 Restore the module Figure 4 6 Module Test Process 4 34 Control Unit Problems Module Problems Considerations Review the following items before you begin a module test procedure System Components Before running a module test make sure the following system components are working Power supply m Processor Save the system programming onto a floppy disk See System Programming and Maintenance SPM To back up onto a memory card see Appendix D Backing Up with a Memory Card Maintenance Terminal MLX 20L console or PC To run tests on the MLX module connected to the MLX 20L console you must run the test from the PC not from the MLX 20L console Busy Out Reset Before running a module test busy out or reset the modules Busy Out is the best method but it will not work if any line or extension is on a stable call See later in this chapter for more information on these features
250. gramming and Maintenance SPM m Integrated Solution Ill IS Ill UNIX System based products AUDIX Voice Power IS Ill Call Accounting System IS CAS System Programming and Maintenance SPM IS III Fax Attendant System IS III Voice Messaging Systems and Touch Tone Receivers The following applications are voice messaging systems VMSs MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System m AT amp T Attendant m AUDIX Voice Power IS III m Automated Document Delivery System ADDS Considerations You must connect applications that use mode codes to integrated VMI ports Applications that do not use mode codes such as AT amp T Attendant connect to generic VMI ports The T R ports on 012 basic telephone modules are programmed as either generic VMI or integrated VMI A VMS requires a certain number of touch tone receivers TTRs depending on the number of VMS ports see Table 8 1 The following modules supply TTRs 012 400 400 GS LS TTR and 008 OPT but the 008 OPT module does not support VMS applications 8 2 Installing Applications Automated Document Delivery System A Table 8 1 TTRs Required by VMS No of TTRs No of 400 or No of Required No of 400 GS LS TTR VMS Ports 012 Modules Modules 1 0 2 1 0 3 2 0 4 2 0 6 3 1or2 Oor1 8 4 1or2 Oor1 12 6 20r3 Oort Automated Document Delivery System Automated Document Delivery System ADDS is a computer based system for faxing documents ADDS sto
251. h each other You need the following hardware for the following procedure 248B adapters u 355AF 355A adapters 400B2 power adapters D8W cords D6AP power cords D8AM modular crossover cable M7U null modem cable 25 pin cable Z3A2 Z3A4 ADUs 2012D transformer m Z200A EMI filter To connect a CAT printer on a different AC outlet first make the connections at the control unit then at the printer Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 11 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit Follow the steps below to make the connections at the control unit Refer to throughout the procedure 1 Plug the short end of a Z200A EMI cord into the SMDR jack on the control unit 2 Plug the other end of the Z200A EMI cord into a 355AF adapter Plug the 355AF into one end of an M7U null modem cable 4 Plug the other end of the M7U null modem cable into the 25 pin female connector on a Z3A4 ADU Plug one end of a D8W cord into the WALL jack on the Z3A4 ADU 6 Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a modular jack on the DBAM modular crossover cable 7 Plug the other end of the D8AM modular crossover cable into the top jack on the 400B2 power adapter 8 Plug the 400B2 power adapter into the wall jack for the control unit Make sure the building wiring is set up so that the wall jack for the control unit can communicate with the wall jack for the printer 9 Plug one end of a D6AP cord into the 2012D 50M transformer If you are usi
252. h one that is Known to be working If the problem is gone when using the known good module replace the module and restart Test the trunk with a single line telephone If the problem is not in the trunk replace the module with one that is known to be working If the problem is gone when using the known good module replace the module and restart Test the trunk with a single line telephone If the problem is not in the trunk replace the module with one that is known to be working If the problem is gone when using the known good module replace the module and restart Continued on next page 2 12 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Error Logs eX Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Descrption 7404 7801 7802 7803 7804 7805 STUCK RINGING Communication problems between the module and central office If this error occurs twice consecutively the trunk is busied out automatically whether Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled or not NOT IN NORMAL OP MODE Module not in normal operation mode Reported in background module check SANITY INT NOT GENERATED Only applies to modules that have extension jacks NO PORT BOARDS AVAILABLE This error is reported when modules are not present INVALID SANITY RESPONSE This error occurs when a sanity test gets invalid responses Applies only to modules that have extension jacks INVALID SLOT NUMBER Rarely occurs Software could not proce
253. hat system software has been correctly installed and that the default system programming is present No error condition is displayed on the error status display 12 Restore system programming After about 10 minutes check to see if the red alarm status LED is lit RED If it is not the installation was successful If the LED is lit check the error log for one of the following m XRAY monitor ROM failure a SYS software ROM failure These indicate a ROM failure and unsuccessful installation If the forced installation was performed due to corrupt system software it is possible that the backup of system programming might also be corrupt Verify that the error condition that required a forced installation of software is not still present Error Conditions During Forced Installation The error code status display on the processor module or the maintenance screen informs you of problems during or after a forced installation See Table 4 2 for error codes displayed Also see the screens following the table for errors displayed on the maintenance console or PC The following error conditions can only occur during or immediately after a forced installation Instructions for recovery follow the description of each error condition Control Unit Problems 4 25 Processor Problems Table 4 2 Codes Displayed on the Error Status Display During Forced Installation Code Meaning Action L Upgrade is in progress No action required U I
254. he least significant bit every sixth frame per channel is used for signaling in that channel ROM read only memory Computer memory that can be read but cannot be changed S SAA Supplemental Alert Adapter Device that permits 48 VDC alerting equipment to be connected to an analog multiline telephone jack so that people working in noisy or remote areas of a building can be alerted to incoming calls SA buttons Telephone buttons that provide a single interface to users for both inside and outside calling SDN Software Defined Network AT amp T private networking service created by specialized software within the public network SID station identification GL 28 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary simplex signaling signaling single line telephone slot SMDR SMDR printer Software Defined Network special character SPM square key station station jack Station Message Detail Recording ee Transmission of signals in one direction only across a telecommunications channel Sending of control and status information between devices to set up maintain or cease a connection such as a telephone call Industry standard touch tone or rotary dial telephone that handles only one call at a time and is connected to the system via an extension jack on a basic 012 or 008 OPT module Position in a carrier for a module numbered from 0 processor module Station Message Detail Recording Featur
255. he steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Maintenance Make a selection System SI ot Port Exit F3 2 Select the Modem option Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Modem Station B Channel RS232 Port RS232 Port2 Exit F6 3 Select Reset Modem Port Make a selection B Reset Exit Central Office Problems 5 23 Checking Ports es Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 4 Select Yes Modem Port Reset Do you want to continue Yes Cancel Exit E2 The screen below is shown until Reset fininshes or fails Modem Port Reset Reset in Progress Exit The screen below appears when Reset is completed successfully Modem Port Reset Reset Successfully Compl et ed Exit The screen below appears when Reset fails If this occurs exit and try again Modem Port Reset Reset FAILED 5 24 Central Office Problems Sule Ports Auditing DS1 PRI B Channels The Auditing Lines and Auditing Calls procedures initiate an audit Once an audit is initiated you need to wait for the far end to send a message which usually takes about four minutes After waiting four minutes check the error logs to see if any new PRI errors have occurred Auditing Lines If troubleshooting indicates problems with PRI lines between the control unit and the CO this audit if successful fixes the pro
256. hear tone ringing and the red and green LEDs on the terminal should flash alternately 2 If the LEDs do not light replace the telephone with one that works If the problem is resolved go to Step 4 3 If the LEDs do not light retest the original telephone Plug it directly into the appropriate jack on the control unit using a cord that is known to be working If this resolves the problem replace the original cord or local power unit if used 4 Move the T P switch to its normal position The ringing tone should stop and the LEDs should be off 5 If any part of the test fails replace the telephone If the time appears on the display but incoming call information does not move the T P switch on the side of the telephone to the center position Voice Transmission Problems If the telephone does not receive tones check the control unit and wiring with a telephone that works 3 4 Telephone Problems Fixing Telephone Problems Single Line Telephone Problems If more than one single line telephone cannot dial correctly even though they are receiving calls use the steps below to test the touch tone receivers TTRs for a single line telephone 1 Pick up the handset then dial 04 and the 2 digit number of the TTR you want to test m f you hear a busy tone the receiver is in use off hook m f you hear a reorder tone you have misdialed or have reached an invalid TTR Try again m If you hear a dial tone go to Step 2 2 Dia
257. heck the System Information Report or ask to speak with the system manager 2 You can change the password without knowing the old password only when you perform on site maintenance through the ADMIN jack 5 When you hear the modem tone hang up If nothing appears on the SPM screen press Enter 1 6 Enter the password When the Password prompt appears type the password do not press Enter 1 The SPM main menu appears and you are ready to proceed with remote maintenance Introduction 1 9 Using SPM E C2 CtC lt CS SCO Dialing the Modem Directly To dial the modem directly follow the steps below 1 Start SPM When the Welcome message appears press any key 2 Enter the command to put the modem in originate mode this command varies depending on the type of modem you are using 3 Pick up the handset on the T R telephone and dial the remote access trunk number This is possible only if a trunk is programmed as a dedicated trunk for remote access to the built in modem 4 If the dial tone begins with three short tones followed by a steady tone dial the remote access barrier code from the T R telephone otherwise go to Step 5 If you do not know the remote access barrier code contact the customer s system manager or check Form 3a Incoming Trunks Remote Access If the system accepts the barrier code you hear ringing followed by dial tone NOTE You can change the barrier code without knowing the old one only when
258. heir right 2 22 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Telephone Problems Once you isolate a problem to the telephone or a group of telephones you can run various tests to check a telephone s operation Use the procedure below as a general guideline for troubleshooting telephones 1 Replace the telephone or adjunct with one that works properly 2 If the problem persists connect the telephone directly to the control unit using a cord that works properly m lf this solves the problem replace the original cord m The power supply may be shorted or open If the wiring has been crushed or severed replace it a Test the power supply for 48 VDC with a voltmeter or by reconnecting the telephone or adjunct b Ifthe test for 48 VDC fails replace the circuit pack in the telephone or adjunct A CAUTION A faulty circuit pack has the potential to damage the power supply which can cause widespread damage throughout the system 3 If the problem persists replace the mounting cord 4 lf the problem persists continue as described below Telephone Problems 3 1 Fixing Telephone Problems If you change the jack assignment of any telephone be sure to record the extension jack change on Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks See Appendix B System Numbering Forms for details Fixing Telephone Problems If a reported telephone problem matches any symptom described in Table 3 1 refer to the prope
259. hnical support organization Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance Slot gt Dial00 gt Enter sDernand Test gt Poke Line 4 left button gt Poke Line 4 left button gt Continue PC Procedure F6 F2 Type 00 F10 F2 F2 F2 gt F1 To perform Poke follow the steps below Console Display I nstructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit E2 2 Specify Slot 00 Slot Dial or type 00 then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 00 Backspace Exit Control Unit Problems 4 15 Processor Problems A Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 3 Select the Demand Test Slot 00 Make a selection Status Demand Test 4 Select Poke two times Demand Test Slot 00 Poke and System Erase are not Make a selection displayed which prevents customers Peek from accidentally changing the Poke processor memory System Erase Press the Poke button the left button F2 Exit for Line 4 twice F2 5 Select Continue Poke WARNING SYSTEM MEMORY WILL BE MODI FIED Continue Cancel F1 6 Follow the instructions from your technical support organization Slot 00 EnterHexAddress aaaaaaaa Enter Backspace Exit 4 16 Control Unit Problems Processor Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Dxaaaaaaaa Enter data
260. hone that the system supports You must connect agent telephones to the first 58 telephone jacks on the control unit CMS allows only a 2 digit method to specify an extension number jacks 59 to 144 are designated by 4 digits Because CMS is compatible only with 2 digit dialing do not use flexible numbering on any telephone associated with CMS Installing Applications 8 9 Call Management System The two CMS interface card ports on the PC must be connected to two analog multiline telephone jacks on the same analog multiline telephone module these jacks must be operator positions If two operator position jacks are not available on the same module another analog multiline telephone module must be installed in the control unit to provide these jacks CMS trunks can be loop start ground start T1 emulated ground start or Primary Rate Interface PRI Up to four CMS external alerts can be used for agents and supervisors For example an alert sounds if the number of calls waiting to be answered nears a programmed threshold AT amp T Attendant can be used to direct callers to the appropriate CMS group To play music for waiting callers you must attach a Music On Hold MOH product that is compatible with an MOH coupler NOTE If the customer uses equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials the customer may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the Americ
261. ht Service LED turns on 2 Pick up the handset and press a button for an outside trunk 3 Dial the outside number that reaches an operator console that is programmed to receive Night Service coverage 4 Verify that the telephones assigned to the Night Service group are ringing 5 Have someone pick up the handset at a telephone in the Night Service group Verify that you have good two way communication 6 At both telephones hang up 7 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each operator console that is programmed to receive Night Service coverage 8 Test telephones that are programmed for Night Service with Outward Restriction a Pick up a handset on a restricted telephone and verify that outside call are not allowed b Using the password make an outside call Initializing and Testing the System 7 15 Testing the System c Hang up the handset d Press the Recall button and dial the password On an MLX telephone without a programmed Recall button press the Feature button and dial 775 and the password before picking up the handset e Pick up the handset and make an outside call f Verify that you have good two way communication and hang up 9 At the operator console press the Night Service button again If you used a password in Step 1 enter the password again Verify that the Night Service LED turns off Testing the Dictation System If dictation equipment has not been installed skip this test Place a call to verify that
262. ial or type nnnn then select Enter Enter Station number nnnn Backspace Exit 4 Select Status Station xxxx XXXX extension number entered Make a selection in Step 3 status Busy out Restore Exit F1 5 10 Central Office Problems necking Ports The maintenance busy status for the extension selected is displayed as a Yes or a No in the field line 6 on the screen below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Station XXXX Dial Plan xxxx Slot Port sspp Logicld xxx Profile XXXXXXXXXX Maintenance Busy Select Next to see the status of the Exit Next next extension F10 Busying Out a Trunk Summary Console Procedure Menu Mai ntenance gt Port oline Trunk gt Dial the dial plan no gt Enter Busy Out PC Procedure F6 F3 F1 Type the dial plan no gt F10 F2 To busy out a trunk follow the steps below 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Mai ntenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit F3 Central Office Problems 5 11 Checking Ports Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Select the Line Trunk option Port Make a Selection B Li ne Trunk Modem Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Exit Enter F1 3 Specify the dial plan number line for the trunk nnn 801 to 880 Line Trunk Dial or type nnn then select Enter Enter line number nnn Backspace Ex
263. ications system or the telephone network off premises See OPT telephone ones density Requirement for channelized DS7 service to the public network that eight consecutive zeros cannot occur in a digital data stream on hook Telephone is said to be on hook when the handset is hung up the speakerphone is turned off and the user is not using a headset to connect to the communications system or the telephone network OPT off premises telephone Single line telephone or other tip ring device connected to the system by an 008 OPT module in the control unit Appears as an inside extension to the system but may be physically located away from the system OPX off premises extension GL 24 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary TTT out of band signaling Signaling that uses the same path as voice frequency transmission and in which the signaling is outside the band used for voice frequencies SS P parity PassageWay Direct Connect Solution pass through PBX PC PCMCIA memory card personal line The addition of a bitto a bit string so that the total number of ones is odd or even used to detect and correct transmission errors Set of software applications to provide an interface between a personal computer and the system cardfile telephone programming application call log and viewer incoming call management and identification and applications manager Connection from the internal modem to an
264. in the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu Maintenance Sl ot See Busy Out and Reset earlier in this chapter for additional information Interrupting the Test You can interrupt the test Test Once or Repetitive by selecting Exit Test Failure If the test fails record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module Restore Restore the module if it successfully completes all module tests and the errors no longer occur Restore is in the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu Maintenance Slot See the Restore procedure earlier in this chapter for additional information To run the Board Controller Module Test use the following steps 4 50 Control Unit Problems Module Problems pE Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Mai ntenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit E2 2 Specify the slot number nn 00 to 17 Slot Dial or type nn then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit 3 Select Demand Test Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Make a selection Status Demand Test For all MLX modules BchLoopback is Busy Out Reset also displayed as an option on this Restore Upgrade screen For 100D modules CSU 1 pbk Error Events andClock are also Exit displayed as options
265. in male connector on the Z3A2 ADU A CAUTION if the PC is in a building outside the main building contro unit location you must install an ADU and an additional protector in each building The ADUs and protectors provide both the control unit and the PC with additional protection against lightning inadvertent contact with power lines and power currents induced by nearby power lines For more information see the installation notes packaged with the ADU Plug one end of a D8W cord into the WALL jack on the Z3A2 ADU and connect the other end to an ADU crossover cable Plug the other end of the ADU crossover cable into one of the jacks ona 400B2 power adapter Plug one end of a D6AP cord into the 400B2 power adapter Plug the other end of the D6AP cord into a 2012D 50M transformer Plug the 400B2 power adapter into a wall jack BRIA 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block E If you plug the 400B2 into a wall jack make sure the building wiring has been set up so that the wall jack near the control unit is connected to the wall jack near the PC f you plug the 400B2 into a BR1A 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block use 4 pair plug ended cable to connect the BRIA 4P adapter or connecting block to the wall jack near the PC Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 5 Seisein a PC to the Control Unit Processor Module D8W 355AF EIA Adapter Crossover Cable Ee E1A 232 0 MT
266. ing MLX Telephones Figure 3 35 Rotating the Handset Holder 5 Prepare the handset holder for wall mounting a Remove the handset holder by pushing it up and pulling it out See Figure 3 34 b Rotate the handset holder 180 degrees and replace it in its slot See Figure 3 35 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 53 Assembling MLX Telephones Figure 3 36 Replacing the Extension Label 6 Replace the extension label and plastic cover a Insert one end into the slot and snap the other end into place See Figure 3 36 b Ifyou are mounting an MLX 10 MLX 10D or MLX 10DP wall telephone go to Step 7 If you are assembling a desk telephone go to Step 8 7 Wall mounting an MLX 10 MIX 10DP or MIX 10D telephone a Turn over the telephone and remove the jack guard from the TEL OTHER jack area set the telephone aside b Unpack the 630B Phonemount and remove the modular jack from the backplate c Route the D8W cord or DIW cable through the hole in the backplate and have it exit at the top of the backplate leave 10 in 25 cm of cord to connect the telephone See Figure 3 37 3 54 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Assembling MLX Telephones Figure 3 37 Mounting the Backplate d Attach the backplate to the wall see the instructions provided with the 6306 Phonemount e Insert the two short screws provided with the Phonemount into the mounting plate Be sure to thread the upper screw through the jack guard See Figure 3
267. ing group Team of individuals who answer the same types of calls Call Management See CMS System GL 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary lt SES campus cable CAS CAT CCS centralized telephone programming central office Centrex channel channel service unit checksum circuit switched data call class of restriction Cable that runs between buildings connected to the same communications system Call Accounting System DOS or UNIX System based application that monitors and manages telecommunications costs Call Accounting Terminal Stand alone unit with a built in microprocessor and data buffer that provides simple call accounting at a low cost common channel signaling Signaling in which one channel of a group of channels carries signaling information for each of the remaining channels permitting each of the remaining channels to be used to nearly full capacity In the system s 100D module channel 24 can be designated as the signaling channel for channels 1 23 Programming of features on individual telephones performed at a central location by the system manager See also system programming and extension programming See CO Set of system features to which a user can subscribe on telephone lines trunks from the local telephone company Telecommunications transmission path for voice and or data See CSU Sum of ones in a sequence of ones and zeros used to detect or
268. ing lead 5 Dial a telephone number to verify dialing Also check that you have good two way transmission after the central office completes the connection Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 13 Labeling Trunks mm 6 If you find a central office trunk that does not have dial tone check for a bad adapter or loose connection lf adapters and wiring are in working order but you still do not hear dial tone notify the AT amp T Service Center acting as the customer s agent 7 If you cannot dial out on any of the trunks notify the AT amp T Service Center acting as the customer s agent Labeling Trunks You can have up to 80 central office line trunk jacks on the system This procedure describes how to label each D2R or D8W cord network interface jack and control unit module jack To label trunks follow the steps below 1 Review System Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks to determine each central office trunk assignment on the control unit 2 Place a green cord label at each end of every D2R or D8W cord These labels are packaged with the basic carrier The green label indicates the number of the central office line trunk jack to which the cord is connected Label the jacks on the termination blocks 4 Leave a copy of System Form 2c in a secure place near the control unit Installing the Channel Service Unit The Channel Service Unit CSU provides the interface between the 100D module a
269. installation instructions A CAUTION Take extreme care to make sure that you connect MLX phones only to MLX modules a mismatch could damage the ports and cause them to stop functioning Incorrect wiring can result in users not being ah e to place outgoing calls Make sure you use the proper cord For all GS LS modules E Use a D2R cable from an RJ11 jack E Do not use the Brand Rex Quad cab e from an E66 block If you cannot avoid using the Brand Rex Quad cable reverse the tip and ring leads at the E66 block to correct the mismatch E To avoid introducing power supply noise into system wiring allow at least 3 in 7 62 cm of clearance between the basic carrier s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located to the left of the control unit Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 59 Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit A WARNING National and local building codes specify the type of cable required for telecommunication wiring For example indoor wiring DIW cable cannot be used inside or on top of air plenums or ducts along hot pipes or across walkways Consult your local ordinances and regulations for proper cable selection Wiring a Telephone for Two Voice Pairs If an analog telephone requires either the Voice Announce to Busy feature or voice and data operating independently use a bridging adapter to assign two adjacent odd even telephone jacks for example 01 and 02 13 and 14 on an analog t
270. inter are within 14 ft 4 27 m and 50 ft 15 2 m respectively of the control unit refer to Connecting a CAT and Printer on the Same AC Outlet E f the CAT is either not grounded to the same AC outlet as the control unit or is more than 14 ft 4 27 m from the control unit refer to Connecting a CAT and Printer on a Different AC Outlet A CAUTION To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD avoid touching leads connectors pins and other components Wear a properly grounded wrist strap Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit You can connect any 1200 bpi serial printer set at no parity and one stop bit If necessary consult the printer s manual to ensure that these settings are in effect The system supports the following AT amp T printers m AT amp T 572 Printer m AT amp T 475 476 Printer Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 7 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit mm m AT amp T Call Accounting Terminal CAT Printer m AT amp T Call Accounting System Printer m AT amp T Applications Printer NOTE The AT amp T 570 printer is not compatible with the system Printer connection varies depending on the printer model whether the printer is grounded on the same AC outlet as the control unit and whether the printer is within 50 ft 15 2 m of the control unit The procedures covered in this chapter are described below Ifthe CAT serial printer is used with a CAT and is grounded to the sam
271. interruptible power supply unit load See UPS Measure of the power load drain of a module telephone or adjunct Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 31 Glossary UPS uninterruptible power supply Device that connects to the system to provide 117 VAC to the equipment when the commercial power source fails V VAC Alternating current voltage VDC Direct current voltage VMI voice messaging interface An enhanced tip ring port voice band channel voice mail voice messaging interface W WATS wink start tie trunk A transmission channel generally in the 300 3400 Hz frequency band Application that allows users to send messages to other extensions in the system forward messages received with comments and reply to messages See VMI Wide Area Telecommunications Service Service that allows calls to certain areas for a flat rate charge based on expected usage Tie trunk on which the originating end transmits an off hook signal and waits for the remote end to send back a signal a wink that it is ready for transmission GL 32 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Index 012 module apparatus codes 4 5 _ __ _ o o PEC codes 4 5 O O 100D module automatic tests 4 80 clock status procedure summary CSU Loopback Test error events 408 GS LS MLX module 551 T1 connection 4 74 A Access log checking reviewing 2 18 2 20 Alarm checking error
272. ion Okidata is a registered trademark of Okidata Corporation Microsoft is a registered trademark and Windows a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Ordering Information The ordering number for this document is 555 630 140 To order this document call the AT amp T Customer Information Center at 1 800 432 6600 in Canada 1 800 255 1242 For more information about AT amp T documents refer to the section entitled Related Documents in About This Book The Pocket Reference listed in that section provides full ordering information for replacement parts accessories and other compatible equipment or contact your AT amp T representative Support Telephone Number In the continental U S AT amp T provides a toll free customer helpline 24 hours a day Call the AT amp T Helpline at 1 800 628 2888 if you need assistance when installing or using your system Outside the continental U S contact your local AT amp T representative Warranty AT amp T provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability in Customer Support Information which follows Maintenance and Troubleshooting in this binder rrr Contents XV E 1 Introduction m Installation Sequence m System Forms i 1 1 1 2 m AC Power and Grounding 2 5 m Unit Loads 2 16 m Installing the Basic Carrier 2 17 m Installing the Power Supply 2 19 m installing the Auxiliary Power Unit 2 25 2 Insta
273. ion du minist re des Communications du Canada et la reparation AVIS L tiquette du ministere des Communications du Canada identifie le materiel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme a certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de telecommunications Le minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de telecommunication Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l enterprise utilises pour un service individual a ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformity aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la degradation du service clans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de telecommunication ne permettent pas que lon raccorde leur mat riel aux jacks d abonn sauf dans les cas pr cis pr vus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es par un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le fournisseur La compagnie de telecommu
274. ips may be needed since the Attendant is powered by wall mounted transformers 10 V AC Powering and grounding procedures must follow those established for T R telephones that require auxiliary power For more information consult AT amp T Attendant Installer s Guide MERLIN MAIL MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System provides the following integrated call management services m Automated Attendant m Call answering m Voice mail The number of incoming trunks and subscribers programmed for Automated Attendant service and the number of busy hour calls determine how many MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System jacks are required for the user s system See Table 8 2 Table 8 2 MERLIN MAIL Ports Required Number of Jacks Required 2 4 Incoming Trunks 1to6 7 to 18 Number of Subscribers or Busy Hour Calls 1 to 20 21 to 60 Installing Applications 8 17 MERLIN MAIL Considerations You cannot connect MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System to a system operating in Behind Switch mode MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System is available in 2 port and 4 port configurations Both models have four hours of message storage capacity You can use up to eight jacks on a 012 basic telephone module for MERLIN MAIL If you use all eight jacks for MERLIN MAIL you cannot connect any other devices to the module When using fewer than eight jacks you can use the remaining jacks for tip ring devices When a mailbox user receives voice mail messa
275. irect Inward Dialing DID This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the Public Switched Telephone Network when Answered by the called station Answered by the attendant Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment user Routed to a dial prompt This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched Telephone Network Permissible exceptions are when A call is unanswered A busy tone is received A reorder tone is received Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as not to provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules DOC Notification and Repair Information NOTICE The Canadian Department of Communications DOC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The DOC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction A 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Customer Support Information Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by m
276. is automatically put into a maintenance busy state When a trunk is in a maintenance busy state no outgoing calls can be placed on it However the trunk can still receive incoming calls 5 4 Central Office Problems Trunk Errors ON NOTE Maintenance busy does not apply to DID trunks since DID trunks cannot be used to make outgoing calls While the trunk is in a maintenance busy state the software periodically runs tests attempting to seize the trunk m If the seizure is unsuccessful the trunk stays in a maintenance busy state m lf the seizure is successful the trunk is placed back in service m If atest is running when an incoming call is received on the trunk the test is dropped and the call is processed No more than 50 percent of trunks in a pool can be maintenance busy at one time The only exceptions are as follows m User imposed maintenance busy for example module replacement Module maintenance busy for example a loss of service alarm in the 100D module E No external release at the central office end of the line Permanent Errors A permanent error is entered in the error logs when more than 50 percent of the trunks in a pool are maintenance busy When the maintenance busy level falls below 50 percent the system automatically removes the permanent error NOTE Make sure that modules are not in a maintenance busy state during a backup procedure Any module in a maintenance busy state is recorded as such
277. it 7 Plug the other end of the power unit line cord into the AUX POWER INPUT jack on the power supply 4 8 Control Unit Problems Power Supply Problems 48 VDC Auxiliary Auxiliary Power Power Input Unit 48 VDG Power Cord 5 i Ferrite rounc Cores g 6 6D Wire AUX Power Unit AC eD AC Power Cord Outlet Control Unit AC Power Cord Figure 4 3 Replacing an Auxiliary Power Supply A CAUTION Do not plug the power supply or the auxiliary power unit into the AC outlet until you are ready to turn on the system as described in Powering Up the System in Chapter 2 of Installation Do not attach the power cord s to any building surfaces Control Unit Problems 4 9 Power Supply Problems Replacing the Power Supply A WARNING Beware of hazardous voltages whenever the carrier connections are exposed use extreme caution do not touch them directly or with any type of tool Follow ail procedures carefully To remove the power supply module follow the steps below 1 If possible backup system programming on a memory card Release 3 0 only or floppy disk See System Programming and Maintenance SPM for information about backing up to a floppy For information about backing up to a PCMCIA memory card see Appendix D Backing Up with a Memory Card If the basic carrier s power supply fails you cannot back up system programming 2 Power down the s
278. it Enter 4 Select Busy Out Line Trunk xxx Xxx line number entered in Step 3 Make a Selection Status Busy out Restore Exit F2 The screen below is shown until Busy Out finishes or fails XXX line number entered in Step 3 Line Trunk Xxx Busy Out in Progress The screen below appears when Busy Out is completed successfully 5 12 Central Office Problems Checking Ports Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Line Trunk xxx XXX line number entered in Step 3 Busy Out Successfully Compl eted The screen below appears when Busy Out fails If this occurs exit and try again Line Trunk xxx XXX line number entered in Step 3 Busy Out FAILED Busying Out an Extension Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance gt Port Extension Dial the dial plan no gt Enter Busy Out PC Procedure E6 gt F3 gt F2 Type the dial plan no gt F10 F2 To busy out an extension follow the steps below Central Office Problems 5 13 Checking Ports Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit F3 2 Select the Station extension option Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Modem Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Exit Enter E2 3 Specify the dial plan extension number nnnn 1 to 4 digit extension number
279. it Problems 4 81 100D Module Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Specify the 2 digit slot number nn 00 to 17 Slot Dial or type nn then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit Enter 3 Select Error Events CSx xx slot number entered in Step 2 Make a selection Status Demand Test Busy out Reset Restore Error Events CSU pbk Clock Exit Upgrade F8 4 Select the current hour or a previous hour Error Events Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Hake a selection EE Current hr EE Previous hr Select Current hr F1 Exit or Previous hr F2 The current hour always begins at 00 and ends at the last complete 15 minute interval For example if the current time is 09 46 selecting Current hr displays the errors that have accumulated between 09 00 and 09 45 4 82 Control Unit Problems 100D Module Problems ee U UU The screen below displays the errors that have accumulated during the current hour Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Current hr Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 mm dd yy hh00 hh mm CurAlm aaaa MaxAlm aaaa MIS SLP ES BS SEC FS XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Exit The screen below displays the errors that have accumulated during the previous hour Previous hr Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 mm dd yy hh 00 hh mm CurAlm aaaa MaxAlm aaaa MIS SLP ES BS SEC FS
280. ital circuit switched or packet switched connections within the network and to other networks for national and international digital connectivity Data communications device that allows connection between an RS 232 DTE device and the control unit via MLX extension jacks on the 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX module jack Physical connection point to the system for a telephone trunk or other device Also called port K kbps Kilobits per second Key mode One of three modes of system operation in which the system uses personal lines on line buttons for outside calls with a separate interface ICOM buttons for internal calling See also Behind Switch mode and Hybrid PBX mode Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 19 Glossary LAN LDN LED line line and trunk assignment line coding line compensation line trunk line trunk jack line trunk and extension module local area network Arrangement of interconnected personal computers or terminals sometimes accessing a host computer sometimes sharing resources like files and printers Listed Directory Number light emitting diode Semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied light on a telephone Connection between extensions within the communications system or loop start communications path with CO often however used synonymously with trunk Assignment of lines and trunks connected to the system control unit to specific butto
281. juncts Basic telephone modem interface BTMI BTMI 2 off premises extension OPX unit System 25 Direct Extension Selector DXS DSS attached to a 34 button Deluxe membrane Single Line Telephones Releases prior to Release 3 0 system support the single line telephones listed in Table 3 2 3 40 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Adjuncts E ee Table 3 2 Single Line Telephones Model Description 2500MMGB Basic desk telephone 2554MMGJ Basic wall telephone 2500YMGK Basic desk telephone with Message light and Recall button Recall button used instead of switchhook for features that require a switchhook flash 2500SM Basic desk telephone used with 4A speakerphone 2514BMW Basic desk telephone with built in headset jack 2526BMG Outdoor telephone used with weatherproof enclosure 7101A Basic desk telephone with Message light and Recall and Disconnect buttons No adjuncts supported 7102A Basic desk telephone with Message light lamp and Recall button The 101 and 201 speakerphones and the 500 headsets are supported Can be used for Dower failure transfer PFT extensions CS6402U01A Basic desk telephone Feature Phone Model 420 Has built in speakerphone memory and redial 2500MMGJ Basic desk telephone 2500MMGK Basic desk telephone with Recall button Recall button used instead of switchhook for features that require switchhook flash 8102t Basic desk telephone with jack to support headset adapters and
282. k Dial or type nnn then select Enter Enter line number nnn Backspace Exit 5 8 Central Office Problems Checking Ports a Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 4 Select trunk Status Line Trunk xxx XXX line number entered in Step 3 Make a selection Status Busy out Restore Exit F1 The maintenance busy status for the trunk you selected is displayed as a Yes ora No in that field line 6 on the screen below Line xxx XXX line number entered in Step 3 Dial Plan xxxx SlotPort sspp Logicld xxx Label XXXXXxxx Maintenance Busy xxx Select Next to see the status of the Exit Next next trunk F10 Checking Extension M aintenance Busy Status Summary Console Procedure Menu Mai ntenance gt Port Extension Dial the dial plan no gt Enter Status PC Procedure F6 F3 gt F2 Type the dial plan no gt F10 gt F1 To check an extension s maintenance busy status follow the steps below Central Office Problems 5 9 Checking Ports SC o Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit E3 2 Select the Station extension option Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Modem Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Exit Enter F2 3 Specify the dial plan extension number nnnn 1 to 4 digit number Station D
283. k all DID trunks or have someone call from the outside to check each DID trunk 2 When the first trunk rings answer it 3 Instruct the caller to put the call on hold or put down the handset while making the next call 4 When the next trunk rings put the previous call on hold and repeat this procedure until all eight DID trunks have been connected successfully 5 When all trunks are connected with good communication disconnect each call and have the caller do the same 7 8 Initializing and Testing the System Testing the System mm eee Testing Tie Trunks Before you test tie trunks make sure that the tie trunks for the system are connected and properly programmed Have someone at the far end ready to place and receive calls throughout the testing procedures listed below The tie trunk testing procedures in this section areas follows m Automatic start two way both incoming and outgoing m Automatic start incoming only m Automatic start outgoing only m Dial repeating two way both incoming and outgoing m Dial repeating incoming only m Dial repeating outgoing only NOTE Dial repeating tie trunks are also called wink immediate and delay type tie trunks These terms are used in system programming to describe the type of signaling used on the trunk Testing Two Way Automatic Start Tie Trunks For two way automatic start tie trunks perform both the incoming and outgoing automatic start tie trunk tests NOTE Before te
284. k module provides oop start trunks or an extension jack module provides analog or tip ring jacks For example a 408 GS LS MLX module contains four line trunk jacks and eight digital MLX extension jacks provides either loop start LS or ground start GS trunks There are also modules for the processor and power supply Multi Function See MFM Module multiline telephone An analog or digital MLX telephone that provides multiple line buttons for making or receiving calls or programming features multiplexing The division of a transmission channel into two or more independent channels either by splitting the frequency band into a number of narrower bands or by dividing the channel into successive time slots Music On Hold Customer provided music source or Magic On Hold connected to the system through a oop start jack Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 23 Glossary mm ee N network Configuration of communications devices and software connected for information interchange network interface Hardware software or both that links two systems in an interconnected group of systems for example between the local telephone company and a PBX _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0 off hook Telephone is said to be off hook when the user has lifted the handset pressed the Speaker button to turn on the speakerphone or used a headset to connect to the commun
285. l Ventilation Allow at least 1 in 2 54 cm on the right and left sides of the control unit and 12 in 830 48 cm minimum above and below it to prevent overheating Do not place the control unit near extreme heat sources for example furnaces heaters attics or direct sunlight Electrical Fields Do not expose the control unit to devices that generate electrical currents causing interference such as arc welders or motors Heat Dissipation Basic carrier 500 Btu hr Basic carrier with one expansion carrier 1000 Btu hr Basic carrier with two expansion carriers 1500 Btu hr A WARNING Do not install the control unit outdoors 2 2 Installing the Control Unit Overview E Electrical Noise Radio Frequency Interference In most cases electrical noise is introduced to the system through trunk or telephone cables However electromagnetic fields near the control unit can also cause noise in the system Therefore you should not place the control unit and cable runs in areas where a high electromagnetic field strength exists Radio transmitters AM and FM television stations induction heaters motors with commutators of 0 25 horsepower 200 watts or greater and similar equipment are leading causes of radio frequency interference RFI Small tools with universal motors are generally not a problem when they operate on separate power lines Motors without commutators generally do not cause interference Field strength
286. l 123456789 0 You should hear a dual tone multi frequency DTMF signal as you press each button If the test is successful you hear a three beep confirmation tone one to three seconds after you press Hang up and repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each TTR 4 If this test fails replace the module containing the faulty TTR If all TTRs fail this test repeat the test using a different telephone that works If the tests are successful replace the original telephone If users cannot make outside calls on a touch tone telephone check the individual trunk for rotary dial programming See System Programming for details Call Forwarding Problems Call Forwarding problems usually occur when someone activates Call Forwarding unintentionally resulting in a user receiving other users calls Telephone Problems 3 5 MLX Telephone Tests ee Cancel the Call Forwarding feature for the receiving telephone m On multiline telephones press the Feature button and dial 34 m On single line telephones pick up the handset dial 34 and then hang up NOTE You can cancel Call Forwarding from the receiving telephone or from the forwarding telephone providing that you know the number MLX Telephone Tests If the LEDs ringer buttons switchhook or display appear not to be working try the steps below 1 Pickup the handset 2 When you hear dial tone press 00 the feature access code The telephone enters test mode For some tests
287. l plan number line for the trunk nnn 801 to 880 Line Trunk Dial or type nnn then select Enter Enter line number nnnn Backspace Exit 5 16 Central Office Problems Checking Ports A Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 4 Select Restore Line Trunk xxx xxx line number entered in Step 3 Make a Selection Status Busy Out Restore Exit The screen below is shown until Restore finishes or fails Restore Line Trunk xxx XXX line number entered in Step 3 Restore in Progress Exit The screen below appears when Restore is completed successfully Restore Line Trunk xxx xxx line number entered in Step 3 Restore Successfully Compl et ed The screen below appears when Restore fails If this occurs exit and try again Restore Line Trunk xxx Xxx line number entered in Step 3 Restore FAILED Central Office Problems 5 17 Checking Ports Ts Restoring an Extension Summary Procedure Menu Maintenance gt Port Station Dial the dial plan no gt Enter gt Restore PC Procedure E6 F3 F2 Type the dial plan no F10 F3 To restore an extension follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit F3 2 Select the Station extension option Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Mo dem
288. lation lw AT amp T 555 630 140 August 1994 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3 0 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Copyright 1994 AT amp T AT amp T 555 630 140 All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A August 1994 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change See Appendix A Customer Support Information for important information Security of Your System Preventing Toll Fraud As a customer of a new telephone system you should be aware that there exists an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud Telephone toll fraud can occur in many forms despite the numerous efforts of telephone companies and telephone equipment manufacturers to control it For important information regarding your system and toll fraud see Appendix A Customer Support Information Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation o
289. le Display Instructions Additional Information PC Reset Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 Reset in Progress The screen below appears when the module is successfully reset Reset slot xx Xx Slot number entered in Step 2 Reset Complete The screen below appears when the Reset fails Try again and be sure to specify the correct slot Reset Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Reset FAILED Restore Once you complete module testing restore it to terminate the Busy Out or Reset condition 4 42 Control Unit Problems Module Problems mm ee Summary Console Procedure Menu gt Maintenance gt Slot Dial the slot no gt Enter gt Restore Yes PC Procedure F6 gt F2 Type the slot no F10 F3 F1 Appropriate Modules Any module after testing it Time Estimate Less than 1 second To restore the module follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System EE slot Port Exit 2 Specify the slot number n 00 to 17 Slot Dial or type nn then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit Enter Control Unit Problems 4 43 Module Problems Console Display Instructions 3 Select the Restore option Slot Xx Make a selection Status Demand Test Reset Upgrade Busy out Restore Exit 4 Select Yes
290. le that is in a working or normal state the System Status display for that module appears as Roff Yon Goff 4 88 Control Unit Problems Checking System and Slot Status If a slot is empty R Y and G appear without indicating a status Slot 4 is empty according to the sample screen in the last procedure Slot Status Slot Status provides the following information for a module in a particular slot m LED status m Errors yes or no m Mode initialization standby test or normal m Alarms yes or no m Maintenance busy yes or no Summary Console Procedure Menu Mai ntenance Slot Dial the slot no Enter Status PC Procedure F6 F2 Type the slot no gt F10 F1 To check Slot Status follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit E2 Control Unit Problems 4 89 Checking System and Slot Status Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Specify the 2 digit slot number nn 00 to 17 Sl ot Dial or type nn and select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit F10 3 Select the Status option Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 Make a selection CSU I pbk Error Events and Clock Status Demand Test appear only when the 100D module Busy out Reset occupies the selected slot If an MLX Restore Error Even
291. led in the processor if the HDR3 header is removed system programming may be deleted and will have to be restored E 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Modifying a Release 2 1 or Earlier Processor for Key Mode O 4 On the exposed portion of the processor board find the header marked HDR4 it is in the upper left area A shunt is attached to one of the pins on the HDR4 header 5 Remove the shunt from the single header pin then reinsert it so that it covers both pins on the header 6 Take the KF label from the Jack Numbering Labels Sheet which is packaged with the feature module and fasten it to the wire manager at the base of the module Installing the Control Unit Housing Release 2 1 and Earlier To install the control unit s housing follow the steps below 1 Lay the front panel s face down 2 If you are housing more than one carrier connect the front panels together a Line up the arrows b Slide the panels until the semicircles form a complete circle See E 2 Connect the side panels to the front panel s in the same way 4 Pick up the housing and place it on the control unit If the system has more than one carrier make sure you hold the housing only from the basic carrier side otherwise the housing can disassemble a Line up the wire clips that are attached to the carrier with the recesses on the outside of the side panels b Push back the panels until the clips hook over the tabs and rest in the recesses
292. lems 4 53 Module Problems Summary Console Procedure PC Procedures Appropriate Modules Time Estimate Busy Out or Reset Interrupting the Test Test Failure Restore Menu Maintenance Slot gt Dial the slot no gt Enter gt BchLoopback F6 gt F2 Type the slot no F10 F4 This test can be run only on MLX modules Approximately 1 5 minutes Before beginning the test busy out or reset the module being tested Both Busy Out and Reset are in the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu Maintenance Sl ot See Busy Out and Reset earlier in this chapter for additional information Interrupt the test by selecting Exit If the test fails record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module Restore the module if it successfully completes all module tests and the errors no longer occur Restore is in the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu Maintenance Slot See earlier in this chapter for additional information To run the B Channel Loopback Test follow the steps below 4 54 Control Unit Problems Module Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the main menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot F2 Port Exit 2 Specify the MLX module s 2 digit slot number nn 00 to 17 Slot Dial or type nn then select Ente
293. lephone has a personal line or is a DLC operator a Pick up the handset and wait for the dial tone b If you pressed an SA button dial the dial out code c Dial the destination telephone You should hear ringback on your telephone and ringing at the destination telephone d Have someone pick up the handset at the destination telephone verify that you have good two way communication e At both telephones hang up 7 If the extension is toll restricted place a toll call You should hear a reorder tone Initializing and Testing the System 7 7 resting the Seen Testing Ground Start and Loop Start Trunks Hybrid PBX Systems Only To test the GS and LS outgoing and incoming trunks at a telephone follow the steps below 1 Dial 03 followed by the trunk ID number 01 through 80 You should hear dial tone for a working trunk a reorder tone for a DID trunk or an invalid trunk number or a busy tone if the trunk is in use NOTE Dialing 03 a single line telephone works only if telephone has a touch tone dialpad and the trunk accepts touch tone dialing 2 Repeat Step 1 for all outgoing trunks 3 Dial an incoming trunk on the system 4 Have someone answer the call at another telephone verify that you have good two way communication 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all incoming trunks 6 Hang up to exit test mode Testing DID Trunks To test DID trunks follow the steps below 1 Have someone at the central office chec
294. listed in that section provides full ordering information for replacement parts accessories and other compatible equipment or contact your AT amp T representative Support Telephone Number In the continental U S AT amp T provides a toll free customer helpline 24 hours a day Call the AT amp T Helpline at 1800628 2888 if you need assistance when installing or using your system Outside the continental U S contact your local AT amp T representative Warranty AT amp T provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability in Appendix A Customer Support Information E SSErmrmC lt C73 OCS7S S 7 7 C Contents 1 u oo About This Book m Maintenance Strategy 1 18 m Unit Loads 1 26 Maintenance and Troubleshooting iii EE Contents E SSS 2 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory m Access Log 2 18 m System Inventory 2 20 E OOO 3 Telephone Problems m Fixing Telephone Problems 3 2 m MLX Telephone Tests 3 6 m System Requirements for Touch Tone Receivers 3 8 EE SS 4 Control Unit Problems m Backing Up System Programming 4 1 m Power Supply Problems 4 2 m Processor Problems 4 12 m Module Problems 4 33 m 100D Module Problems 4 70 m Carrier Problems 4 85 m Checking System and Slot Status 4 86 iv Maintenance and Troubleshooting E SESErm lt 2C 3CS i i SST Contents 5 Central Office Problems
295. lled in the same building For more information consult MERLIN PFC Telephone Phone Fax Copier Installation and Maintenance Guide Installing Applications 8 21 PassageWay Direct Connect Solution g PassageWay Direct Connect Solution PassageWay Direct Connect Solution is a collection of five software applications that provide an interface between an approved DOS PC and the system through an MLX 28D MLX 20L or MLX 10DP telephone AT amp TCall A card file application that enables a user to maintain names addresses telephone numbers and other information m AT amp TSet A telephone programming application that enables users to program telephone features for their MLX 28D MLX 20L or MLX 10DP telephones from the PC Multiple button programming files can be created saved and exchanged with other users Log Viewer An application that enables users to access information from the call log which stores a record of every call made while using AT amp TCall m AT amp TConnect Management software that provides the basis for all the other PassageWay applications AT amp TConnect also provides autodialing using the command set used by most modems a AT amp T Buzz An application that enables users to manage incoming calls answer hold or drop and view the calling party number Caller ID for each incoming call at their telephones Considerations MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3 0 or later is required for call
296. lling the Control Unit Installation iii PE Err i ttttt Contents Installing the Control Unit Continued m Connecting the Control Unit to an AC Outlet 2 43 m Powering Up the System 2 44 m Powering Down the System 2 45 3 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts m Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit 3 58 EEE 4 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface m Testing Trunks 4 12 m Wiring 4 2 m Labeling Trunks 4 14 m Installing the Channel Service Unit 4 14 iv Installation Contents 5 Installing the PC CAT or Printer m Connecting a PC to the Control Unit 1 I i i 5 1 TE m Initializing the System 7 1 m Setting the Time and Date 7 3 7 3 m Testing the System m Installing the Control Units Housing 7 20 me 7 Initializing and Testing the System Installation v rr hh TTT Contents OO T _ 8 Installing Applications m Voice Messaging Systems and Touch Tone Receivers 8 2 Automated Document Delivery System Call Accounting System m PassageWay Direct Connect Solution 8 22 8 3 8 4 m Call Accounting Terminal 8 7 8 9 Call Management System m System Programming and Maintenance SPM 8 24 O m Modifying the Processor for Key Mode 9 10 m Completing the Upgrade 9 14 vi Installation CC Eh Contents A System Numbering Forms Form 2a System Numbering Extensio
297. ly Video Codec Camera Monitor Monitor Speaker Figure 6 6 Video Conferencing Configuration Microphones 6 18 Connecting Data Equipment Video Conferencing Data Stations pE lt i OO COO O R O To set up the video conferencing configuration follow the steps below See 1 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the LINE jack on each of the 7500B data modules 2 Connect the other end of each D8W cord m f Data Form 1 b indicates that you are to install MLX telephones plug the D8W cords into the MLX extension jacks specified on Data Form 1b then go to Step 4 E f Data Form 1b does not indicate that you are to install MLX telephones plug each D8W cord into a 440A4 terminating resistor 3 Using two more D8W cords connect each 440A4 terminating resistor to the MLX extension jacks specified on Data Form 1b then go to Step 6 4 Connect the MLX telephones to the 7500B data modules a Plug a D8W cord into the LINE jack on each MLX telephone b Plug the other end of each D8W cord into the PHONE jack on each 7500B data module 5 Plug each WP901 10 L7 power supply cord into the POWER jacks on the 75006 data modules Do not plug the power supplies into the outlets until the end of this procedure 6 Connect each 7500B data module to the video conferencing data station a Use the DB 25 cables to connect the PORT 2 jacks on each 7500B data module to the dialing ports in the video codec s automatic calling unit
298. m to an analog multiline telephone The device must be touch tone not rotary NOTES 1 The GPA is intended for answer only service unless the telephone has direct access to a line It does not have touch tone receivers or pulse dial detectors therefore the associated analog muitiline telephone must dial calls 2 The GPA cannot be used with a MERLIN II System Display Console 3 When the system forms indicate a GPA for installation of an adjunct follow the steps below 1 Plug one end of a 4 pair adjunct D8AC cord into the VT jack on the back of the GPA 2 Plug the other end into the OTHER jack on the underside of the analog multiline telephone 3 Plug the cord from the adjunct into the TEL EQUIP jack on the GPA 3 24 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Jakca saundi 4 Slide the switch on the back of the GPA to the setting that provides the required service Basic This setting is used to dial and answer calls from an analog multiline telephone or to attach a T R adjunct such as a single line telephone or answering machine Incoming calls ring only on the analog multiline telephone This setting also allows the user to originate and receive calls on the telephone while using a computer with a modem that is attached to the GPA However if this setting is used data calls cannot be answered automatically m Join This setting is used to add a recording device or a single line telephone to a call that is in progress o
299. mCard Rel 3 y Von mm Current Rel 3 y Vnn mm Releases are compatible E5 If the releases are incompatible the following screen appears Upgrade MemCard Rel 3 y Von mm Current Rel 3 y Vnn mm Incompatible releases E5 See Other Error Conditions following this section for continuing instructions Control Unit Problems 4 23 Processor Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 7 If the release number is the one you want select Yes Upgrade Install ation System will be down Do you want to continue Mm Yes No Exit F2 8 Ifthe forced installation is attempted while a line trunk or extension is busy the following screen appears System Busy Pls Wait Dial Code xxxx S P ss pp F5 9 Observe the progress screen and the error status display LED on the processor module Upgrade Installation Upgrade Installation In Progress The error status LED should show a flashing L during installation of system software Upon successful completion the system performs a frigid start System Erase While the frigid start is in progress an F shows on the error status display If the installation of system software was unsuccessful an error code is displayed and the system may not function See Table 4 2 and Error Conditions During Forced Installation 4 24 Control Unit Problems Processor Problems 10 Remove the memory card from the interface slot 11 Verify t
300. ment No Title 555 630 117 555 630 118 555 630 110 555 630 115 555 630 116 555 630 111 555 630 112 555 630 113 555 630 122 555 630 150 555 630 153 555 630 124 555 630 151 555 630 120 555 630 126 555 630 134 555 630 132 555 630 136 System Documents Introduction System Manager s Guide Feature Reference Equipment and Operations Reference Pocket Reference System Programming System Planning System Planning Forms Telephone User Support MLX 10D MLX 10DP MLX 28D and MLX 20L Display Telephones User s Guide MLX 10D Display Telephone Tray Cards 5 cards MLX 28D and MLX 20L Telephone Tray Cards 5 cards MLX 10 Nondisplay Teleohone User s Guide MLX 10 Nondisplay Telephone Tray Cards 6 cards Analog Multiline Teleohones User s Guide Single Line Telephones User s Guide System operator Support MLX Direct Line Consoles Operator s Guide Analog Direct Line Consoles Operator s Guide MLX Queued Call Console Operator s Guide Maintenance and Troubleshooting xix How to Comment on This Document Document No Title System Operator Support Cont 555 630 138 MDC 9000 and MDW 900 Telephones User s Guide Miscellaneous User Support 555 630 130 Calling Group Supervisor s Guide 555 630 129 Data User s Guide Documentation for Qualified Technicians 555 630 140 Installation Programming amp Maintenance IP amp M Binder How to Comment on This Document We welcome your comments both good
301. more information on the Restart procedure see System Programming For more information on Restart see Processor Problems in Chapter 4 Introduction 1 21 Maintenance Strategy Frigid Start System Erase A CAUTION All system programming is erased When you perform a frigid start System Erase all calls are dropped and the system configuration information is erased All system memory must be reinitialized including system programming Then the entire system must be rebooted To perform a frigid start select System Erase as follows Console Procedure Menu Maintenance gt Slot Dial00 gt Demand Test gt System Erase Line 5 of the display left button System Erase Yes PC Procedure E6 F1 Type 00 F2 F3 F3 E2 Considerations System Erase is not displayed on the MLX 20L status display To select System Erase press the left button on Line 5 of the display twice After a System Erase the default printer is the PC printer not the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printer If you want on site printouts from the SMDR printer make sure you change the option To change the printer option see System Programming and Maintenance SPM for information on the Print Opts option on the SPM Main Menu For more information on System Erase see Processor Problems in Chapter 4 1 22 Introduction Maintenance pirates Isolating the Trouble You can isolate any pro
302. ms Interpreting Test Results If the test completes successfully the module s board controller is functioning properly Continue with the next module test or restore the module if you are finished testing If the test fails find the error message in Table 4 4 and proceed as indicated Table 4 4 Board Controller Test Errors Error Messages Slot is not busied out Slot empty or not valid FMWR not in Standby Mode Test running too long Not in TEST STANDBY mode Any other error Restoring the Module Corrective Action Exit the test busy out the slot and try again Exit the test and try again be sure to type the correct slot number Do not indicate an empty slot or the processor 00 Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module When you are finished running module tests be sure to restore the module See earlier in this chapter B Channel Loopback Test This test verifies that specific communication paths on the MLX module are operational If you have not read Module Test Process above do so Control Unit Prob
303. ms Processor Problems PROCESSOR MODULE m Error Status Code Display PCMCIA Interface Slot Push in to remove Memory Card lt _ Alarm Status LED Figure 4 4 Inserting a Memory Card Control Unit Problems 4 21 Processor Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 3 Initiate the software installation Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit E1 m f the maintenance screens are functioning correctly select System from the Maintenance menu Continue with Step 4 m f maintenance screens are unreliable or not available power cycle the system by turning off the system and leaving it off for at least one second Turn the system back on The system boots from the memory card and automatically starts the installation software Go to Step 11 4 Select Upgrade install System Make a selection Status Upgrd Instll Error Log Inventory Access Log Exit F6 5 Observe the memory card validation screens Upgrade Install ation Validation of Memory Card in Progress Exit 4 22 Control Unit Problems Processor Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Upgrade Install ation Validation of Memory Card Successfully Completed F5 When completed select Exit to continue 6 Verify that the memory card or release number is the required one and select Exit to continue Upgrade Me
304. n AM 3l Unit M ag ee ilil nf PORT Cord all BH RY EN bes ARRI H i Mic Speaker AE EE HIRI BTS EEF l Vp Se Mic Speaker CY 7 ni Control i Unit hl Standard Phono Mic Speaker Patch Cord Ss Music Source A MAGIC ON HOLD A Music Coupler CC405476452 KS 23395 L 2 Figure 3 26 Multizone Paging with Background Music Magic on Hold and Bidirectional Paging Talk Back Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 37 Installing Adjuncts E Supplemental Alerts Alerting devices notify people working in noisy areas of outside transferred and intercom calls Connect an alert to one of the following m Single line telephone m MLX telephone with an MFM m Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA and analog multiline telephone Alerts compatible with the SAA include horns bells chimes and strobes See Supplemental Alert Adapter for installation instructions NOTE The MFM in SAA mode and SAA support devices operate on 48 V DC You can connect alerts operating on 20 through 30 Hz to an MFM in tip ring mode or a single line telephone jack Supplemental Alert Adapter If the system forms indicate a bell horn chime or strobe with an analog multiline telephone follow the steps below to install an SAA See Figure 3 27 1 Plug the telephone cord into the TELEPHONE jack on the SAA 2 Plug the cord from the alert device into the ALERTER jack on the SAA 3 Plug the cord from the telephone wall jack into the CO
305. n that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department an extension or the system operator See ALS See ANI See automatic start tie trunk See ARS Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 3 Glossary automatic start tie trunk auxiliary power unit B8ZS backup bandwidth barrier code basic carrier baud rate B channel Tie trunk on which incoming calls are routed to an operator or other designated destination without a start signal as soon as the trunk is seized the destination is specified during programming Also called automatic ringdown or auto in tie trunk Device that provides additional power to the system bipolar 8 zero substitution Line coding format that encodes a string of eight zeros in a unique binary sequence to detect bipolar violation See also bipolar signal Procedure for saving a copy of system programming onto a floppy disk or memory card See also restore Difference expressed in hertz between the highest and lowest frequencies in a range that determines channel capacity Password used to limit access to the Remote Access feature of the system Hardware that holds and connects the processor power supply and up to five modules in the system See also expansion carrier Strictly speaking a measurement of transmission speed equal to the number of signal level changes per second In practice often used syno
306. n Jacks Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Form 2d System Numbering Special Renumbers B Unit Load Calculation Worksheet A Installation vii 2 Installing the Control Unit 2 1 AC Grounding Requirements 2 7 2 2 Measuring the AC Outlet Voltages 2 9 2 3 Central Office and AC Grounds 2 11 2 4 Installing 146A and 147A Protectors 2 15 2 5 Marking the Basic Carrier Screw Holes 2 18 2 6 Installing a Copper Shield in the Power Supply 2 22 2 7 Installing the Ferrite Cores 2 24 2 8 Installing an Auxiliary Power Unit 2 26 2 10 Installing the Processor into the Carrier 2 31 2 11 400EM Module Sample Dip Switch Settings for Signaling Types 1C and 5 2 37 2 12 Line Trunk and Telephone Jack Locations on Each Module 2 39 2 13 Removing Modules from the Carrier 2 42 Multi Function Module Packing List Removing the User Card Tray and Line Cable 3 1 i 3 3 3 2 3 4 3 4 3 6 3 5 3 7 Removing the Deskstand Releasing the Module Cover Screw 3 6 Releasing the Module Cover 3 8 3 7 Removing the Module Cover 3 9 3 8 Removing an MFM Module 3 10 viii Installation E Figures Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Continued 3 9 Installing an MFM Module 3 11 3 11 Removing the Jack Guard 3 13 3 17 Replacing the User Card Tray and Line Cable 3 19 3 18 Adjusting the Deskstand Height 3 20 3 19 Powering Up the Telephone after Installing the MFM
307. n Line 6 For more information on an error code see Table 2 2 Line 3 indicates the slot and port where the error was detected Line 5 indicates the error s last occurrence NOTE You cannot delete an error log entry from this screen Interpreting Error Codes Table 2 2 explains how to interpret each error from the error logs For additional information on how to use the error logs read this entire chapter and see Maintenance Strategy in Chapter 1 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 5 Error Logs E er SSESSESDLDhrs z N WUR CNNSSCNCCTTTTTTT Table 2 2 Error Codes Error Codes Description 0001 0002 0003 0004 0006 0007 0008 TIMEOUT COLD START System programming is POWER UP WARM START System programming is SOFTWARE COLD START System programming is SOFTWARE WARM START System programming is INCOMPLETE COLD START System was cold started while a restart was in progress SANITY TIMEOUT RESET Faulty software module carrier or processor sanity timer MAX RESET COUNT EXCEEDED System was cold started System Reset because too many warm starts occurred System programming is okay okay okay okay okay Action No action required however if problem persists troubleshoot the processor No action required however if problem persists troubleshoot the processor If problem persists troubleshoot the processor If problem persists troubl
308. n the memory card prior to initiating the restore procedure The attributes included on the Inspect screen are the filename the time and day of the file backup update the location of the system programming port and information about the system software release from which the backup was made If any type of programming is taking place at another extension when you begin the restore procedure the restore is canceled and the number of the busy extension appears on the screen Repeat the restore procedure when the busy extension becomes idle If a line is busy incoming call or active call when you begin the restore procedure the restore is canceled and the number of the active line appears on the screen Repeat the restore procedure when the line becomes idle Also see Restore Messages for information about errors that may occur during the restore procedure Summary Restore Programmable by System Manager Mode All Idle Condition System Forced Idle Planning Form Not applicable Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Not applicable Inspect Yes Copy Option No Console Procedure Insert memory card System gt Back Restore Restore Select restore file Yes PC Procedure Insert memory card F1 F9 F2 Select restore file F3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 19 Backing Up with a Memory Card DE llltltlti _ _t CTW Procedure Restore Console Display Instructions Additional Information P
309. n the telephone You cannot originate or answer calls on this setting m Automatic Use this setting when a GPA connects a modem to an analog multiline telephone for answering calls or answering machine Dial Dictation Devices You can connect a dial dictation device to one of the following as described earlier in this chapter m 012 module m MLX telephone with an MFM m GPA and analog multiline telephone You can also connect a dial dictation device through a commercially available trunk adapter or a Universal Paging Access Module UPAM on a loop start line trunk jack with an external power supply unit NOTE Using any of the devices listed above you cannot connect dial dictation devices that require contact closure You can connect such equipment through a UPAM however since it provides contact closure for the device Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 25 Installing Adjuncts Fax Machines You can connect a fax machine to one of the following as described earlier in this chapter m 012 module m MLX telephone with an MFM The fax machine can send and receive fax calls independently of the telephone Dial calls either from the fax machine s dialpad or from an associated single line telephone Do not use a GPA to connect a fax machine to the system because the fax machine cannot dial out through the GPA Group Calling Delay Announcement Devices You can connect a group calling delay announcement device to one of th
310. nance After about four minutes check the error logs m f new PRI errors occur contact your technical support organization for help on interpreting the results and your action m f no new PRI messages appear the ends are most likely in agreement The screen below appears when the message cannot be sent Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC BChannel xxxx Audit call Xxxx slot and port number entered in Step 3 Audit Failed If this occurs make sure an active call is in progress on the specified B channel and try the audit again Conclusion of Hardware Maintenance Installing the Control Unit Housing Release 2 1 or Later After you have completed maintenance and troubleshooting on Release 2 1 or later follow the steps below to reinstall the control unit housing Installing the Top Cover To install the top cover see and follow these steps 1 Be sure the cords have been pressed through the wire managers at the base of the modules 5 30 Central Office Problems Conclusion of Hardware Maintenance 2 Hold the top cover with the hooks facing you 3 Engage the tabs at the rear of the top cover with the carrier 4 Lower the top cover so that the legs lock into the vents on the module Installing the Front Cover To install the front cover see Figure 5 2 and follow these steps 1 Hook the top of the front cover onto the top cover 2 Push down on the bottom of the front cover until it locks s
311. nce gt Port gt B Channel gt Dial the slot and port no gt Enter Audit Call PC Procedure E6 F3 F7 Type the slot and port no F10 gt F2 Appropriate Slot or This test can be run only on the slot and port of a Port DS1 PRI B channel Time Estimate Four minutes Backup Procedure Not required Busy Out or Reset Not required Interrupting the Test You cannot interrupt this test Restore Not required To audit calls follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance Menu select the Port option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit F3 5 28 Central Office Problems Checking Ports Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Select the B Channel option Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Modem Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Exit F7 3 Specify the slot and port number ss 2 digit slot number pp 2 digit port number B Channel Dial or type sspp and select Enter Enter B Channel sspp 4 Select Audit Call BChannel xxxx Xxxx slot and port number entered Make a selection in Step 3 Audit Line Audit Call F2 The screen below appears only if the audit message is successfully created and sent BChannel xxxx Audit Call XXXX slot and port number entered in Step 3 Audit Initiated Exit Central Office Problems 5 29 Conclusion of Hardware Mainte
312. nd ring If these grounds are not available the water pipe ground can be supplemented by one of the following types of grounds Other local metal underground systems or structures such as tanks and piping systems but not gas pipes Rod and pipe electrodes a 5 8 in 1 58 cm solid rod or in 0 63 cm conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 ft 244 cm Plate electrode a minimum of 2 square ft 61 square cm of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil 2 12 Installing the Control Unit AC Power and Grounding m Concrete Encased Ground Must be an electrode consisting of one of the following At least 20 ft 6 1 m of one or more steel reinforcing rods each at least in 1 27 cm in diameter 20 ft 6 1 m of bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG encased in 2 in 5 cm of concrete This electrode must be located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth Ground ring consisting of at least 20 ft 6 1 m of bare copper conductor not smaller than 2 AWG encircling the building The ground ring must be in direct contact with the earth and buried at least 2 5 ft 77 cm below the earth s surface A WARNING Do not use a metal underground gas piping system this is a safety risk Central Office Trunk Protection The telephone company is responsible for providing the following protection of central
313. nd a keyboard The Master Controller Ill has the following components m 500 MB fixed disk drive 250 MB tape drive 3 5 inch floppy disk drive B Two serial ports and one parallel port are integrated on the main board with connectors on the back panel of the system unit A diskette drive controller and fixed disk drive interface also are integrated on the main board m A Video Graphics Array VGA video display controller and a tape drive controller are provided on separate add in boards m AT amp T UNIX System V version 3 2 2 8 12 Installing Applications Integrated Solution Ill CONVERSANT Intro Documentation CONVERSANT Intro Application Support Software Installation Guide CONVERSANT Intro Application Support Software User s Guide Integrated Solution III Integrated Solution Ill IS Ill is a complete package of UNIX System based voice processing and call analysis software that helps to manage telephone usage and costs IS Ill offers a single interface and can include m Call Accounting IS CAS m AUDIX Voice Power IS Ill R 2 1 1 m System Programming and Maintenance SPM IS Ill Release 3 xx or higher m Fax Attendant FA The number of incoming lines and subscribers programmed for AUDIX Voice Power and the number of busy hour calls determine how many voice channels are required for the customer s system Considerations IS Ill uses AT amp T UNIX System V Release 3 2 2 For AUDIX Voice Power program the loo
314. nd into this product through module openings or expansion slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts which could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on this product Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use cleaners or aerosol cleaners B Auxiliary equipment includes answering machines alerts modems and fax machines To connect one of these devices you must first have a Multi Function Module MFM E Do not operate telephones if chemical gas leakage is suspected in the area Use telephones located in some other safe area to report the trouble xii Maintenance and Troubleshooting Safety A WARNING For your personal safety DO NOT install an MFM yourself E ONLY an authorized technician or dealer representative shall install set options or repair an MFM m To eliminate the risk of personal injury due to electrical shock DO NOT attempt to install or remove an MFM from your MLX telephone Opening or removing the module cover of your telephone may expose you to dangerous voltages SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Maintenance and Troubleshooting xiii Safety xiv Maintenance and Troubleshooting M aa About This Book The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an advanced digital switching system that integrates voice and data communications features Voice features include traditional teleph
315. nd other equipment Also referred to in this guide as system short for MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit Processor module power supply modules line trunk and extension modules carriers and housing of the system console Refers to telephone and adjuncts if any at an operator or system programmer extension GL 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary CONVERSANT Voice response application that automatically answers and routes calls and executes telephone transactions conversion resource See modem pool COR class of restriction Various types of restrictions that can be assigned to remote access trunks or barrier codes These restrictions consist of calling restrictions ARS Facility Restriction Levels FRLs Allowed Lists Disallowed Lists and pool dial out restrictions Coverage Set of system features that can determine how extensions calls are covered when the person at the extension is busy or not available CRC cyclic redundancy check An error detection code used on DS1 facilities with the extended superframe format ESF CSU channel service unit Equipment used on customer premises to provide DS7 facility terminations and signaling compatibility cyclic redundancy See CAC check OT D D4 framing format Framing format consisting of a sequence of individual frames of 24 eight bit slots and one signal bit 193 bits in a 12 frame superframe See also ESF Data channel See D
316. nd the DS1 facilities The system supports three basic models ACCULINK 3150 CSU You may also install an ACCULINK 3160 or 3164 CSU these provide 2 or 4 data ports respectively m ESF Extended Superframe format T1 CSU m 551 T1 CSU 4 14 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface Installing the Channel Service Unit only the ACCULINK CSUs are available for installation For more information about the ESF T1 CSU and the 551 T1 CSU see Maintenance and Troubleshooting The operator s guides shipped with the ACCULINK CSUs provide detailed installation set up and operation and maintenance and troubleshooting information Refer to one of these guides if your installation calls for an ACCULINK channel service unit NOTE Before you can install a CSU the local telephone company must provide information such as services available equipment options and 48 V DC power on the trunk ACCULINK CSUs The AT amp T Paradyne ACCULINK CSUs replace the ESF T1 CSU They are fully compatible with the ESF units The ACCULINK CSUs differ from the ESF T1 CSU in the following ways The ACCULINK front panels include an LCD display and 7 button keypads composed of three functional and four directional keys They contain integral 2400 bps modems for remote access and alarm reporting a The front panel LEDs are labeled and colored differently from the ESF T1 CSU The NETWORK connectors on the rear of the ACCULINK models
317. ne are in use at the same time Voice Announce to Busy is not possible Voice Announce to Busy is a feature that allows users to be paged on the speakerphone even if they are on a call The MFM has two jumper blocks that are factory set for T R operation The MFM is packaged with the following items shown in KS22911 power supply 400B or 400B2 adapter D6AP cord 3 2 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules ISS Nf Eg a E 7 400B Adapter or 400B2 Adapter Power Supply KS22911 Multi Function Module D6AP Cord 7 feet long Figure 3 1 Multi Function Module Packing List DNase OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK Follow all warnings and cautions A WARNING Only a qualified technician should install repair or set options for an MFM Do not touch the circuitry on the MFM Touching the circuitry may result in component damage from electrostatic discharge Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 3 Installing Multi Function Modules Before installing an MFM disconnect all trunk and or power cords that are attached to the MLX telephone This is to ensure that no hazardous voltages are present during installation Ringing voltage from the MFM attached to the MLX telephone can cause electrical shock if adjustments are made while the cords are connected Figure 3 2 Removing the User Card Tray and Line Cable To install or replace an MFM and change its pin settings follow these steps
318. ng a 248B adapter and 2012D transformer insteadofa2012D 50M transformer plug the D6AP cord into the jack on the 248B adapter and then connect the spade tip wires on the 248B adapter to the screws on a 2012D transformer 5 12 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit CAT PLUS Connections Using Z3A2 ADU With Different AC Outlets M8AJ 87 Equivalent To Z3A4 ADU ADU Arrangements MERLIN Male MBAJ 87 Tele a fF 355A ZA3A2 ADU Wall M7U 87 Female EIA Crossover 0 AC Outlet 248B D6AP 87 F C Wall S n Jacka F BAM 87 D8W 87 s eam _ Crossover 1 Inside Wire D8W 87 pe gele N ZA3A2 ADUN 355AF Jn AC 012D gt Fwall Outlet Transformer 5 D8W 87 48B D6AP 87 nee GE g Ti a E Transformer aS vese KA CAT Printer CAT PLUS Terminal Figure 5 4 Connecting a CAT and Printer on Different AC Outlets Control Unit Connections 10 Plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the lower jack on the 40062 power adapter 11 Plug the 2012D 50M or 201213 transformer into the wall outlet for the control unit Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 13 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit To make the connections at the printer follow the steps below See Figure 5 4 1 At the printer location plug one end of a D6AP cord into a 2012D 50M transformer or follow the instructions in S
319. nications peut demander a l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil a la suite de reparations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou a cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise a la terre de la source d energie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sent raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importance clans les r gions rurales A 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Customer Support Information C CSCT AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir recours a un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou a un electrician selon le cas L indite de charge IC assign a chaque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surcharge le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord e a un circuit t l phonique boucl utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit boucl peut tre constitute de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositits ne d passe pas 100 No d homologation 230 4095A No de certification CSA LR 56260 L indite de charge 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 9 ort Information Customer Su Ministere des Communications du Canada emplacement de l tiquette
320. nnel on the telephone Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 45 Installing Direct Station Selectors AC Power D Outlet Wall Jack te D6AP Figure 3 29 Wiring for Auxiliary Power 5 Turn the telephone and the DDS unit s faceup with the telephone now to the left of the DDS unit s See Figure 3 29 6 Insert one end of the coiled H4DU handset cord into the handset and the other end into the jack on the side of the telephone 7 If auxiliary power is not required plug the D8W cord into the wall jack and then go to Step 9 8 If auxiliary power is required refer to the following steps and Figure 3 29 The combined total length of the D6AP and D8W cords you use must not be more than 50 ft 15 m a Plug the D8W cord from the telephone into the 8 conductor modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter 3 46 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Direct Station Selectors b Connect one end of the D6AP cord to the 2 conductor small modular jack on the 400B or 400B2 adapter and plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the modular jack of the 406943837 or 406743419 power supply A CAUTION Do not plug the D6AP cord into the 8 conductor large modular jack of the 400B or 40052 adapter Doing so can cause electrical damage to the control unit and to the telephone c Insert the plug end of the 4008 or 400B2 adapter into the wall jack d Plug the power supply into a 117 V AC o
321. ns If automatic backups are performed it may not be necessary to save system programming NOTE If the processor module is not functioning it may not be possible to back up system programming Power Supply Problems If the power supply fails all components connected to the carrier are automatically shut down Checking the Power Supply If you Suspect power supply failure check the following m Power supply LED m Interlocking post on the carrier behind the power supply m Ring generator if present m Auxiliary power unit s if present A WARNING Never remove the power supply without first turning off the power switch and disconnecting the power cord from the AC outlet Use the following procedures to check the power supply Checking the LED If the power supply s LED is off check the power switch If it is off turn on the power switch for each power supply in the control unit Start with the rightmost carrier and end with the basic carrier Watch for the following responses 4 2 Control Unit Problems Power Supply Problems ESS m The green power LED should light on each power supply m The red LED on the processor should turn on for 15 to 45 seconds and then turn off m All indicators on the 100D and 400EM modules if present should turn on and then off They remain off when the modules are idle If any of these responses do not occur or if the console operator reports any problems continue with Checkin
322. ns on each telephone Pattern that data assumes as it is transmitted over a communications channel Adjustment for the amount of cable loss in decibels dB based on the length of cable between a 100D module and a channel service unit CSU or other far end connection point Refers to inside system lines and outside trunks in general terms See also line and trunk Physical interface on a module in the control unit for connecting an outside trunk to the communications system Also called trunk jack Module on which the jacks for connecting central office lines trunks and or the jacks for connecting the extensions are located GL 20 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary Cee local host computer A method for connecting an extension jack to an on site access computer for data only calls through a modem or data module local loop See access line logical ID Unique numeric identifier for each extension and ine trunk Jack in the system control unit loop start trunk Trunk on which a closure between the tip and ring leads is used to originate or answer a call High voltage 20 Hz AC ringing current from the central office signals an incoming Call M Magic on Hold An AT amp T Music on Hold enhancement that promotes a company s products or services or provides custom music selection Mbps megabits per second Megacom AT amp T s tariffed digital WATS offering for outward calling Megacom 800 AT amp T s tarif
323. nstall is in progress No action required 2 Incorrect memory card Insert correct memory card and repeat type forced installation procedure 4 Memory card corrupted Insert new memory card and repeat forced installation procedure 3 Incorrectly inserted or Insert memory card correctly and missing memory card repeat forced installation procedure 7 Bad processor board Check that memory card is inserted correctly and try installation again If it fails again replace the processor module 9 Unknown Try installation again with a new memory card If it fails again contact your technical support organization NOTE Certain conditions force the system to retry the forced installation The dot on the error code status display becomes lit at the start of the first retry Look carefully the dot may be hard to see 4 26 Control Unit Problems Processor Problems M Missing Card or Card Not Inserted Correctly Upgrade Installation Verify that Memory Card has been installed correctly Exit Insert the memory card correctly then select Exit and begin the forced installation procedure again Memory Card Is Wrong Type Upgrade Installation Memory Card is not the correct type Remove and insert MERLIN LEGEND Upgrade or Installation Memory Card Exit Select Exit and repeat the forced installation procedure with a new memory card NOTE Forced installation can be performed successfully with an upgrade m
324. nterminated Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 11 Testing Trunks A CAUTION Be careful not to connect tie trunks to GS LS or DID ports Since all the Jacks on the termination block are 8 wire jacks it is possible to interchange tie trunk wires with GS LS or DID wires accidentally RJ48C X Interface The RJ48C X interface terminates a DS1 trunk at the customer s premises Both RJ48C and RJ48X interfaces have 8 wire modular jacks However the RJ48X interface includes shorting bars that loop the DS1 trunk s receive pair to the transmit pair This helps in testing the DS1 trunk from the central office Testing Trunks Before you connect the central office trunks to the control unit verify that there is dial tone and that you can dial out on every trunk DID trunks can be tested only through the control unit Do not test DID trunks at this time A CAUTION Do not use analog multiline telephones or MLX telephones for testing They do not work for these tests and can be damaged if you use them for this purpose Testing Loop Start Trunks To perform this test you need a single line telephone or an installer s test telephone craft set If you are installing rotary dial trunks use a rotary telephone to perform this test To test loop start trunks follow the steps below 1 Plug the single line telephone or the craft set into each central office line trunk jack either at the network interface or
325. ntrol Unit to the Network Interface Wiring Figure 4 3 RJ21X Wiring Field Tools To connect the RJ21 X network interface to the control unit follow the steps below Figure 4 3 shows the tools you need 1 For each piece of hardware drill two diagonally opposite holes into the backboard allowing for a 1 16 inch 1 6 mm space between each piece of hardware 2 Mount the wire troughs and the termination blocks There is a wire trough above and below each termination block Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 7 Wiring 3 If necessary repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a second column 4 Run the 25 pair amphenol cable on the RJ21X interface to the termination blocks If more length is needed use an A25D male connector single ended 25 pair nonplenum cable Mount the D rings to properly dress the wires as needed Cutoff the amphenol connector nearest to the cross connect field and strip the wires for each of the 25 pairs 7 Punch down the 25 pair wires to the termination block a Route the wires through the fanning slots on the termination block b Insert the conductors into the designated 110 connecting blocks already on the termination block c Use the D impact tool to seat the conductors See Figure 4 4 Remove any insulation fragments with a spudger UTAN gi Aiet nunan ie a ao Da eee ee ATO Figure 4 4 Using the D Impact Tool to Seat the Conduc
326. nued Example Purpose Choose Ext Prog from the display Plain constant width type indicates screen text that appears on the telephone display or PC screen To activate Call Waiting dial 11 Constant width type in italics indicates characters you dial at the telephone or type at the PC Product Safety Labels Throughout these documents hazardous situations are indicated by an exclamation point inside a triangle and the word CAUTION or WARNING A WARNING Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided A CAUTION Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor persona injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided Security Certain features of the system can be protected by passwords to prevent unauthorized users from abusing the system You should assign passwords wherever you can and limit knowledge of such passwords to three or fewer people xviii Maintenance and Troubleshooting Related Documents Nondisplaying authorization codes and telephone numbers provide another layer of security For more information see Appendix A Customer Support Information Related Documents In addition to this book the following list of documents are part of the documentation set Within the continental United States these documents can be ordered from the AT amp T Customer information Center by calling 1 800 432 6600 Docu
327. nymously with bit rate and bps Bearer channel 64 kbps channel that carries a variety of digital information streams such as voice at 64 kbps data at up to 64 kbps wideband voice encoded at 64 kbps and voice at less than 64 kbps alone or combined GL 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary Bearer channel Behind Switch mode binary code bipolar 8 zero substitution bipolar signal bipolar violation BIS bit bit rate blocking BMI board mm ee See B channel One of three modes of system operation in which the control unit is connected to behind another telephone switching system such as Centrex or DEFINITY which provides features and services to telephone users See also Hybrid PBX mode and Key mode Electrical representation of quantities or symbols expressed in the base 2 number system which includes zeros and ones See B8ZS Digital signal in which pulses ones alternate between positive and negative See also AMI B8ZS and bipolar violation Condition occurring when two positive or two negative pulses are received in succession See also AMI and B8ZS Built in Speakerphone Part of the model name of some analog multiline telephones binary digit One unit of information in binary notation it can have one of two values zero or one Speed at which bits are transmitted usually expressed in bps Also called data rate See also baud rate Condition in which end to
328. o initialize a Release 3 0 system use one of the following methods E Restore from a 3 0 system programming disk or Translation memory card E Upgrade to Release 3 0 from Release 1 0 1 1 2 0 or 2 1 See Chapter 9 Upgrading the System E Use system programming forms and the procedures from one of the guides listed in the next section Programming Guides This section describes how to restore the system from the Translation memory card or the system programming disk NOTE On initial installations make sure you perform a System Erase frigid start as described in Maintenance and Troubleshooting immediately before you restore from a disk or memory card or before you program the system Failure to perform the System Erase frigid start can result in incorrect programming Initializing and Testing the System 7 1 Initializing the System Programming Guides The following guides are available to assist you Programming Summary for quick reference procedures document number 555 630 111 m System Programming for detailed procedures document number 555 630 140 in the binder accompanying this one E System Programming and Maintenance SPM for detailed SPM procedures document number 555 630 140 in the binder accompanying this one Restoring from the Translation Memory Card If you received the Release 3 0 Translation memory card follow the steps below to initialize the system 1 Perform a System E
329. o touch the connector pins Lower the MFM to insert the pins into the socket in the telephone base Press firmly on the MFM board to snap the locking tabs into place The connector pins and tabs must be secure a Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 11 Installing Multi Function Modules Multi Function Module T R Operation Setting SAA Setting A B W and Y A C X and Z Figure 3 10 Setting and Adjusting the MFM Jumpers 6 Set or adjust the MFM jumpers for either a T R device or a supplemental alert device See Figure 3 10 a Pull the four connectors off of the MFM module b Place the connectors over the appropriate pins for the required operation and push down to secure into place 3 12 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules Figure 3 11 Removing the Jack Guard 7 To remove the jack guard see Figure 3 11 a lf the module cover has a square jack guard that protects the TEL OTHER jack area grasp and twist the guard to remove it Save the jack guard if you are wall mounting an MLX 10 or MLX 10D telephone Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 13 Installing Multi Function Modules Figure 3 12 Placing the Module Cover into the Locating Slot 8 To replace the module cover see Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 and a Place the locking tab on themodule cover into the slot on the left side of the telephone 3 14 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Mul
330. ocedure Menu gt Maintenance Slot Dial the slot no Enter Reset Yes PC Procedure F6 F2 Type the slot no gt F10 F7 gt F1 Appropriate Modules Any module that you are about to test Time Estimate Less than 1 second all calls in progress are terminated or put on hold immediately If you do not want to interrupt calls in progress use Busy Out instead of Reset as described above To reset the module follow the steps below 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit F2 4 40 Control Unit Problems Module Problems Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Specify the slot number nn 00 to 17 Slot Dial or type nn then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit 3 Select Reset Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Make a selection Status Demand Test For all MLX modules BchLoopback is Busy out Reset also displayed as an option on this Restore Upgrade screen For 100D modules CSU I pbk Error Events andClock are also Exit displayed as options on this screen F7 4 Select Yes Reset Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 Do you want to continue Cancel Control Unit Problems 4 41 Module Problems The screen below appears while the module is discontinuing service to lines trunks and extensions All calls in progress are being dropped Conso
331. of service Troubleshoot the T1 trunk channel service unit CSU and the cable between the CSU and the 100D module If problem persists escalate to your technical support organization Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem persists escalate to your technical Support organization Continued on next page Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 9 Error Logs O Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description Action 6C04 DS1 YELLOW ALARM Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem The far end of the network interface has persists check the CSU and the DS1 lost frame synchronization configuration the framing format If Service on the link has been lost problem persists escalate to your technical support organization 6C05 DS1 LOSS OF MULTI FRAME Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem Service on the link has been lost persists escalate to your technical Support organization 6006 DS1 REMOTE MULTI FRAME Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem The far end of the network interface is persists escalate to your technical experiencing loss of multiframe Support organization Service on the link has been lost 6C07 DS1 MAJOR ALARM Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem Average bit error rate exceeds 10E 3 persists escalate to your technical Service on the link has been lost Support organization Maintenance sSlot Error Events gt Current hr 6C08 DS1 MINOR ALARM Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem Average bit er
332. oms and relevant error reports Checking Unlabeled Wiring If a label is missing or damaged use a tone device and a telephone handset to match like wires You need the following tools Tone device E Telephone handset E Telephone cord with an 8 pin modular plug E 4 pair patch cord E Diagonal pliers or wire strippers To match like wires follow the steps below 1 Insert the telephone cord s 8 pin plug into an outlet on the floor area 2 Using diagonal pliers or wire strippers cut off the end of the telephone cord to expose the pairs 3 Choose a single pair and then untwist the wires 4 Attach one wire from the pair you have chosen to each clip The clips extend from the bottom of the tone device 5 Turn on the switch on the outside of the tone device You hear a high pitched alternating signal 6 Take the telephone handset and a 4 pair patch cord to the cross connect field between the control unit and the telephone Control Unit Problems 4 59 Module Problems 7 Go to the blue field on the cross connect field and starting at the top left corner push the patch cord onto the first connecting block 8 Using the diagonal pliers or wire strippers cutoff the other end of the patch cord and expose the pairs Do not cut out too much of the cord because you need the length to test the top rows of the cross connect field 9 Attach the handset s clips which extend from the base to the exposed wires of the patch cord
333. on Mode of transmission in which the information to be transmitted is first converted to digital form and then transmitted as a serial stream of pulses See also analog transmission DIP switch dual in line package Switch on a 400EM module used to select the signaling format for tie line transmission Also used on other equipment for setting hardware options direct facility DFT See personal line termination Direct Inward Dialing See DID Direct Line Console See DLC Direct Station See DSS Selector display buttons Buttons on an MLX display telephone used to access the telephone s display DLC Direct Line Console Telephone used by a system operator to answer outside calls not directed to an individual or a group and inside calls transfer calls make outside calls for users with outward calling restrictions set up conference calls and monitor system operation DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service Service provided by the AT amp T Switched Network ASN it routes incoming 800 or 900 calls according to customer selected parameters such as area code state or time of call door answering unit Device connected to a basic telephone jack and used at an unattended extension or front desk DOS disk operating system DSO Digital Signal 0 Single 64 kbps voice or data channel GL 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Glossary DS1 DSS DTE DTMF signaling Digital Signal Level 1 Bit oriented signalin
334. on together with ordering information In the U S A only AT amp T provides a toll free customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 24 hours a day Call the Helpline or your AT amp T representative if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system Terms and Conventions Used In this document the terms in the following list are used in preference to other equally acceptable terms for describing communications systems Lines Trunks and Facilities Facility is a general term that designates a communications path between a telephone system and the telephone company central office Technically a trunk connects a switch to a switch for example the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to the central office Technically a line is a loop start facility or a communications path that does not connect two switches for example an intercom line or a Centrex line However in actual usage the terms line and trunk are often applied interchangeably In this book we use line trunk and lines trunks to refer to facilities in general Specifically we refer to digital facilities We also use terms such as personal line ground start trunk DID trunk and so on When you talk to your local telephone company central office ask them what terms they use for the specific facilities they connect to your system xvi Maintenance and Troubleshooting Terms and Conventions Used Some older terms have been replaced with newer terms The followin
335. one and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation Up to two DSSs one DSS per MLX 28D or MLX 20L console can be powered from each control unit carrier For example a 3 carrier system can have 6 system operator positions each with one DSS powered from the control unit m Ifthe total actual unit load is less than or equal to 54 auxiliary power is not required m If the total actual unit load is greater than 54 continue to Step 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting C 5 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 7 Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads to 54 Remember that the 100D 400 400 GS LS TTR 800 GS LS ID 800 and 800 GS LS modules have unit loads of 0 0 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to recalculate unit loads for the new configuration m If the exchange reduces the unit load to 54 or less auxiliary power is not required m If the exchange does not reduce the unit load to 54 or less auxiliary power is required Continue to Step 8 NOTE Empty slots are not permitted between modules C 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 8 Calculate the unit loads for slots 5 and 6 of the carrier Qty x Unit Load Total Hybrid PBX or Equipment Modiffied Square Network Access Lines DS1 0 0 GS LS 0 0 Tie 1 4 Telephones MLX 10 0 9 MLX 10D 0 9 MLX 28D 1 2 MLX 20L 1 1 BIS 10 0 9 BIS 22 1 0 BIS 22D 1 0 BE 34 1 1 BIS 34D 1 1 MLC 5 0 0 MDC 9000 0 0 MDW
336. one features such as Transfer and Hold and advanced features such as Group Coverage and Park Data features allow both voice and data to be transmitted over the same system wiring Intended Audience This book provides detailed information about system and telephone trouble reports and troubleshooting operations It is intended for use by qualified field technicians who are responsible for system maintenance and troubleshooting and as a reference by anyone needing such information including support personnel sales representatives and account executives How to Use This Book This book provides step by step procedures for isolating troubles both inside and outside the communications system Refer to the chapter associated with the reported problem to initially start the troubleshooting procedure Refer to the following documentation for additional information Maintenance and Troubleshooting xv Terms and Conventions Used a o E Equipment and Operations Reference provides detailed information on system hardware telephones and other equipment Feature Reference provides details on the features of the communications system m System Programming gives procedural instructions for programming system features Users Guides and Operators Guides give procedural instructions for programming and using telephone features Related Documents later in this section provides a complete list of system documentati
337. ood working order AT amp T will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good working order Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis If AT amp T determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced AT amp T will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another AT amp T system lf you purchased your system directly from AT amp T AT amp T will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of AT amp T maintenance coverage you selected If you purchased your system from an AT amp T authorized reseller contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This AT amp T limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges including power surges due to lightning Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 13 Customer Support Information A SSS TTT The following will not be deemed to impair the good working order of the system and AT amp T will not be responsible under the limited warranty for damages resulting from Failure to follow AT amp T s installation operation or maintenance instructions m Unauthorized system modification movement or alteration E Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed thro
338. op 714 304 ristoro 71913097309 72013107370 EAKHA 722 31A7372 72313137373 rea 31417374 725l 3157315 726l 316 7316 787 317 7317 728 3187318 729131917319 73013207320 7327 7322 ae 7325 7326 at Figure B 2 Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts B 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting System Numbering Forms Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Music on Hold Line Trunk No Source Maintenance Alarm Line Trunk No Loudspeaker Page Line Trunk No s _ o Loop Start Reliable Disconnect aNoe a Yes i A acc Incoming acC Operator Line Trunk Toll Type Queue to Module Jack Type Pool Type Main Telephone Ourmode Prefix Req d Hold Disc priority Receive Type LS GS Line Dial Re _ No Persona Number Signaling for LD Interval Levelt Calls and Slot Log DID Tie Trunk Out number Line WATS or evelt Cal No ID etc No Codett To FX etc Equipment Label TT R Yes No Short Long 4 No Function 1 801 ety 2 802 A A A S 3 803 i dy 4 804 i UIII 5 805 fam ees TE A 6 806 A A S S 7 807 Pritt 8 808 LIII 9 809 weet 10 810 P 11 811 ie AE a S 12 812 fa a Ur 13 813 braid 14 814 meray 15 815 16 816 birt 17 817 wiii 18 818 IIll 19 819 iiig 20 820 LERT Factory Setting Maximum 11 poolis with up to 80 trunks per pool If the system has AUDIX Voi
339. or either on the memory card or with the backup file or if you abort the backup this screen appears The backup file being created is deleted and the backup is aborted You must repeat the backup procedure Card Removed While Backup Is in Progress Backup x x backup filename BACKUP IS CANCELED Verify that Memory Card has been inserted correctly File has been DELETED Exit D 16 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card The memory card is not inserted or is inserted incorrectly while a backup is in progress The backup file that was being created is deleted and the backup is aborted You must reinsert the memory card and repeat the backup procedure Card Missing or Card Not Inserted Correctly Memory Card Backup Verify that Memory Card has been inserted correctly The memory card is either not inserted or is inserted incorrectly The backup is aborted You must reinsert the memory card and repeat the backup procedure This screen may also appear if the wrong type of memory card is inserted and a backup or automatic backup is requested within one minute of insertion Verify that the card is a translation memory card Card Is Write Protected Memory Card Backup Memory Card is Write Protected Reset Write Protect Tab on Memory Card Exit The memory card is write protected You must remove the memory card flip the write protect tab reinsert the memory card and repeat the ba
340. or example between the individual ports or for the initialization of the ports to support features Error Detection The system detects errors and takes the trunk out of service if appropriate It attempts to restore the trunk and put it back into service Error Recording The system records all errors and outages in the error logs Audits and Updates The system checks the state of the T1 facilities through audits status checks and error logging 4 80 Control Unit Problems 100D Module Problems m Synchronization The system maintains proper synchronization to the loop clock and switches to the local clock when the loop clock is not available for example during a loss of signal or a blue alarm When the loop clock source is restored the system switches back to the loop clocks 100D Module Error Events This procedure allows you to check for 100D module errors If you have any questions about interpreting these errors contact your technical support organization Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance Slot Dial the slot no gt Enter gt Error Events Current hr or Previous hr PC Procedures F6 F2 Type the slot no gt F10 F8 gt F1 or F2 To check for Errors follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Mi Slot Port Exit Control Un
341. ort number B Channel Dial or type sspp and select Enter Enter B Channel sspp XXXX 5 26 Central Office Problems Checking Ports SS Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 4 Select Audit Line B Channel xxxx XXXX slot and port number entered Make a selection in Step 3 Audit Line Audit Call Fi The screen below appears only if the audit message is successfully ea and sent BChannel xxxx Audit Line XXXX Slot and port number entered in Step 3 Audit Initiated After about four minutes check the error logs m f new PRI errors occur contact your technical support organization for help on interpreting the results and your action m f no new PRI messages appear the ends are most likely in agreement The screen below appears when the message cannot be sent due to signaling failure BChannel xxxx Audit Line XXXX slot and port number entered in Step 3 Audit Failed Central Office Problems 5 27 Checking Ports a This indicates that the problem may beat the central office CO end First make sure the correct B channel is selected If the correct B channel is selected the customer or AT amp T representative acting as the customer s agent should ask the CO to clear the problem from that end If the problem is not at the CO end select the correct B channel and repeat the Audit Lines procedure Auditing Calls Summary Console Procedure Menu gt Maintena
342. ow Table 2 5 Signaling Formats for the 400EM Tie Trunk Module Installation Situation Preferred Signaling Format From System System Distant Location Distant Signaling Protected or Signaling Protected or co located 25 75 85 co located or DEFINITY 25 75 85 or DEFINITY reece Dimension PBX Unprotected Unprotected co located Compatible Standard Compatible Standard co located Compatible Standard Other Systems E amp M Type 1 C Requires a Compatible Standard protection unit MERLIN Same site Type 5 Simplex N A Type 5 Simplex N A LEGEND co located or inter office 2 36 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Modules 400 EM Module NICS D iit L o6 gL 9S P ZO I ol 829S9 b Switches 1 through 5 control Port 4 1C E amp M unprotected Switches 6 through 10 control Port 3 1C E amp M protected Switches 1 through 5 control Port 2 5 simplex Switches 6 through 10 control Port 1 1C E amp M protected Figure 2 11 400EM Module Sample Dip Switch Settings for Signaling Types 1C and 5 Installing the Control Unit 2 37 Hell the Modules Labeling 1 After all modules have been installed label all jacks with the numbered labels provided with the feature module m Line trunk labels have green numbers on off white background m Telephone labels have blue numbers on off white background
343. ow the steps below 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Port option Mai ntenance Make a selection System Slot EE Port Exit 5 20 Central Office Problems Checking Ports TT Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Specify the RS 232 port Port Make a Selection Line Trunk Modem Station B Channel RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Select R5232 Port1 or F3 Exit Enter RS232 Port2 F4 3 Select Reset RS232 Port x Make a selection EE Reset xX port selected in Step 2 Exit 4 Select Yes RS232 Port x Reset X port selected in Step 2 E1 Do you want to continue Yes Cancel Exit E2 The screen below is shown until Reset finishes or fails RS232 Port x Reset x port selected in Step 2 Reset in Progress Exit Central Office Problems 5 21 Checking Ports EE The screen below appears when Reset is completed successfully Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC RS232 Port x Reset x port selected in Step 2 Reset Successfully Completed The screen below appears when Reset fails If this occurs exit and try again RS232 Port x Reset Reset FAILED Resetting the Processor s Internal Modem Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance gt Port gt Modem gt Reset Yes PC Procedure F6 F3 F6 F1 F2 5 22 Central Office Problems Checking Ports To reset the processor s internal modem follow t
344. p start ports for reliable far end disconnect For AUDIX Voice Power you cannot use an 008 OPT module Installing Applications 8 13 Integrated Solution Ill I ee SLELDLDLmLmLmLmLmLmLCmCOC TS If IS Ill includes AUDIX Voice Power or Fax Attendant when users receive voice mail or fax mail messages the Message LEDs on their telephones light as long as a mailbox or fax mailbox has been assigned to each of those telephones The system may need more touch tone receivers if m Single line telephone users do not get dial tone m AUDIX Voice Power fails to transfer calls m Calls fail to ring or go to coverage prematurely m Message waiting lights fail to light CAS IS Ill uses the call information provided by the system s built in SMDR feature to process calls SPM IS Ill reports can be printed out or can be written to a disk hard or floppy SPM IS Ill reports should not be printed while the system is handling more than 100 calls per hour Only the CAS IS Ill and the SPM IS III applications can be connected to a system operating in Behind Switch mode Hardware Requirements The Master Controller Il Desktop and the Master Controller Ill Tower are the PC platforms for IS Ill The Master Controller Il is a desktop 20 MHz 386 SX PC with three available AT bus slots with the tape drive installed It has 8 MB of RAM memory either a 100 MB or a 200 MB hard disk drive 3 5 inch floppy
345. page m If the PC is more than 50 ft 15 2 m from the control unit see Connecting a PC More Than 50 Feet Away later on this chapter A CAUTION To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD avoid touching leads connectors pins and other components Use a properly grounded wrist strap Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 1 Connecting a PC to the Control Unit Connecting a PC Within 50 Feet Use this procedure to connect a PC to the control unit when the PC is within 50 ft 15 2 m of the control unit You need the following hardware for this procedure m 355AF adapter m D8W cord m EIA 232 D cable optional To connect a PC within 50 ft 15 2 m of the control unit follow the steps below See 1 Connect the D8W cord m For system programming or maintenance plug one end of a D8W cord into the ADMIN jack on the control unit m For SMDR plug one end of a D8W cord into the SMDR jack on the control unit 2 Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a 355AF adapter 3 Connect the 355AF adapter m If you are using an EIA 232 D cable plug one end of the cable into the 355AF adapter and plug the other end into the COM1 port on the PC m If you are not using an EIA 232 D cable plug the 355AF adapter directly into the COM1 port on the PC 5 2 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a PC to the Control Unit aA OO OO Processor Module ADMINI D8W MK 355AF EIA 232 D tt
346. pe 1 Standard default factory setting This setting is used to connect two systems through telephone company facilities Type 1 Compatible This setting connects two systems directly without using telephone company facilities Simplex Mode Type 5 This setting is used on 4 wire 2 pair circuits 400EM Tie Trunk Module DIP Switches During installation of 400EM Tie Trunk modules refer to Table 2 4 and Table 2 5 and to Figure 2 11 for the correct DIP switch settings for varying signaling protocols Table 2 4 Setting the 400EM Tie Trunk Module DIP Switches Ports DIP Signaling Type as numbered in Switch 1S Default Figure 2 11 Position and 1C 1C and 1S 5 Unprotected Protected Simplex E amp M Mode E amp M Mode Mode poo S ON OFF S OFForON 2 ON OFF OFForON po 6 ON OFF OFFoON 8 OF OF N 9 OFF OF N Installing the Control Unit 2 35 Installing the Modules Ee NOTE DIP switches 1 2 6 and 7 determine whether the tie trunks are protected or unprotected DIP switches 3 4 5 8 9 and 10 determine the mode Simplex mode is always protected Therefore the Protected Unprotected settings for DIP switches 1 2 6 and 7 have no effect The successful implementation of a tie trunk format is dependent upon matching the characteristics of both the PBX systems it connects The preferred signaling formats for a tie trunk originating in the system are shown in Table 2 5 bel
347. pment with its own power supply for example an answering machine in the unit load calculation Checking Unit Loads In the event of maintenance or equipment changes recalculate the unit loads for each carrier where there is a different configuration Use the worksheet in Appendix C Unit Load Calculation Worksheet Generally if you can distribute the DID modules and telephone modules equally across the carriers you prevent unnecessary drain on any one carrier The rules vary however depending on the system s mode The next two sections provide the rules for calculating unit loads in various modes Unit Loads for Hybrid PBX Mode The power supply model 391A1 generally supports six modules of any type in a Hybrid PBX system However if both of the following conditions are true the unit loads on a carrier can exceed the 54 unit 102 6 watts maximum m All six carrier slots are occupied by MLX telephone or analog multiline telephone modules m The carrier has more than 45 MLX 20L telephones and or 34 button analog multiline telephones installed Unit Loads for Key or Behind Switch Mode In a Key or Behind Switch system with four or fewer modules no calculation is needed The power supply model 391A1 generally supports four modules of any type in Key or Behind Switch mode Introduction 1 27 Unit Loads Auxiliary Power Units The power supply provides 54 unit loads 102 6 watts to each carrier If the
348. power supply Although the system allows you to remove and replace modules without affecting call processing partially inserting and removing a module can cause a cold start To add a 100D module or change any of its DS1 parameters the system must be idle When you replace a module use the same module type For example do not put a 008 MLX module in place of a 400 GS LS TTR module If a module is replaced with another type of module or if a module is added to the system without powering down the system first a cold start System Reset occurs If you move any module to a different slot be sure to renumber the modules by selecting Board Renumber from system programming See System Programming for information about board renumbering NOTE You can remove and replace line trunk and extension modules with the system power on without affecting normal call processing 2 40 Installing the Control Unit Replacing a Module N Q To remove and replace a module follow the steps below Refer to Busy out or reset the module Busy out is recommended Label all cords if they are not labeled already and then unplug them from the module For information about labeling trunk and extension cords see Chapter 3 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts and Chapter 4 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface For instructions on checking unlabeled wiring see Checking Unlabeled Wiring in Chapter 3 o
349. pplication can have one PC CMS Documentation Call Management System CMS for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Installation and System Programming Guide Call Management System for MERLIN LEGEND Communications System User s Quick Reference Call Management System for MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Supervisor s Guide Cal Management System for MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Planning Guide and Forms Installing Applications 8 11 CONVERSANT S oo CONVERSANT CONVERSANT is an entry level voice response system that enables you to run integrated voice response IVR applications CONVERSANT can automatically answer and route calls and execute telephone transactions CONVERSANT consists of the hardware and software that supports transaction processing data retrieval and data entry using a touch tone telephone connected to a public telephone network Consideration CONVERSANT supports a maximum of 24 channels of analog ports or up to 6 IVP4 boards In a co resident environment such as CONVERSANT and AUDIX Voice Power the system supports a maximum of 16 channels The number of channels assigned to AUDIX Voice Power can never exceed 12 Hardware Requirements The platform for CONVERSANT is the Master Controller III Tower The Master Controller Ill is a desktop 20 MHz 486 SX PC with six available EISA bus slots with the tape drive installed It has 8 MB of RAM It includes a system unit a monitor a
350. problems that cannot be isolated to a specific module If you find a problem with the carrier it must be replaced carriers cannot be repaired in the field Removing the Faulty Carrier 1 Remove the control unit housing If you need instructions see Removing the Control Unit Housing in Chapter 1 2 Backup system programming If you need instructions see System Programming and Maintenance SPM for disk backups or Appendix D Backing Up with a Memory Card 3 Power down the system by turning off the components listed below in the order given a Power supply on the basic carrier b Power supply on each expansion carrier c Auxiliary power units if present 4 Unplug the control unit from the AC outlet Control Unit Problems 4 85 Checking System and Slot Status E LC73 3 3CTt lt lt CO 5 Remove the processor the power supply and all other modules from the faulty carrier If you prefer to remove the cords first make sure they are labeled 6 Put the modules aside in order so that you can reinstall them later in the replacement carrier 7 Remove all modules from the carriers to the right of the faulty carrier 8 Starting with the rightmost carrier loosen the four screws that secure the four corners of the carrier to the backboard 9 Slide the carrier to the right until the connector disengages from the carrier to the left 10 Pull the carrier away from the wall so that the screws slip through the lar
351. proved PC or other DOS compatible PC with At least 512K of RAM A double sided floppy disk drive either 5 25 inch or 3 5 inch A serial port assigned to COM1 or COM2 The serial port can use either a DB 9 or DB 25 connector If a DB 9 connector is used a 9 pin to 25 pin adapter is also required The 9 pin side must be female m Video monitor monochrome or color m D8W cord and 355AF adapter if the PC is within 50 ft 15 2 m of the control unit Distances of greater than 50 ft 15 2 m require back to back ADUs See System Programming and Maintenance SPM for installation instructions Installing Applications 8 25 System Programming and Maintenance SPM 8 26 Installing Applications Upgrading the System To upgrade the control unit follow the steps below 1 Remove the control unit housing See Removing the Control Unit Housing next in this chapter 2 If the current system programming is to be used in the upgraded system back up system programming See Completing the Upgrade later in this chapter for details 3 Power down the system See Powering Down the System later in this chapter for instructions Upgrading the System 9 1 Removing the Control Unit Housing Removing the Control Unit Housing Remove the control unit housing as described below See m Fora MERLIN II or a MERLIN LEGEND Release 2 1 or later Communications System 1 Remove the front housing from e
352. r IS I III rr Tie trunk on which no start signal is necessary dialing can begin immediately after the trunk is seized See robbed bit signaling A tone users hear when they are off hook on an SA or ICOM button Display screen on an MLX display telephone that allows the user to preview incoming calls and see a list of the features programmed on line buttons Capability of S that simplifies the programming of common information for the system AUDIX Voice Power and if it is also installed Fax Attendant System See ISDN See IS IMI IS Il application that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department an extension or the system operator See ICOM buttons Hardware and or software that links systems programs or devices in Range Out of Building protector Surge protection device for off premises telephones at a location within 1000 feet 305 m of cable distance from the control unit Integrated Solution II or Integrated Solution Ill Set of UNIX System based applications that augments and provides additional services using the system GL 18 Maintenance and Troubleshooting citas ISDN ISDN 7500B Data Module Integrated Services Digital Network Public or private network that provides end to end digital connectivity for all services to which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user and network interfaces provides dig
353. r Enter Slot number 00 17 nn Backspace Exit 3 Select the B Channel Loopback test Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 Make a selection Status Demand Test Busy out Reset Restore Upgrade BchLoopback F4 Exit The screen below appears while the test is running BchLoopback Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 BchLoopback in Progress Control Unit Problems 4 55 Module Problems ee The screen below appears only if the module passes the test Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC BchLoopback Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 BchLoopback Passed The screen below appears only if the test fails BchLoopback Slot xx xx slot number entered in Step 2 BchLoopback Failed XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Lines 3 and 4 identify the cause of the failure or the number of errors found per B channel There are 16 B channels numbered 0 through 15 Line 3 displays the results for B channels 0 through 7 Line 4 is for B channels 8 through 15 Interpreting Test Results If the test completes successfully the module s B channels are functioning properly Continue with the next module test or restore the module if you are finished testing If the test fails find the error message in Table 4 5 and proceed as indicated 4 56 Control Unit Problems Module Problems Table 4 5 Channel Loopback Errors Error Messages Slot is not busied out Slot empty or not
354. r give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system E Use a nonpublished Remote Access number Assign access codes randomly to users on a need to have basis keeping a log of a authorized users and assigning one code to one person E Use random sequence access codes which are less likely to be easily broken Deactivate all unassigned codes promptly E Ensure that Remote Access users are aware of their responsibility to keep the telephone number and any access codes secure A 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Customer Support Information m When possible restrict the off network capability of off premises callers using calling restrictions Facility Restriction Levels and Disallowed List capabilities m When possible block out of hours calling m Frequently monitor system call detail reports for quicker detection of any unauthorized or abnormal calling patterns Limit Remote Call Forwarding to persons on a need to have basis Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability AT amp T warrants to you the customer that your MERLIN LEGEND Communications System will be in good working order on the date AT amp T or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Date If you notify AT amp T or its authorized reseller within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in g
355. r or ICOM or SA button again to disconnect intercom The green LEDs next to ICOM or SA and Speaker buttons should turn off and the dial tone should stop The red LED remains on in some cases Testing Telephones for Outside Dial Tone To test for outside line dial tone follow the steps below 1 Without lifting the handset press one of the outside line buttons The red LED next to this button should turn on 2 Pickup the handset or press the Speaker button The green LED next to the line button should turn on and you should hear a dial tone 3 Hang up and repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each line button on the telephone 7 6 Initializing and Testing the System Testing the System Testing Analog Multiline and Single Line Telephones To test the basic operation of analog multiline and single line telephones follow the steps below 1 If you are testing a multiline telephone press an ICOM or SA button 2 Pick up the handset and wait for dial tone 3 Dial the extension number of another working telephone You should hear ringback on your telephone and ringing at the called telephone 4 At the called telephone have someone pickup the handset verify that you have good two way communication 5 At both telephones hang up If you are testing a single line telephone this is the end of the procedure 6 If you are testing a multiline telephone press an outside line or SA button In Hybrid PBX mode make sure that the destination te
356. r section of this chapter Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Telephone Problems Symptom Section Intermittent telephone problems General Telephone and Wiring Problems Analog multiline telephone LEDs and or Analog Multiline Telephone Problems ringing tones do not work properly Time appears on display of an analog Analog Multiline Telephone Problems multiline telephone but incoming call information does not appear Telephone does not receive tones from the Voice Transmission Problems control unit Several single line telephones cannot dial Single Line Telephone Problems directly even though they are receiving Calls Users cannot make outside calls on single Single Line Telephone Problems line touch tone telephones Users are getting other people s calls Call Forwarding Problems General Telephone and Wiring Problems If intermittent telephone trouble occurs use the following steps as a guideline to check for general telephone and wiring troubles 3 2 Telephone Problems Fixing Telephone Problems E ESESErrlrtrti CS S i C C C t NOTE Refer to Troubleshooting Trunk Problems in Chapter 5 if the reported problem is echo during conversations on T1 trunks with GS emulation connected to a toll office 1 Check modular connections in the telephone for loose or broken connectors 2 Check modular connections in the connecting blocks for loose or broken connectors 3 Check modular connections in the
357. ramming extended superframe format Framing format consisting of individual frames of 24 eight bit slots and one signal bit 193 bits in a 24 frame extended superframe See also D4 framing format Electronic Switching System Class of central office CO switching systems developed by AT amp T in which the control functions are performed principally by electronic data processors operating under the direction of a stored program Carrier added to the control unit when the basic carrier cannot house all of the required modules Houses a power supply and up to six additional modules An endpoint on the internal side of the communications system An extension can be a telephone with or without an adjunct Also called station See also data station An analog digital or tip ring physical interface on a module in the control unit for connecting a telephone or other device to the system Also called station jack Programming performed at an extension to customize telephones for personal needs users can program features on buttons set the telephone ringing pattern and so on See also centralized telephone programming and system programming extended superframe See ESF format HE TTT F facility Equipment often a trunk constituting a telecommunications path between the system and the telephone company central office CO GL 14 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Facility Restriction Level factory set
358. rase frigid start See Maintenance and Troubleshooting for detailed instructions Console Procedure Menu Maintenance gt Slot Dialor Type 00 Enter gt Demand Test System Erase Line 5 left button twice gt Yes 2 Use the programming console and the translation memory card to perform the Restore procedure See of Maintenance and Troubleshooting for instructions Restoring from the System Programming Disk If you received the Release 3 0 system programming disk follow the steps below to initialize the system 1 Perform a System Erase frigid start See Maintenance and Troubleshooting for detailed instructions Console Procedure Menu Maintenance gt Slot Dialor Type 00 gt Enter gt Demand Test System Erase Line 5 left button twice gt Yes 7 2 Initializing and Testing the System Setting the Time and Date 2 Use SPM and the system programming disk to perform the Restore procedure See System Programming and Maintenance SPM for instructions NOTE You must restore the system using the system programming or backup disk or memory card whenever a frigid start System Erase occurs Setting the Time and Date If the Control Unit Diagram indicates that you should set the time and date do so before you test the system Follow this procedure Menu gt SysProg gt System Date Drop Dial current date Enter See System Programming if you need additional instructions Testing the System Onc
359. rd at the destination extension and adjust the volume as required 6 Hang up NOTE If the customer uses equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials the customer may be required to obtain a copyright license and pay license fees from a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or the customer can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require the customer to obtain such a license from an AT amp T representative Initializing and Testing the System 7 17 posing the Susten Testing the Power Failure Transfer Jacks To test a power failure transfer PFT jack for proper operation the outside line numbers to the module s line trunk jacks must be assigned and the trunks must be operational A PFT telephone on a GS line must have a GS button attached to the telephone See Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Ground Start Button To test PFT jacks follow the steps below 1 Plug a touch tone or rotary dial telephone into a PFT jack 2 Note the outside line number assigned to the lowest line trunk jack on the module and be sure that the outside trunk is connected to the system 3 Turn off power to the control unit Follow the procedure in Powering Down the System in Chapter 9 4 If the telephone is connected to a GS trunk push the GS button attached to the telephone 5 Pick up the handset on the touch tone or rotary di
360. re upgrade should be retried The circuit module should be considered unreliable until a successful upgrade is performed Continued on next page 2 8 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Error Logs e i Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description 1 03 FW UPGRADE COMPLETE 3001 ALARM TABLE FULL The error logs are full and no more errors can be added to them Turns on the processor LED 4401 USER REQUESTED SYS ERASE This error is logged after a System Erase If the System Erase is successful this error is removed immediately 6C01 DS1 LOSS OF SIGNAL ALARM Service on the link has been lost 602 DS BLUE ALARM All ones being received Service on the link has been lost 6C03 DS1 RED ALARM Incoming signal does not have valid framing information Service on the link has been lost Action No action required Correct indicated errors and then remove entries from the transient system error log to free up space If problem persists cold start the system before continuing with troubleshooting Sys Program System Restart If this error remains in the transient log do the System Erase again If problem persists troubleshoot the processor Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem persists check the channel service unit CSU and the cable between the CSU and the 100D module If problem persists escalate to your technical Support organization The far end of the network interface is out
361. re If the test fails record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module Restore If the 100D module successfully completes the CSU Loopback Test restore the module Restore isin the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu Maintenance Sl ot See the Restore procedure earlier in this chapter for additional information In preparation for running the CSU Loopback Test perform the following steps at the CSU 1 Busy out the 100D module 2 Prepare the CSU For the 551 T1 CSU connect the EQ OUT and EQ IN jacks see Figure 4 8 a Plug one end of a bantam to bantam patch cord or a loopback fixture into the EQ OUT jack on the front of the CSU b Plug the other end of the patch cord into the EQ IN jack on the CSU This causes the 551 T1 CSU to either loop back the network signal or send the all ones pattern depending on the chosen CSU option For the ESF T1 CSU flip the DTE LOOPBACK switch on the front panel to the up position to activate the loopback test see For the ACCULINK3150 CSU Press F2 on the front panel to select Test from the menu screen From the Test screen press F2 to select Lpbk From the Loopback screen press the right arrow once to display additional loopback tests Press F3 to display DLB DTE Loopback When DLB is selected Test Started appears on line 2 of the menu screen See Figures 4 10 through 4 13 4 72 Cont
362. red If problem persists contact your technical support organization 7004 PRI B CHNL RELEASED Troubleshoot the PRI trunk and report to service provider otherwise no action required If problem persists contact your technical support organization or cr Continued on next page Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 11 Error Logs E sSOSSOSsS lt ia a aca Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description 7005 7401 7402 7403 PRI B CH GROUP I NCONSI ST TRK UPLINK MESSAGE ERROR Communication problems between processor and modules Unrecognized message from module to processor LOOP CONTROL BIT NOT SET No loop current on an outgoing call If this error occurs four times consecutively and if Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled and the 50 maintenance busy limit has not been exceeded the trunk is busied out automatically NO LOOP CURRENT Communication problems between the module and central office No loop current If this error occurs four times consecutively and if Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled and the 50 maintenance busy limit has not been exceeded the trunk is busied out automatically Action Troubleshoot the PRI trunk and report to service provider otherwise no action required If problem persists contact your technical support organization Test the trunk with a single line telephone If the problem is not in the trunk replace the module wit
363. reen host Hybrid PBX mode See HFU Lightweight earpiece microphone and adapter used for hands free telephone operation Hands Free Answer on Intercom Feature that allows a user to answer a voice announced call Hands Free Unit Unit for older analog multiline telephones that allows users to make and receive calls on the speakerphone without using the handset Display normally shown on an MLX display telephone shows time date and call information and shows when some features are in use Telephone company or other switch providing features and services to the system users usually when the system is operating in Behind Switch mode One of three modes of system operation in which the system uses trunk pools and ARS in addition to personal lines Provides a single interface SA buttons to users for both inside and outside calling See also Behind Switch mode and Key mode I ICLID ICOM buttons Incoming Call Line Identification See Caller ID intercom buttons Telephone buttons that provide access to inside system lines for calling other extensions or receiving calls from them Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 17 Glossary immediate start tie trunk in band signaling inside dial tone Inspect screen Integrated Administration Integrated Services Digital Network Integrated Solution II III Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant intercom buttons interface IROB protecto
364. res the documents in a database and automatically faxes them on request 24 hours a day Prompts guide a caller using a touch tone telephone through the process of selecting a document and indicating the fax number where he or she will receive the information The caller then receives the requested information in minutes Installing Applications 8 3 Call Accounting System Considerations Using one line for fax transmission limits ADDS to approximately 100 calls per day Businesses anticipating more than 100 calls per day may need more than one system to handle the call volume efficiently Use ADDS in a two line configuration to maximize performance and minimize busy signals ADDS can work behind an automated attendant ADDS does not function with an MFM Hardware Requirements To set up ADDS a business must have the following m Automated Document Delivery System unit m Touch tone telephone m Group Ill G3 fax machine with an integrated handset To request and receive information a caller must have a touch tone telephone and a Group Ill G3 fax machine For backup one of the following is required m AT amp T 705 MT Multitasking Terminal m AT amp T 6386 SX WGS or compatible with ProComm Plus software See the AT amp T Automated Document Delivery System ADDS Administrator s Guide for installation instructions Call Accounting System Call Accounting System CAS is ideal for medium and large companies that want to
365. ress the first tie trunk button The red LED next to the tie trunk button just pressed turns on 2 Pick up the handset In Hybrid PBX systems with pooled tie trunks press an SA button and dial the pool dial out code The green LED next to the selected button turns on and you hear ringing 3 When the person answers verify that you have good two way communication and hang up The green LED should turn off the red LED should turn off and another red LED may turn on 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each outgoing and two way automatic start tie trunk 7 10 Initializing and Testing the System Lesing the System Testing Two Way Dial Repeating Tie Trunks For two way dial repeating tie trunks perform both the incoming and outgoing dial repeating tie trunk tests Testing Incoming Dial Repeating Tie Trunks Perform this test for dial repeating tie trunks that are two way or incoming only If you are testing two way dial repeating tie trunks perform the outgoing test as well To test incoming dial repeating tie trunks follow the steps below 1 Have the person at the far end place a dial repeating call to your telephone by dialing the proper tie trunk number Your telephone rings and the green LED next to ICOM or SA for Hybrid PBX systems flashes 2 Pick up the handset The red LED next to the ringing button turns on and the green LED changes from flashing to steady 3 Verify that you have good two way communication and
366. ring field between the RJ21X interface and the control unit using a 66 type block RJ21 This field converts the female amphenol connector to sets of four 1 pair modular jacks 4 4 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface Wiring 66 Type Block RJ21 type 25 Line Interface Line Tip Ring Phone Number Line e T T Jr 555 3827 e R 2 Set 7a 2 555 3828 Line 2 T Te JT 3 555 3829 R J R 28 o MESA ng ez e e eo Line a alt ae Orn 25 50 25 555 3851 R CT If 7R 30 Line 5 g __ l 31 Line e 6 A CUSTOMER JACJ NO e pm 4 Jacks Eee a y Se To From oe asses Se RJ 21X Amphonol Control A 1 pr Plug Unit e r ENR d a e ge oe 1 pr eo Tt T i ear oT os 1 pr e gug O BE OPENED e BY AUTHORIZED ees png ES RERNE Bay Line 25 TJ pate as ees BOULDER CO From C 0 Figure 4 1 RJ21X Network Interface Connector Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 5 Wiring Building the Wiring Field Build the wiring field between the network interface and the control unit using 110AB1 100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks and associated hardware Figure 4 2 shows the hardware you need including 110AB1 100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks 110A1 wire troughs D rings and D2R cords AB1 100FT D TERMINAL BLOCK Figure 4 2 RJ21X Wiring Field Hardware 4 6 Connecting the Co
367. rinter m For the 572 printer set the options on the printer according to Table 5 1 See the user s guide supplied with the printer for more information m For the 475 476 printer set the DIP switches on the printer according to Table 5 2 See the user s guide supplied with the printer for more information E For the CAT printer set the DIP switches on the printer according to Table 5 3 See the user s guide supplied with the printer for more information m For the Applications printer set all the DIP switches on the printer to off See the user s guide supplied with the printer for more information Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 21 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit Table 5 1 AT amp T 572 Printer Options No 01 02 03 04 05 06 5 22 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Function FORM LENGTH LPI CPI LQ or NLQ BUZZER FONT RESOLUTION BUFFER PW ON MODE DIRECTION BUFFER FULL P E AUTO CR ZERO AUTO LF 1 SKIP Menu 09 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 01 Status 11 6 10 LQ ON BUILT IN 144 ON LINE ON LINE BI DIR 1 LF CR ACTIVE CR LF 0 CR ONLY OFF Continued on next page Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit Table 5 1 Continued 32 33 34 35 81 82 83 84 85 91 92 93 94 95 96 Function CHAR SET GO GL CHAR SET G1 GR CHAR SET G2 CHAR SET G3 OFF LINE STATE DSR RTS TIMING
368. roblems that span the entire system including the control unit telephones adjuncts and network interface Transient errors are less serious than permanent errors However some transient errors can become permanent if they occur a certain number of times as shown in Table 2 1 The Threshold column indicates the number of occurrences at which a transient error becomes permanent Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 1 Error Logs O Table 2 1 Transient Permanent Error Thresholds Error Transient Permanent Code Error Description Threshold 1402 LOOP BIT CONTROL NOT SET 4 1403 NO LOOP CURRENT 4 1404 STUCK RINGING 2 8403 NO EXTERNAL RELEASE 2 8408 NO LOOP CURRENT 4 840C STUCK RINGING 2 840D INCORRECT FIRMWARE STATE 2 Checking the Error Logs Once you have reviewed the error logs you should print the error information This will help you determine whether your work has resolved each problem Refer to Summary below or System Programning for additional information about printing Summary Console Procedure Menu Mai ntenance sSystem Error Log gt Last 10 orPermanent or Transient RO ProcRaLTE F6 F1 o F2 F1 or F2 or F3 Printing from Console System Programming Exit More Print More More Error Log Printing from PC E1 F5 PqUp 4F3 PqUp PqUp F6 2 2 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Error Logs rrr TTT TTT To check the error
369. rol Unit Problems 100D Module Problems The ACCULINK 3160 3164 DSU CSU is physically similar to the 3150 CSU with programming on the front panel and menus appearing on the LCD screen For the preparation of specific tests see the operator s guide that comes with the unit Figure 4 8 551 T1 CSU Loopback Connection Control Unit Problems 4 73 100D Module Problems DTE LOOPBACK SEND CODE ESF T1 CSU UP DN p Eq Eq SM SM si CEL D HT FRAME ALARM nose NEAR END LOOPED LOW DENS BPV LOOPED CRC ERROR DIAGNOSTIC FRAME LOSS INTERFACE PULSES LOCAL CRITICAL POWER POWER FAR END LOOPED Figure 4 9 ESF T1 CSU DTE Loopback Connection Sat Paradyne gt _ _ LA A ACCULINK F1 F2 F re Le Le ae EQPT NET aie ale iy OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV OUT iai OUT k EOT O 0 0 ORW JO OO Figure 4 10 ACCULINK 3150 CSU Front Panel 4 74 Control Unit Problems 1000D Module Problems CSU ESF S a Stat Text Cnfig aA Se eo Figure 4 11 ACCULINK 3150 CSU DTE Loopback Command 1 Test al Ripbk Lpbk Ptrns me Si ee ee A Figure 4 12 ACCULINK 3150 CSU DTE Loopback Command 2 Control Unit Problems 4 75 100D Module Problems Loopback Abort LLB Figure 4 13 ACCULINK 3150 CSU DTE Loopback Command 3 Loopback ea LLB PLB Due Eg Figure 4 14
370. ror rate exceeds 10E 6 persists escalate to your technical Support organization Maintenance sSlot Error Events gt Current hr 6C09 DS1 MISFRAME ALARM Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem Misframe count reached 18 persists escalate to your technical Support organization Maintenance sSlot Error Events Current hr Continued on next page 2 10 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Error Logs ee Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description Action 6COA DS1 SLIP ALARM Troubleshoot the T1 trunk If problem Slip count reached 88 persists escalate to your technical Support organization Maintenance Slot Error Events Current hr 6C0B DS1 HARDWARE NOPERATI VE If problem persists escalate to your DS1 hardware is not operating technical support organization properly If this is the only 100D DS1 module or if this is the module designated to have the active clock itt TDM bus clock generator was not activated 7001 PRI SVC AUDIT TIMEOUT Troubleshoot the PRI trunk and report to service provider otherwise no action required If problem persists contact your technical support organization 7002 PRI SVC STATE I NCONSI ST Troubleshoot the PRI trunk and report to service provider otherwise no action required If problem persists contact your technical support organization 7003 PRI D CHNL I NOPERATI VE Troubleshoot the PRI trunk and report to service provider otherwise no action requi
371. rs follow the steps below 1 Find out which numbers have been programmed for System Speed Dial See the system manager or use Form 10b as a reference for System Speed Dial numbers 2 From the test telephone pickup the handset and dial a System Speed Dial code Verify that you have good two way communication and that the correct party was reached Coverage Test To verify that coverage is in effect follow the steps below 1 Have someone call the covered telephone 2 Count the number of rings at the covered telephone before the covering telephone starts ringing This should be the same as the programmed number of rings 3 Pick up the handset at the covering telephone and verify that you have good two way communication 4 Hang up the handset at the covering telephone 5 Check both Individual and Group Coverage 7 14 Initializing and Testing the System Testing the System Testing the DSS At each Direct Station Selector DSS check that all lights are operational Then use the DSS to call a telephone in the system Test the Page buttons on the DSS Testing Night Service To test the Night Service feature on the system operator console follow the steps below 1 At the system operator console press the Night Service button If Night Service with Outward Restriction is programmed you must also enter the password You can also activate Night Service on a DLC by pressing the Feature button and dialing 39 The Nig
372. rs a day Call the Helpline or your AT amp T representative if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system XX Installation Terms and Conventions Used SEES Terms and Conventions Used In this document the terms in the following list are used in preference to other equally acceptable terms for describing communications systems Lines Trunks and Facilities Facility is a general term that designates a communications path between a telephone system and the telephone company central office Technically a trunk connects a switch to a switch for example the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to the central office Technically a line is a loop start facility or a communications path that does not connect two switches for example an intercom line or a Centrex line However in actual usage the terms line and trunk are often applied interchangeably In this book we use line trunk and lines trunks to refer to facilities in general Specifically we refer to digital facilities We also use terms such as personal line ground start trunk Direct Inward Dialing DID trunk and so on When you talk to your local telephone company central office ask them what terms they use for the specific facilities they connect to your system Some older terms have been replaced with newer terms The following list shows the old term on the left and the new term on the right trunk module line trunk module trunk jack line t
373. runk jack station extension station jack extension jack analog data station modem data station digital data station 7500B data station analog voice and analog data station analog voice and modem data station digital voice and analog data station MLX voice and modem data station analog data only station modem data only station digital data only station 7500B data only station digital voice and digital data station MLX voice and 7500B data station Installation xxi Product Safety Labels Typographical Conventions Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the information presented Example Purpose It is very important that you follow Italics indicate emphasis these steps You must attach the wristband before touching the connection The part of the headset that fits over Italics also set off special terms one or both ears is called a headpiece If you press the Feature button onan The names of fixed feature factory MLX display telephone the display imprinted buttons appear in bold The lists telephone features you can names of programmed buttons are select A programmed Auto Dial printed as regular text button gives you instant access to an inside or outside number Choose Ext Prog from the display Plain constant width type indicates text screen that appears on the telephone display or personal computer PC screen To activate Call Waiting dial 11 Constant width typ
374. s are provided for ventilation To protect this equipment from overheating do not block these openings Never push objects of any kind into this product through module openings or expansion slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts which could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on this product Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use cleaners or aerosol cleaners Auxiliary equipment includes answering machines alerts modems and fax machines To connect one of these devices you must first have a Multi Function Module MFM Do not operate telephones if chemical gas leakage is suspected in the area Use telephones located in some other safe area to report the trouble Installation Safety A WARNING For your personal safety DO NOT install an MFM yourself E ONLY an authorized technician or dealer representative shall install set options or repair an MFM 8 To eliminate the risk of personal injury due to electrical shock DO NOT attempt to install or remove an MFM from your MLX telephone Opening or removing the module cover of your telephone may expose you to dangerous voltages SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Installation xvii Safety xviii Installation A About This Book The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an advanced digital switching system that integrates voice an
375. s below 1 0 volt per meter are unlikely to cause interference To estimate the field strength produced by radio transmitters divide the square root of the emitted power in kilowatts by the distance from the antenna in kilometers which equals the field strength in volts per meter Example 49 000 kw 7 000 10 km 6 2 miles 0 7 volts per meter This yields the approximate field strength in volts per meter and is relatively accurate for distances greater than about half a wavelength 492 ft or 150 m for a frequency of 1000 Hz If the result exceeds 1 0 volt per meter you may have to install shielded cables and or Z200A filters Sesleri Al following Maintenance and Troubleshooting for FCC Part 15 radio frequency regulations Control Unit Requirements m Dimensions Basic carrier 14 in wide by 23 in high by 12 in deep Basic carrier and one expansion carrier 25 in wide by 23 in high by 12 in deep Installing the Control Unit 2 3 Overview So LLL Basic carrier and two expansion carriers 37 in wide by 23 in high by 12 in deep m Location Within 5 ft 152 cm of an AC power outlet that is not switch controlled Within 25 ft 762 cm of the network interface or use an Off Premises Range Extender OPRE Within 1000 cable ft 305 m of telephones or use an OPRE for basic telephones A CAUTION The AC outlet for the control unit cannot be switch controlled Plugging
376. s from a remote location The Remote Administration and Maintenance feature through proper administration can help you reduce the risk of unauthorized persons gaining access to the network However telephone numbers and access codes can be compromised when overheard in a public location are lost through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information or through carelessness for example writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding them Additionally hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the information to other hackers Substantial charges can accumulate quickly It is your responsibility to take appropriate steps to implement the features properly evaluate and administer the various restriction levels and protect and carefully distribute access codes Under applicable tariffs you will be responsible for payment of toll charges AT amp T cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit resulting from unauthorized access Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 17 Customer Support Information To reduce the risk of unauthorized access through Remote Administration and Maintenance please observe the following procedures m The System Administration and Maintenance capability of a Hybrid PBX or Key system is protected by a password Change the default password immediately Continue to change the password regularly Only give the passwor
377. s on the 7500B data modules to the EIA 232 V 35 converters Two male male V 35 DB 37 cables 8 ft 24 m to connect the V 35 communication ports on the video codec to the EIA 232 V 35 converters Two male male RS 366 DB 25 cables 8 ft 24 m to connect the RS 366 dialing port of the video codec to PORT 2 on the 7500B data module Figure 6 6 shows an example of a video conferencing configuration NOTES 1 If you are connecting MLX telephones omit both 440A4 terminating resistors 2 The maximum cord length from the 7500B data module to the telephone is 80 ft 24 38 m Connecting Data Equipment 6 17 Video Conferencing Data Stations 008 MLX or 408 GS LS MLX Module 4 100 Module T ane D8W cord pros line trunk B i 2 jack AMI D8W cord Setting Two MLX extension jacks LINE jack__ i 404A fi lTerminating 440A4 Sp ea jResistor Terminating aS aper Resistor Switch MLX Telephones Optional Adpater 4ESS Switch Optional for Voice Only Calls D8W cord Ol tional pE oe ISDN Op L D8W cord j fren eoa D8W cord Network LINE jack Fine a LINE jack PHONE jack PHONE jack Data Module pata Module AC Outlet Multipurpose Multipurpose qe Enhancement Enhancement Board ies 25 DB 25 pez Cable V24 WP90110 L7 Power Supply EIA 232 V 35 Converter WP90110 L7 Power Supp
378. se a properly grounded wrist strap to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD Installing the Processor in the Carrier To install the processor in the carrier follow the steps below Refer to 1 Remove the protective cover from the gold finger connector on the back of the processor 2 Lower the hook on top of the processor module onto the rod on top of the carrier in Slot 0 the first slot next to the power supply 3 Make sure that the connector on the module mates properly with the connector on the carrier as you swing the processor down into place A CAUTION To avoid damage do not force the module If the module does not insert easily press the bottom rear locking tab remove the module and inspect the module and carrier for damage or obstruction The bottom rear locking tab is shown in Figure 2 10 This tab is used on all modules If there is no damage and no obstruction reinsert the module A damaged carrier or module must be replaced 4 Push firmly until the processor snaps into place The processor should be securely attached to the carrier and locked in place by the locking tab on the bottom rear of the processor 2 30 Installing the Control Unit Installing the Processor Figure 2 10 Installing the Processor into the Carrier Installing the Control Unit 2 31 Installing the Modules Installing the Modules A CAUTION Use a properly grounded wrist strap to prevent damage from electrostatic
379. shooting D 7 Backing Up with a Memory Card Console Display Instructions 2 Select the System menu System Programming gt Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables LinesTrunks AuxEquip Exit Ni ghtSrvce 3 Select Back Restore System Make a selection Restart Mai ntenBusy SProg Port Date Mode Ti me Board Renum Back Restore EEE Exit 4 Select Backup Memory Card Make a selection Backup Restore Auto Backup Exit D 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Additional Information PC Backing Up with a Memory Card mm ee Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 5 Select the backup filename Memory Card Backup Make a selection MM BACK1 AUTO BACKI MM BACK2 AUTO BACK2 B BACK3 EEEE If you select AUTO BACK1 or AUTOBACK2 go to Step 8 You EE cannot rename either of these H two files If you select BACK1 BACK orBACK3 and do not want to rename the file go to Step 8 Press the button or function key next to your selection G 6 Rename the backup file n 1 to 11 characters Backup File Enter name x backup file selected in Step 5 BACK x mmdd mm dd current month and day Punctuation Enter Backspace Exit Use Punctuation to toggle B between the letters and D punctuation Dial or type n e Use the buttons next to the display to specify the letters A through I and punctuation Use the line feature
380. sic features display intercom dialtone 7 6 outside dial tone 7 6 7 7 sd overviewl7 3 7 4 speakerphones wth MF 7 5 28 Music On Hold feature 7 16 7 17 Night Service feature paging system System tie trunks incoming dial repeating outgoing automatic start FRE dial repeating overview two way AE 7 9 two way dial repeating touch tone receivers TTRs 7 20 IN 8 Installation EE e TTT Tie trunks 400EM 2 33 testing incoming automatic start incoming dial repeating outgoing automatic start ee dial repeating overview L 7 90 Tip ring T R device connecting to MLX telephone Touch tone receiver TTR testing Transformer Translation memory card Trunks jack labeling testing DID 7 8 7 9 Cid ground start 7 8 OOOO O incoming dial repeating loop start outgoing automatic start outgoing dial repeating two way automatic start two way dial repeating TTR touch tone receiver see Touch tone receiver TTR testing Two voice pairs 3 60 3 61 ____ Index SSE e U Unit load auxiliary power units checking 2 16 2 17 Upgrading the system control unit 9 1 from MERLIN II system from previous release cS Es ieee 9 1419 V Video conferencing configuration diagram W Wireless telephone 3 57 Installation IN 9 IN 10 Instal
381. simulation window Del Delete The Del key on your PC can be used instead of F8 Delete when it appears as a choice in the 7 by 24 console simulation window Ty VQ na The up down left and right arrow keys can be used to highlight selections in a menu and to select the 20 line buttons below the 7 by 24 console simulation window 1 14 Introduction Preparation for Hardware Maintenance E ee Exiting SPM To exit SPM follow these steps 1 Return to the System Programming menu If the display gives directions for returning to the main menu follow the directions If not press F10 Exit to return to the previous menu Continue to press F10 Exit until the main menu appears Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 2 Select the Quit option SPM Main Menu Press the Home key Menu Select Function F1 Sys Program Maintenance F6 F2 Backup Restore F7 F3 Boards Pass Thru F8 F4 Print Opts Password F9 F5 Moni tor Language F10 Preparation for Hardware Maintenance If you are performing on site hardware maintenance first remove the control unit housing the cover of the control unit then the AC power Removing the Control Unit Housing To remove the control unit s housing see Figure 1 5 m If you have a MERLIN II Communications System or a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 2 1 or later 1 Pull the bottom front of the housing towards you When it releases
382. ss an event detection because the slot number was invalid Action Test the trunk with a single line telephone If the problem is not in the trunk replace the module with one that is known to be working If the problem is gone when using the known good module replace the module and restart Reset the board If problem persists troubleshoot the module Maintenance sSlot Slot Number yReset Reset the board If problem persists troubleshoot the module No action required Delete this entry from the transient log Reset the board If problem persists troubleshoot the module No action required however if problem persists restart the system Continued on next page Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 13 Error Logs Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description Action 7806 NOT IN STANDBY MODE Reset the board If problem persists Reported during cold start or troubleshoot the module background check 7807 SELF TEST NOT COMPLETER Reset the board If problem persists Reported during cold start troubleshoot the module 7808 TEST RESULT REGISTER BAD Reset the board If problem persists A module error or processor error troubleshoot the module resulted while running test 7809 TEST STATUS REGISTER BAD Reset the board If problem persists A module error or processor error troubleshoot the module resulted while running test 780A DPR TEST NOT COMPLETED If problem persists troubleshoot the
383. ssor Problems i i To perform Peek follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu select the Slot option Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit F2 2 Specify Slot 00 Slot Dial or type 00 then select Enter Enter Slot number 00 17 00 Backspace Exit 3 Select the Demand Test Slot 00 For all MLX modules BchLoopback is Make a selection also displayed as an option on this Status screen For 100D modules SU I pbk Demand Test Error Events andClock are also displayed as options on this screen Control Unit Problems 4 13 Processor Problems Sn ca Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 4 Select the Peek option Demand Test Slot 00 Poke andSystem Erase arenot Make a selection displayed which prevents customers MM Peek from accidentally changing the Poke processor memory System Erase Exit F1 5 Dial a memory address Slot 00 Enter Hex Dial nnnnnnnn then select Enter Address Backspace The screen below shows the details of the address you specified Peek AddressOxaaaaaaaa gt aaaaaaaa address entered in Step 5 Oxaaaa Oxaaaa Oxaaaa Oxaaaa Oxaaaa Oxaaaa Oxaaaa Oxaaaa Press the More button to review Exit the next address PgUp 4 14 Control Unit Problems Processor Problems Poke A CAUTION Do not perform Poke unless you are following instructions from your tec
384. state Re initiate the forced installation by power cycling the system after inserting the memory card Incompatible Releases If releases are incompatible see System Programming and Maintenance SPM for instructions on converting the system programming before upgrading to the new release 4 28 Control Unit Problems Processor Problems A CAUTION If releases are incompatible pressing the hidden key will delete existing programming Before pressing the hidden key make a backup of the system programming Use the SPM or PCMCIA translation card Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC If the releases are incompatible the following screen appears Upgrade MemCard Rel 3 y Von mm Current Rel 3 y Von mm Incompatible releases Pressing hidden key two times EE will delete existing program F5 See SPM for instructions on converting the system programming before upgrading to the new release If hidden key is pressed the following screen appears Installation MemCard Rel 3 y Von mm Current Rel 3 y Von mm All translations will be DELETED Exit F5 Control Unit Problems 4 29 Processor Problems E YT Replacing the Processor Module A failed processor module must be replaced immediately To replace the processor module follow the steps below 1 If possible save system programming See Appendix D Backing Up with a Memory Card To back up onto a floppy disk see System
385. sting outgoing or two way automatic start tie trunks have someone ready to take your call at the receiving telephone Testing Incoming Automatic Start Tie Trunks Perform this test for automatic start tie trunks that are two way or incoming only If you are testing two way automatic start tie trunks perform the outgoing test as well Initializing and Testing the System 7 9 Testing the System a SSS To test incoming automatic start tie trunks follow the steps below 1 At the far end tie trunk site have someone pickup the handset and dial a tie trunk assigned to a button on your telephone Your telephone should ring and the LEDs next to the tie trunk button should respond as follows the red LED should turn on and the green LED should flash 2 Pick up your handset and verify that you have good two way communication The green LED should change from flashing to steady 3 At both telephones hang up The green LED should turn off the red LED should turn off and another red LED may turn on 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for all incoming and two way automatic start tie trunks Testing Outgoing Automatic Start Tie Trunks Perform this test for automatic start tie trunks that are two way or outgoing only If you are testing two way automatic start tie trunks perform the incoming test as well To test outgoing automatic start tie trunks follow the steps below 1 At any telephone that has access to an automatic start tie trunk p
386. sts Troubleshoot carrier Chapter 4 Carrier OK problem persists Troubleshoot trunks Trunks OK problem persists Troubleshoot central office Problem persists apter 5 Figure 1 7 Maintenance Strategy 1 18 Introduction e error logs i Troubleshoot power supply Pb Chapter 4 Problem persists Troubleshoot processot Problem persists Troubleshoot carrier 2b apter 4 Problem persists Escalate to NSAC or AT amp T authorized dealer 2b Escalate to NSAC or AT amp T authorized dealer Maintenance Strategy Trouble Reports System trouble can be reported in two ways m By users m By system alarms permanent errors Automatic Tests pe eyerem performs ongoing maintenance automatically by running tests at m Monitor the status of equipment E Audit operations consistency E Detect hardware malfunctions Without disrupting normal service the tests check hardware and software that are in service The system registers any errors it detects in the error logs and corrects them automatically if possible Alarms If the automatic tests indicate serious error conditions the system generates an alarm Depending on how the system is programmed the system announces an alarm condition in one of the following ways m An LED for a line or feature button turns on at an operator console or other designated telephone m The red s
387. t Figure 1 6 Disconnecting AC Power Introduction 1 17 Maintenance Strategy SEE _ Maintenance Strategy The maintenance strategy presented in this section is only a guideline not a fixed procedure Refer to Figure 1 7 whenever you are uncertain as to how to proceed As you become more experienced with maintaining and troubleshooting the system you will most likely develop your own strategy One or more alarms turn on User or AT amp T authorized personnel S encant Aam LED reports a problem phone Discuss problem O Supplemental alert problem with the source 1b O Status display la Troubleshoot telephone Maintenance or programming accessed just before All Problem persists other error s occurred Check problems permanent errors Check Inconclusive in error logs 5 eck error logs je rook otras oos er g Check Access Log ip Pt p Inconclusive apter 2c Can t access Problem gone verify that errors Can t access error logs do not recur Errors Troubleshoot errors errors 2a Table 2 1 Error Codes Corrective action per Table 2 1 Troubleshoot power supplyjfirst if indicated 3 Chapter 4 Power supply OK problem persists Troubleshoot processor if indicated 4 apter 4 Processor OK problem persists Troubleshoot modules 5 apter 4 J Modules OK problem persi
388. t be through a USOC RJ48C or RJ48X Connection to DID requires a USOC RJ11C RJ14C or RJ21X These USOCs must be ordered from your telephone company m Party Lines and Coin Telephones This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines Notification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number REN which can be found on the back or bottom of the control unit as follows a If this equipment is to be used as a Key system report the number AS593M 72914 KF E a If the system provides both manual and automatic selection of incoming outgoing access to the network report the number AS593M 72682 MF E Maintenance and Troubleshooting A 3 Customer Support Information A re a If there are no directly terminated trunks or if the only directly terminated facilities are personal lines report the number AS5USA 65646 PF E a The REN Ringer Equivalency Number for all three systems is 1 5A For tie line connection the facility interface code FIC is TL31M and the service order code SOC is 9 0F For connection to off premises stations the FIC is OL13C and the SOC is 9 0F For equipment to be connected to 1 544 Mbps digital servi
389. t in your system This can happen if you dialed 07 and your system has only a 012 module and one 400 module for a total of six TTRs 3 If you hear reorder tone try again Initializing and Testing the System 7 19 Installing the Control Unit s Housing If you hear dial tone after one to three seconds of silence proceed with this test 4 Dial 12345678 0 You should hear a dual tone multifrequency DTMF signal as each button is pressed When you finish dialing you should hear a 3 beep confirmation tone 5 Repeat the test for each TTR Installing the Control Unit s Housing After you complete system acceptance testing and if you are confident that the system is completely installed you can install the control unit s housing NOTE Beginning with Release 2 1 or later the control unit covers are identical to those on the MERLIN II Communications System if you need to install control unit covers on a system prior to Release 2 1 see Chapter 9 Upgrading the Installing the Top Cover To install the top cover see Figure 7 2 and follow these steps 1 Be sure the cords have been pressed through the wire managers at the base of the modules 2 Hold the top cover with the hooks facing you Engage the tabs at the rear of the top cover with the carrier Lower the top cover so the legs lock into the vents on the module 7 20 Initializing and Testing the System Installing the Control Unit s Housing
390. t modules carrier assemblies and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit Use only AT amp T recommended approved MERLIN LEGEND Communications System accessories If equipment connected to the analog extension modules 008 408 408 GS LS or to the MLX telephone modules 008 MLX 408 GS LS MLX is to be used for in range out of building IROB applications IROB protectors are required Maintenance and Troubleshooting xi salci E Do not install this product near water for example in a wet basement location E Do not overload wall outlets as this can result in the risk of fire or electrical shock E The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug with a third grounding pin This plug will fit only into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary ground E Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it m Slots and openings in the module housings are provided for ventilation To protect this equipment from overheating do not block these openings Never push objects of any ki
391. t the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Use only AT amp T manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Communications System circuit modules carrier assemblies and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit Use only AT amp T recommended approved MERLIN LEGEND Communications System accessories If equipment connected to the analog extension modules 008 408 408 GS LS or to the MLX telephone modules 008 MLX 408 GS LS MLX is to be used for in range out of building IROB applications IROB protectors are required Installation xv Safety xvi Do not install this product near water for example in a wet basement location Do not overload wall outlets as this can result in the risk of fire or electrical shock The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug with a third grounding pin This plug will fit only into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary ground Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Slots and openings in the module housing
392. tatus LED on the processor module lights m In Release 3 0 the error code status display on the processor module displays F if a frigid start or if a cold start occurs See System for details about frigid start System Erase or cold start Restart Introduction 1 19 Maintenance Strategy OK SESE rm If a software installation or upgrade is taking place a blinking character is displayed to indicate the status of the procedure See Forced Installation of System Software in Chapter 4 for more information m The status display indicates an alarm on an MLX 20L console or a PC running SPM and can be viewed on the Error screen A supplemental alert bell chime or strobe if installed is activated If an LED is programmed to indicate the alarm the LED stays lit until the error is cleared When the system indicates an alarm check the permanent error log screen Clearing Alarms The system clears alarms automatically when the error condition no longer exists To clear an alarm manually select Drop on the MLX 20L console or Alt P Error Logs on a PC while viewing the error See Error Logs in Chapter 2 for more information System Restarts Depending on the severity and duration of a problem you may need to restart the system manually Some errors cause the system to restart automatically Every restart causes an error log entry and each type of restart has its own error code A col
393. tep 9 above 2 Plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the lower jack on a 400B2 power adapter Plug the 400B2 power adapter into the wall jack 4 Plug the 2012D 50M or 201213 transformer into the wall outlet for the printer 5 Plug one end of a second D8W cord into the top jack on the second 400B2 power adapter 6 Plug the other end of the second D8W cord into the WALL jack on the Z3A2 ADU 7 Connect the 25 pin male connector on the Z3A2 ADU to the 25 pin female end on a second 355AF adapter 8 Plug one end of a third D8W cord into the second 355AF adapter 9 Plug the other end of the third D8W cord into the SMDR jack on the back of the CAT 10 Plug one end of a fourth D8W cord into the PRINTER jack on the back of the CAT 11 Plug the other end of the fourth D8W cord into a third 355A adapter 12 Slide the third 355A adapter into the serial port on the back of the printer 13 Set the appropriate printer options for SMDR See Setting Printer Options and DIP Switches for instructions 5 14 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit Connecting a Printer Within 50 Feet 15 2 m If the printer is within 50 ft 15 2 m of the control unit and is connected to the same 117 V AC branch as the control unit use this procedure to connect a printer to the control unit You need the following hardware for this procedure m 7200A EMI filter Adapter for the connector on the interface
394. ter than 45 continue to Step 5 C 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 5 Calculate the estimated unit loads Module Qty x Unit Load Total os a Co a Peo E 400 EM 400 GS LS TTR 408 GS LS 408 GS LS MLX oo feoocsis S soosis s woo s Total Estimated Unit Load m f the total is less than or equal to 54 auxiliary power is not required m f the total is greater than 54 continue to Step 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting C 3 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet 6 Calculate the actual carrier unit load Qty x Unit Load Total Hybrid PBX or Modified Equipment Network Access Lines DID DS1 GS LS Tie Telephones MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 28D MLX 20L BIS 10 BIS 22 BIS 22D BIS 34 BIS 34D MLC 5 MDC 9000 MDCW 9000 10 Button Basic 10 Button HFAI 34 Button Basic 34 Button DLX 34 Button BIS 34 Button BIS DIS Single Line Telephone Continued Unit loads are computed per trunk for trunk type network access lines C 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Unit Load Calculation Worksheet ESErhrhrmhmmr lt 27 7 Ohktmt Qty x Unit Load Total Equipment Hybrid PBX or Square Modiffied ptional Equipment Direct Station Selector General Purpose Adapter Hands Free Unit Headset Adapter Total Actual Unit Load t The MFM has its own wall power unit located at the teleph
395. test DOS version 3 3 or later and CAS If you are installing CAS for Windows load and test DOS version 5 0 or later Windows version 3 1 or later and CAS 4 Use the planning worksheets to program the software to meet the needs of the customer CAS Documentation Call Accounting System Plus V3 Installation Call Accounting System Plus V3 Administration and Operation Call Accounting System for Windows Installation Administration and Operation Call Accounting Terminal Call Accounting Terminal CAT Plus is a stand alone application that provides accurate and flexible call accounting at a low cost Two versions of this product are offered CAT Plus Hospitality for hotels and health care facilities and CAT Plus Business for other types of businesses For more information see Connecting a Printer to a Control Unit in Chapter 5 Installing Applications 8 7 Call Accounting Terminal Considerations You can connect only one CAT to the system You must use a serial printer such as the CAT printer You must locate the CAT Plus within the distances noted below m Control unit 14 ft 4 27 m direct connection 1000 ft 805 m using building wiring m Serial printer 50 ft 15 2 m Power supply grounded wall outlet 4 ft 1 22 m Hardware Requirements The following hardware is required for CAT installation m Call Accounting Terminal CAT Plus m Serial printer AT amp T CAT Printer is recommended connected by a
396. th the connector on the carrier 3 Push the module into the carrier until it locks into place Installing the Ferrite Cores At this point the power supply should have been installed in the carrier but there should be no cables or power cords attached to the power supply module NOTE If you are upgrading a system unplug the AC power cord and remove the ground wire attached to the grounding screw on the front of the power supply Follow these steps to install the ferrite cores 1 Feed the AC power and ground wire through the wire manager refer to 2 Open the ferrite cores by unsnapping the plastic case 3 Attach a ferrite core around the AC power cord and the ground wire by snapping the plastic case shut 4 Attach the second ferrite core adjacent to the first ferrite core by repeating Steps 2 and 3 5 Slide the ferrite cores between the wire manager and the power supply module refer to Figure 2 7 6 Attach the ground wire to the grounding screw on the power supply module 7 Check that the other end of the ground wire is connected to the terminals of the single point ground baron the AC outlet box Installing the Control Unit 2 23 Haile the Power seh A caution Do not connect the power cord until the entire control unit is assembled POWER SUPPLY MODULE AC Power Cord W LJ l Gin 4 On Off Power Indicator Green LED Ground Wire e 48 VDC Auxiliary Power Input Jack D E ie On Off Switch aBa Rat
397. the Central Office If the error logs indicate the central office as the source of the problem and you have resolved all other possible causes notify the customer that they should call the central office and ask the central office to check the problem at their end see Chapter 5 Central Office Problems If the problem is in the central office wait for the CO to fix it Then duplicate the problem conditions to ensure that the problem is really fixed m If the problem persists get the customer to again call the central office with the problem E f they indicate that the problem is not in the central office escalate the problem as described below Escalating the Problem Escalate any unresolved problems to your technical support organization See System Inventory in Chapter 2 which explains how to access the System Inventory screen This screen contains information such as the hardware vintage software vintage and ROM ID for each module that your technical support organization may request Unit Loads A unit load is a measure of power 1 9 watts used to determine the electrical load that the following components have on each carrier s power supply m Telephones and adjuncts m Direct Inward Dial DID modules 1 26 Introduction Unit Loads mm ee Only the telephones and adjuncts that connect to the analog and digital ports on the control unit require unit load calculation Do not include any equi
398. the error code identified on Line 6 For more information on an error code see Line 3 indicates the slot and port where the error was detected Line 5 indicates the error s last occurrence NOTE Depending on which entry you delete you might clear an alarm See Alarms in Chapter 1 for additional information about alarms Checking Transient Errors Follow Steps 1 through 3 above for Checking the Error Logs In Step 3 select Transient Transient Errors gt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXMXXXXX Slot xx Port xx Count xxx Press the More button to page PgUp First mm dd yy hh mm through the transient errors Last mm dd yy hh mm Code xxxx Press the Drop button to delete Exit an error log entry Alt P Line 2 provides a brief description of the error code identified on Line 6 For more information on an error code see Line 3 indicates the slot and port where the error was detected Line 5 indicates the error s last occurrence 2 4 Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory Error Logs i Checking the Last 10 Errors Follow Steps 1 through 3 above for Checking the Error Logs In Step 3 select Last 10 Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Last 10 System Errors gt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Slot xx Port xx Last mm dd yy hh mm Code XxXxX Press the More button to page Exit through the last 10 errors PgUp Line 2 provides a brief description of the error code identified o
399. ti Function Modules Lower and Press Into Center Slot to Secure Figure 3 13 Lowering and Locking the Module Cover b Lower the cover to the right and press firmly into the center slot to lock the tab in place The tab must be secure Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 15 Installing Multi Function Modules Figure 3 14 Replacing and Tightening the Module Cover Screw c Replace and tighten the module cover screw that you removed in Step 3 3 16 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules Tees Lower Into Inner J Center Slot Cx f a 7 oO _ 7 EK Figure 3 15 Replacing the Deskstand 9 Replace the deskstand See Figure 3 15 If you are wall mounting an MLX 10 MLX 10D or MLX 10DP telephone go to Step 11 otherwise continue with Step 9a a Place the tab on the narrow edge of the deskstand into the locating slot on the telephone base Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 17 Installing Multi Function Modules Lower and Press Into Figure 3 16 Lowering the DeskStand and Locking into Place b Lower the deskstand and lock into place 3 18 Installing Telephones and Adjuncts Installing Multi Function Modules Telephonet Base Figure 3 17 Replacing the User Card Tray and Line Cable 10 Replace the user card tray and line cable See Figure 3 17 a Insert the user card tray at an angle
400. ting fax Fax Attendant System FCC feature feature code feature module Feature screen ferrite core Flash ROM foil shield forced idle foreign exchange Glossary See FRL Default state of a device or feature when an optional setting is not programmed by the user or system manager facsimile Scanning and transmission of a graphic image over a telecommunications facility or the resulting reproduced image or the machine that does the scanning and transmitting Fax handling and processing application available with AUDIX Voice Power Federal Communications Commission Function or service provided by the system Code entered on a dialpad to activate a feature Prior to Release 3 0 a circuit pack inserted into the processor module used to provide system features and replaced when the system is upgraded Display screen on MLX display telephones provides quick access to commonly used features Attachment to the AC power cord and ground wire of the carrier power supply for compliance with FCC part 15 requirements Beginning with Release 3 0 a type of read only memory provided on the processor module used to supply system features Copper foil sheet for power units used to prevent excessive noise on the module Condition of the system during certain programming or maintenance procedure system prevents initiation of new calls See FX Maintenance and Troubleshooting GL 15 Glossary
401. ting circuit module firmware has been corrupted Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance Slot Dial the slot no Enter Upgrade Yes PC Procedures F6 gt F2 Type the slot no gt F10 F8 gt or F10 gt F4 Appropriate Modules This procedure can be run only on the 800 LS ID module or modules introduced after Release 3 0 Time Estimate Approximately 1 5 minutes Busy Out or Reset The module is automatically busied out after the upgrade procedure begins If Busy Out is unsuccessful you are given the option of waiting for a Busy Out or selecting Reset Restore Restore the module after the upgrade successfully completes Restore isin the Slot menu which you can access by doing the following from the console Menu Maintenance Sl ot See Restore earlier in this chapter for additional information Control Unit Problems 4 61 Module Problems PROCESSOR MODULE a Error Status Code Display PCMCIA Interface Slot Wrenetation Card COM Code 1234850789 MEF CODA CO A TE vs Push in ase to remove Memory Card Memory Card a Alarm Status LED Figure 4 7 Inserting the Upgrade Memory Card To upgrade or reinstall circuit module firmware follow the steps below 1 insert an upgrade memory card containing the circuit module firmware into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor board See Figure 4 7 4
402. tion manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense For further FCC information see Customer Support Information It follows Maintenance and Troubleshooting in this binder Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicable aux appareils num riques de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Trademarks 5ESS Accunet ACCULINK Megacom MERLIN MERLIN LEGEND ACCULINK Magic On Hold MultiQuest and Systimax are registered trademarks and 4ESS AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System HackerTracker MERLIN MAIL MERLIN PFC MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 10DP MLX 20L MLX 28D PassageWay and PictureTel are trademarks of AT amp T in the U S and other countries Supra StarSet and Mirage are registered trademarks of Plantronics Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc PagePac is a registered trademark of DRACON a division of Harris Corporat
403. tore Auto Backup Exit F3 D 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Estate Se with a vieman Card Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 5 Make a selection Auto MemCard Backup Select one EE Off EE Daily E Weekly Select off Daily or Weekly BRE Exit Enter 6 Save your entry oe Select Enter F10 If you selected Off you have finished this procedure Go to Step 7 If you selected Dail y go to Daily Backup Procedure If you selected Weekl y go to Weekly Backup Procedure 7 Return to the System Programming menu Select Exi t two times F5 F5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 13 Backing Up with a Memory Card Daily Backup Procedure Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 Erase the current daily backup time Xxxx Daily MemCard Backup Enter hour 00 23 and minutes CID 57 HHMM XXXX Backspace Exit Press Drop Alt P 2 Enter the time when you want the automatic backup to run everyday hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 Daily MemCard Backup Enter hour 00 P2 and minutes 00 57 HHMM Backspace Exit Dial or type hhmm G 3 Save your entry Select Enter F10 4 Return to the System Programming menu Select Exit two times F5 F5 D 14 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card E Weekly Backup Procedure Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 Erase the current weekly backup day and time
404. tors 4 8 Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface Wiring SE rhrrmrmrmrmC CSsSONNNOCtst C CSYNCONCNCS 8 Test the central office trunks for proper connection See Testing Trunks later in this chapter for instructions 9 Label the network interface jacks control unit module jacks termination blocks and D2R cords See Labeling Trunks later in this chapter for instructions 10 For each trunk plug one end of a D2R cord into the designated jack on the termination block and the other end into the line trunk jack on the proper control unit module NOTE The modular jacks on the termination block are 8 wire jacks The D2R cords which are 6 wire also plug into the 8 wire jacks A CAUTION Do not plug an analog multiline telephone an MLX telephone or anything else that should be plugged into an extension jack into this wiring field doing so will busy out the trunk Connecting the Control Unit to the Network Interface 4 9 Wiring pE rrrrr C Ct COCOCOCOCOTCOC CS RJ11 and RJ14 Interfaces RJ11 and RJ14 interfaces are connected to the control unit similarly However note the following differences m RJ11 connects one central office trunk per jack m RJ14 connects two trunks per jack Plug a 267C type adapter into each RJ14 jack You need D2R cords for RJ11 jacks See Figure 4 5 Single Line Adapter RJ11 I 2 Line Adapter RJ14 ks 7 Figure 4 5 RJ
405. trol Unit in Chapter 2 if you need instructions 4 Install the Release 3 0 processor module in the carrier See Installing the Processor in Chapter 2 5 Perform a frigid start System Erase to ensure that system programming is returned to default values Use system Erase from the SPM Maintenance menu Maintenance gt Slot gt 00 Demand Test System Erase Line 5 left button twice Yes See Maintenance and Troubleshooting for more information on System Erase 6 Program the system m Restore the system programming from a system programming disk or Translation Memory Card Release 3 0 only if available See Restoring from the System Programming Disk or Restoring from the Translation Memory Card in Chapter 7 m If a disk or memory card is not available see System Programming for details on programming the system 7 If applicable program new features See System Programming for detailed programming procedures 8 Replace the control unit housing See Chapter 2 Installing the Control Unit for additional instructions Release 2 0 or Earlier To install the control unit s housing follow the steps below 1 Place the front panel s face down 2 If you are housing more than one carrier connect the front panels together a Line up the arrows b Slide the panels until the semicircles form a complete circle See 9 16 Upgrading the System Completing the Upgrade ee 3 Connect
406. ts induced by nearby power lines See the installation notes packaged with the ADU for more information 5 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the WALL jack on the Z3A2 ADU 6 Plug the other end of the D8W cord into an ADU crossover cable 7 Plug the other end of the ADU crossover cable into one of the jacks ona 400B2 power adapter 8 Plug one end of a D6AP cord into the other jack of the 400132 adapter 5 18 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit Processor Module 355AF Adapter M8AJ 87 i Z3A2 ADU Adapter Adapter BRIA 4P Adapter 102 Connecting Block 103 Connecting Block 2 DW 102 or 103 Connecting Block Block ow EIA 232 D D6AP poner 2012D 50M Transformer I AC Outlet SMDR Printer M8AJ 87 Adapter Figure 5 6 Connecting a Printer More Than 50 ft 15 2 m Away Installing the PC CAT or Printer 5 19 Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit 248B Adapter 2012D Transformer Transformer with 248B Adapter D6AP Cord Y Figure 5 7 Connecting the 24813 Adapter and the 201213 Transformer 9 Plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the 2012D 50M transformer If you are working with a 248B adapter and 2012D transformer instead of a 2012D 50M transformer plug the D6AP cord into the jack on the 248B adapter and then connect the spade tip wires on the 248B adapter to the screws on a 2012D transformer See Figure 5 7 10 Pl
407. ts module occupies the selected slot CSU I pbk Clock BchLoopback appears in place of Exit Upgrade CSU I pbk FA 4 90 Control Unit Problems Checking System and Slot Status m EErhrhrhmmm OSNCNN If you selected Slot 00 the screen below appears For detailed information about this status screen see Slot Status earlier in this chapter Status Slot 00 R aaa status On Off No of red LED LED Raaa Errors Alarms Exit If you selected a slot other than 00 the screen below appears For detailed information about this status screen see Slot Status earlier in this chapter Status Slot xx Xx slot number entered in Step 2 LED R aaa Y aaa G aaa R aaa status On Off No of red LED Errors Y aaa status On Off No of yellow LED Mode G aaa status On Off No of green LED Al ar ms Maintenance Busy Select Next to go from one slot Exit Next to the next F10 Control Unit Problems 4 91 Checking System and Slot Status 4 92 Control Unit Problems Central Office Problems If you have tested the telephones and the modules in the control unit you have isolated the trouble to the trunks or the CO To isolate the trouble further follow the instructions in this chapter to troubleshoot the trunks If the trouble persists after following these instructions the customer should contact the CO and ask a representative to troubleshoot from that end Trunk Errors The
408. ug the 40092 adapter into a wall jack BRI A 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block 11 Complete the 400B2 connection 5 20 Installing the PC CAT or Printer Connecting a Printer to the Control Unit pE m f the 400B2 is plugged into a wall jack make sure that building wiring has been set up so that the wall jack for the control unit can communicate with the wall jack for the printer If the 400B2 is plugged into a BRIA 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block use 4 pair plug ended cable to connect the BRIA 4P adapter or connecting block to the wall jack for the printer 12 On the printer side plug one end of a D8W cord into the wall jack and the other end into the WALL jack on the Z3A2 ADU 13 Plug one end of an EIA 232 D cable into the 25 pin male connector on the Z3A2 ADU and the other end into the serial port on the printer 14 Plug the 2012D 50M or 2012D transformer into a wall outlet 15 Set the appropriate printer options for SMDR See Setting Printer options and DIP Switches for instructions Setting Printer Options and DIP Switches If the customer has an AT amp T 572 AT amp T 475 476 CAT or AT amp T Applications printer use this section to set up printer options If another type of serial printer is being used review these setup options for guidance and consult the manual for the printer Use the information below to determine the correct printer setting for the p
409. ugh the system E Abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control Acts of third parties and acts of God AT amp T S OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE AT amp T ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND AUTHORIZED RESELLERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE A 14 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Customer Support Information Limitation of Liability EXCEPT FOR PERSONAL INJURY DIRECT DAMAGES TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY PROXIMATELY CAUSED BY AT amp T AND LIABILITY OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY ASSUMED IN A WRITTEN AGREEMENT SIGNED BY AT amp T THE LIABILITY OF AT amp T ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND AUTHORIZED RESELLERS FOR ANY CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES OR EXPENSES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF THIRD PARTIES REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE SHALL NOT EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE LESSER OF THE DIRECT DAMAGES PROVEN OR THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SYSTEM IN NO EVENT SHALL AT amp T OR ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS OR AUTHORIZED RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL RELIANCE CONSEQUENTLY OR ANY OTHER INDIRECT LOSS OR DAMAGE INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH THE SYSTEM THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL SURVIVE FAILU
410. uncts Such as an answering machine 2 Inthe Old Ext No column if the wire run is being changed enter the extension number of the old extension If you are working with a new installation leave this space blank 3 Inthe Renumber to column enter the extension number of the extension if not already filled in This includes new installations 4 In the Wire No column enter the number of the wire as indicated by the label on the wire 5 Inthe Person Location or Function column enter the name of the person at the location of or the function of Such as a fax machine the extension and any miscellaneous information particular to that extension Installation A 3 System Numbering Forms E ee Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts Maximum 127 Adjuncts z MLX Factory Sek Telephone Person Location T R 7500B Ext No Function and Equipment Type 736 326 7326 737 327 7327 796 528 7926 _ Figure A 2 Form 2b System Numbering Digital Adjuncts A 4 Installation Syston Aumberng Forms Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Music on Hold Line Trunk No Loudspeaker Page Line Trunk No s Module Type and Slot No aclolry If the system has AUDIX Voice Power FAX Attendant System Integrated Pool out
411. unit load requirement for a carrier exceeds 54 102 6 watts an auxiliary power unit is needed to allow that carrier to support an additional 27 unit loads 51 3 watts A CAUTION Running the system with more than 54 unit loads 102 6 watts per carrier may not appear to do harm However this can cause the system to malfunction creating No Trouble Found conditions An auxiliary power unit redirects the power requirements from the last two slots on the carrier Any extension connected to the modules in the last two slots receives power from the auxiliary power unit instead of from the power supply If an auxiliary power unit is required complete installation instructions are provided in Installation 1 28 Introduction Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory As described in Maintenance Strategy in Chapter 1 much of your troubleshooting relies on the error logs and the access log for maintenance and system programming Both of these maintenance features are described here in detail This chapter also explains how to access the System Inventory screen which you may need when you escalate problems to your technical support organization For information on entering and exiting maintenance functions on a console or a PC running SPM see Chapter 1 Introduction Error Logs When an error occurs the system records it in the error logs which are stored in battery backed up RAM These errors indicate p
412. uration 6 10 Connecting Data Equipment MLX Voice and Modem Data Stations amp amp amp To set up a modem data and MLX voice station follow the steps below 1 Use an EIA 232 D cable to connect the serial port on the data terminal to the modem For a data terminal that has both COM1 and COM2 jacks make sure you use the one designated for data transmission See the customer s system manager if you are not sure 2 Make sure that the modem has settings for speed and parity that are compatible with those of the data terminal If you are not sure see the customer s system manager or the documentation packaged with the modem data communications software and data terminal 3 Connect the modem to the MFM in the MLX telephone If the MFM is not installed already refer to Installing Multi Function Modules in Chapter 3 a Plug one end of a D4BU cord into the appropriate modem jack as described in the modem s documentation b Plug the other end into the TEL OTHER jack on the bottom of the MLX telephone c Route the D4BU cord through the telephone s cord channel 4 Connect the MLX telephone to the control unit a Plug one end of a D8W cord into the LINE jack on the bottom of the MLX telephone b Plug the other end into the appropriate MLX extension jack See Form 2a System Numbering Extension Jacks for the appropriate module and extension jack 5 Connect all power cords to an AC outlet th
413. ust first upgrade the hardware then reprogram the system 1 4 Introduction Installing the Control Unit If you have not read Chapter 1 Introduction do so before continuing with this chapter Overview Installing the control unit involves the following procedures Preparation requirements Installing the backboard Meeting the power and grounding requirements Checking the total unit load Installing the basic carrier Installing any expansion carriers Installing the power supply Installing the processor Installing the line trunk and extension modules Connecting the control unit to AC power Powering up the system Powering down the system Installing the Control Unit 2 1 Overview i _ The following sections provide detailed instructions for these installation procedures Follow the procedures in the order in which they are presented Environment The control unit must be installed on a backboard The placement of the backboard and the control unit on it requires careful consideration Make sure you install the backboard in an area that meets all of the environmental requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Operating 40 104 F 4 40 C Temperatures Optimal temperature 60 F 15 6 C Humidity 20 80 Airborne Do not expose the control unit to moisture corrosive gases dust Contamination chemicals spray paint or similar materia
414. utlet 9 Label the DSS designation cards a Pull the tab at the top of the large plastic cover and rotate the cover towards you b Remove the cover and the large designation card c Write or type the button assignments on the card For DSS1 use the side that is labeled 00 49 for DSS2 use the side labeled 50 99 The button assignments on the designation card should be by dial plan extension number not by logical ID port number d Replace the card and the plastic cover make sure the coated side of the cover is facing up e Repeat this step to remove the small plastic cover and to label the small designation card NOTE If the MLX telephone attached to the DSS is unplugged from the control unit and then plugged in again the display on the telephone may disappear Press the Home button to bring back the display Installing Telephones and Adjuncts 3 47 Assembling MLX Telephones Assembling MLX Telephones You will need to assemble an MLX telephone before connecting it to the control unit For all other telephones skip to Connecting Telephones to the Control Unit Considerations Review the following items before you begin the procedure m MLX telephones are packed with the deskstand in the low position You can use the deskstand as is raise it to a higher angle or remove it To adjust or remove the stand see Step 1 of the following instructions The diagram on the bottom of the user card tray also shows how to
415. valid FMWR not in Standby Mode Test running too long Not in TEST STANDBY mode Any other error Restoring the Module Corrective Action Exit the test busy out the slot and try again Exit the test and try again be sure to type the correct slot number Do not indicate an empty slot or the processor 00 Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Exit the test and try again if this error persists record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module being tested Record the errors on the repair tag and replace the module When you are finished running module tests be sure to restore the module See earlier in this chapter for instructions Replacing Modules You can remove and insert line trunk and extension modules separately or at the same time with the system power on without affecting normal call processing Control Unit Problems 4 57 Module Problems A CAUTION This section does not apply to the processor or power supply Although the system is designed so that you can remove and replace modules without affecting call processing partially inserting and removing a module can cause a cold start Adding a 100D module or changing any of its DS1 parameters requires that the system be
416. ver if problem persists troubleshoot the processor Troubleshoot modules and replace if necessary If problem persists troubleshoot the processor Troubleshoot the processor Continued on next page Error Logs Access Logs and System Inventory 2 7 Error Logs DEV I IIU Table 2 2 Continued Error Codes Description 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0C01 0C02 1 01 1 02 INVALID RESET FLAG Processor problem DUART STREAMING INT Processor problem PROCESSOR ERR INTERRUPT Processor problem MODULE MISMATCH Physical and logical type mismatch Module inserted into wrong slot POWER UP COLD START A module dual port RAM failure was detected System programming is okay NO I VMS PORT IN SERV This error indicates that the VMS machine may be down DID INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT May be noisy line or central office problem POOL M BUSY EXCEEDS 50 More than half the trunks in the pool are busy FW UPGRADE ATTEMPT Action Troubleshoot the processor Troubleshoot the processor Troubleshoot the processor Change system programming to reflect the proper module or install the proper module If problem persists troubleshoot the module for the slot indicated No action required No action required If problem persists troubleshoot the DID line and inform the central office if necessary Troubleshoot trunk FFW UPGRADE ATTEMPT is logged and FW UPGRADE COMPLETE is not the firmwa
417. wer supply on the basic carrier 2 Turn off the power supplies on the expansion carriers 3 Unplug any auxiliary power units Because the power supplies are already off the sequence for removing auxiliary power cords is not important 4 Unplug the system from the AC outlet 9 4 Upgrading the System Powering Down the System mm Processor C 48 VDC Auxiliary Power Auxiliary Power Unit Ferrite Cores AUX Power Unit AC AC Power Cord Outlet Caniral Unit p AC Power Cord Figure 9 2 Powering Down the System Upgrading the System 9 5 Upgrading the Control Unit Upgrading the Control Unit 1 Do not remove any of the existing carriers 2 Refer to the Control Unit Diagram on the flip side of System Planning Form 1 If you are installing an expansion carrier remove the rightmost module from the control unit and put it aside See Figure 9 3 A CAUTION Before removing any cords from the module make sure they are labeled first for easier replacement Install any expansion carriers See Installing Expansion Carriers in Chapter 2 Install or replace any modules See Installing the Modules in Chapter 2 Replace the processor module See Figure 9 3 a Press up on the tab at the bottom rear of the old processor module b While the tab is unlocked pull the processor module towards you and
418. who have voice mailboxes should be required to use the passwords to protect their mailboxes Have them use random sequence passwords Impress upon them the importance of keeping their passwords a secret Encourage them to change their passwords regularly m The administrator should remove any unneeded voice mailboxes from the system immediately m AUDIX Voice Power has the ability to limit transfers to subscribers only You are strongly urged to limit transfers in this manner m Use the Hybrid PBX or Key system administration capability to do the following Block direct access to outgoing lines and force the use of account codes authorization codes Disallow trunk to trunk transfer unless required A 16 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Customer Support Information aS Assign toll restriction levels to all AUDIX Voice Power ports or other voice mail ports If you do not need to use the Outcalling feature completely restrict the outward calling capability of the AUDIX Voice Power ports Use voice mail application features to do this m Monitor SMDR reports or Call Accounting System reports for outgoing calls that might be originated by AUDIX Voice Power ports or other voice mail ports Remote Administration and Maintenance The Remote Administration and Maintenance feature of your telecommunications system if you choose to use it permits users to change the system features and capabilitie
419. xchange reduces the unit load for slots five and six through 27 or less auxiliary power is sufficient m If the exchange does not reduce the unit loads for slots 5 and 6 through 27 install wall power units for the appropriate number of telephones to reduce the unit load to 27 NOTE Empty slots are not permitted between modules Maintenance and Troubleshooting C 9 Unit Load Calculation Worksheet pE i C 10 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing Up with a Memory Card A PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association interface slot is present on the processor module The slot is a standard interface through which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory card The PCMCIA interface slot accepts one memory card at a time This section covers the following memory card functions m Memory card formatting m Restore Summary information is included for the following procedures m Backup m Automatic backup Maintenance and Troubleshooting D 1 Backing Up with a Memory Card Card Types The types of memory cards are described below The card type is identified by a preprinted color coded label Upgrade Card This card is used for MERLIN LEGEND Communication System software upgrades The upgrade can be performed by the system manager using the memory card and the Maintenance option on the SPM Main Menu This card is identified by an orange label with black lettering
420. y b While the tab is unlocked pull the power supply towards you and then lift it straight up A WARNING Beware of hazardous voltages Whenever the carrier connections are exposed use extreme caution do not touch them directly or with any type of tool Follow all procedures carefully 9 8 Upgrading the System Upgrading the Control Unit 2 A P lt a i Figure 9 4 Replacing a Module in the Carrier 3 Remove the clips from the left side of the control unit as you did in Step 1 however make sure you replace the clips before securing the screws again 4 Reinstall the power supply module by hooking it onto the rod at the top of the carrier and then swinging it down into place See Figure 9 4 5 Push the power supply module firmly until you hear it lock Upgrading the System 9 9 Modifying the Processor for Key Mode Modifying the Processor for Key Mode To modify the processor for Key mode in Release 3 0 follow the steps below For earlier releases see Appendix Ejin Maintenance and Troubleshooting Prepare a non metallic surface such as a table on which to work A WARNING Do not touch the gold connectors on the rear of the processor module Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage the circuitry as can the oil from your fingertips Use a properly grounded wrist strap to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge Only a qualified technician should perform this procedure 1
421. y completed If only a Restore is required to put the module back into service the screen below appears Console _ Display Instructions Additional Information PC Upgrade Slot xx Upgrade Successfully Completed Slot Busied Out Slot Restore needed Exit E5 IfaBoard Renumber is also required the screen below appears Upgrade Slot xx Upgrade Successfully Completed Slot Busied Out Board Renumber needed Exit F5 Perform a Board Renumber and or Restore as indicated above Error Conditions During Firmware Upgrade The following error conditions can occur during a firmware upgrade Recovery procedures follow each error condition Memory Card In Use By Another Feature Module Upgrade Memory Card in use by another feature Exit Select Exit and begin the upgrade procedure again 4 66 Control Unit Problems Module Problems T Missing Card or Card Not Inserted Correctly Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC Module Upgrade Verify that Memory Card has been inserted correctly Exit Insert the memory card correctly then select Exit and begin the upgrade procedure again Memory Card Is Corrupt Modulde Upgrade Information on the Memory Card is corrupted Please remove the Memory Card Exit Select Exit and repeat the upgrade procedure with a new memory card Module Cannot Be Upgraded Upgrade Slot xx xx slot selected in Step 3 Module can not be upgraded
422. y out is the preferred method because it does not disrupt calls in progress m Reset discontinues service to all lines and extensions on the module instantly In progress calls are dropped if all of the calling parties on the call originate and terminate on the module being reset lf a call is using a line or extension on the module being Reset and another line and or extension is involved in the call the call on the module being reset is put on hold In this case the module can be removed and replaced However a demand test cannot be performed because the module is not busied out m Check the status of the reset module before performing a demand test Menu Maintenance Slot Status Once you finish testing a module you must restore it Restoring a module terminates the Busy out or Reset condition See later in this chapter for instructions Control Unit Problems 4 37 Module Problems Busy Out Summary Console Procedure Menu Maintenance Slot Dial the slot no gt Enter gt Busy Out gt Yes PC Procedure E6 E2 Type the slot no F10 gt F2 F1 Appropriate Modules Any module that you are about to test Time Estimate Once all calls are terminated the busy out completes in less than 1 second If calls in progress take too long ask the callers to hang up To busy out a module follow the steps below Console Display Instructions Additional Information PC 1 From the Maintenance menu sel
423. you can access the dictation system To access the dictation system follow the steps below 1 At the test telephone pickup the handset 2 Dial the access code and the number associated with the dictation equipment Verify that the ready tone is transmitted Test the transmission in both directions make a recording and play it back 5 Hang up Testing the Paging System To test the paging system follow the steps below 1 Pick up the handset at the test telephone and dial the number for a particular zone If ZoneMate 9 paging equipment is in use with PagePac 20 get an acknowledge tone first and then dial the zone code to make an announcement You may hear a confirmation tone 7 16 Initializing and Testing the System Testing the System 2 Make an announcement into the handset You should hear the announcement over the loudspeaker s 3 Hang up 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for all paging zones Testing Music On Hold To verify that music is provided to outside callers placed on hold follow the steps below Inside callers do not hear Music On Hold 1 Pick up the handset at the test telephone 2 Dial the central office trunk access code and the system s published directory number or if you are using a DID trunk dial any extension 3 At the destination extension answer the incoming call 4 At the destination extension press the Hold button The line button s green LED should flash 5 Verify that music is hea
424. ystem a Turn off the power supply in the basic carrier b Turn off the power supply in each expansion carrier c Unplug the auxiliary power unit if present from the AC outlet 3 Unplug the system from the AC outlet 4 Remove the power supply a Unplug the AC power cord from the power supply b Remove the ground wire attached to the grounding screw on the front of the power supply module c Remove the two ferrite cores if present from around the AC power cord and ground wire d Remove the power supply module 4 10 Control Unit Problems Power Supply Problems To replace the power supply module follow the steps below and refer to 4 3 1 Insert a new power supply a Reinstall the power supply module by hooking the top into the basic carrier and then swinging it down into place Push the lower end firmly until the locking tab clicks b Replace the ferrite cores around the AC power cord and ground wire and slide the ferrite cores between the wire manager and the power supply module c Attach the ground wire to the grounding screw 2 For each power supply and auxiliary power unit connect the AC power cord to the connector marked AC INPUT on the power supply 3 Plug the other end of each AC power cord into the AC outlet 4 Power up the system by turning on the components listed below in the order given a Power supply on each expansion carrier b Power supply on the basic carrier The system automatically
425. ystem unit and power cords Remote maintenance device with a wall mount transformer Modem cable with a 9 pin connector at one end and a 25 pin connector at the other end to connect the remote maintenance device to the serial port on the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System unit D4BU modular cords two for a 2 port system or four for a 4 port system plus one for the remote maintenance device m 012 basic telephone module For more information consult MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Installation System Programming and Maintenance Installing Applications 8 19 MERLIN PFC T SESEhrhmLLLC MERLIN PFC The MERLIN PFC Phone Fax Copier telephone is a 34 button display telephone with a built in fax and personal copier that provides the convenience of a fax machine and personal copier in one compact unit The MERLIN PFC allows the user to make and receive inside and outside calls using the built in speakerphone and to send and receive faxes or make quick copies while using the telephone Considerations The fax machine component of the MERLIN PFC telephone does not transmit date time and fax number In Behind Switch mode a dedicated fax line for incoming fax calls is also required in Hybrid PBX or Key mode the system can have either a dedicated fax line or Direct Inward Dialing DID You cannot install the MERLIN PFC telephone outside a building You must remove all

AT&T MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3.0 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

AT&amp;T MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3.0 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

AT&T MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3.0 User's Manual